RISO MZ Servicemanual Engl [PDF]
E OP MZ MV SERIES UR TECHNICAL MANUAL OE RISO MZ 770 A RISO MZ 770 E RISO MZ 790 U RISO MV 7690 C REVISION 0.3 APR
51 0 20MB
Papiere empfehlen
![RISO MZ Servicemanual Engl [PDF]](https://vdoc.tips/img/200x200/riso-mz-servicemanual-engl.jpg)
- Author / Uploaded
- kuvalda2000_86453363
Datei wird geladen, bitte warten...
Zitiervorschau
E
OP
MZ MV SERIES
UR
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OE
RISO MZ 770 A RISO MZ 770 E RISO MZ 790 U RISO MV 7690 C REVISION 0.3 APRIL 2005
RIS
Copyright : 2005 Riso Kagaku Corporation All Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was prepared and written for the exclusive use of RISO International Group Certified Dealers. Reproduction and/or transmittal of this material in any form or by any means, including photocopying or recording of the information is strictly prohibited without the consent of a member of RISO International Group.
RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION (JAPAN) RISO, INC. (U.S.A.) RISO EUROPE LIMITED (U.K.) RISO HONG KONG (HONG KONG) RISO UK (U.K.) RISO THAILAND LIMITED (THAILAND) RISO KOREA LIMITED (KOREA)
RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY) RISO FRANCE (FRANCE) RISO IBERICA (SPAIN) RISO CANADA (CANADA) ZHUHAI RISO TECHNOLOGY (CHINA) RISO AFRICA (SOUTH AFRICA) RISOGRAPH ITALIA (ITALY)
E
OP
IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS • Always disconnect the power plug before performing maintenance work.
UR
• Be careful to avoid getting neckties, clothing, long hair, or similar articles caught in moving or rotating parts. • Exercise extreme caution if you must work on the machine while power is on. • Never work on the machine while it is operating.
RIS
OE
• Be careful to avoid injuries caused by springs or sharp edges of sheet metal.
E
INDEX
OP
Important Precautions Chapter 1 : Maintenance
Chapter 2 : Machine Summary
Chapter 3 : Main Drive Section
UR
Chapter 4 : Initial Paper Feed Section Chapter 5 : Second Paper Feed Section Chapter 6 : Pressure Section Chapter 7 : Center Transport Section
OE
Chapter 8 : Paper Ejection Section Chapter 9 : Print Drum Section Chapter 10 : Clamp Units Chapter 11 : Master Removal Section
RIS
Chapter 12 : FB Scanning Section Chapter 13 : AF Scanning Section Chapter 14 : Master Making Section Chapter 15 : Test Mode Chapter 16 : Panel Message Chapter 17 : Other Precautions Chapter 18 : PCBs
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Blank Page
Chapter 1 Maintenance
1.
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 1 Maintenance
Preface ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Work Precautions .................................................................................................................... 1-3 Caution ............................................................................................................................... 1-4 Warning .............................................................................................................................. 1-5 Description of Jigs .................................................................................................................. 1-8
3.
Notice ....................................................................................................................................... 1-9
4.
Options Installation Procedures .......................................................................................... 1-11 1) Inkless Print Cylinder (Drum) ....................................................................................... 1-11 2) Stand D Type (II) ......................................................................................................... 1-12 3) Stand N Type (II) ......................................................................................................... 1-13 4) Document Storage Card DM-128CF:Z ........................................................................ 1-14 5) Auto Document Feeder AF-IV:N .................................................................................. 1-15 6) Job Separator IV:N ...................................................................................................... 1-24 7) Key/Card Counter IV ................................................................................................... 1-28 8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed / Ejection ................................................................................. 1-33
5.
Removing Exterior Covers ................................................................................................... 1-38
6.
Opening the SH PCB Bracket and Power Supply/Sytem PCB Bracket ............................. 1-41
RIS
OE
UR
2.
[1-1]
CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE
E
Preface This manual provides Technical Service Information for the RISO printer models MZ and MV series.
This manual provides procedures for removing and installing major components. Following these procedures
RIS
OE
UR
OP
awareness and experience regarding repairs necessary to insure end-user satisfaction.
[1-2]
CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE
1. Work Precautions
E
When conducting maintenance work, be careful to avoid injury caused by springs or the sharp edges of sheet metal.
OP
Inspection If you discover any defects or problems during an inspection, fix the problems or if necessary take steps such as replacing a part.
UR
Removal Check the problem area. At the same time, examine the cause of the problem and determine whether the part needs to be removed or disassembled. Next proceed according to the procedures presented in the Technical Manual. In cases where, for example, it is necessary to disassemble areas with large numbers of parts, parts which are similar to each other, or parts which are the same on the left and right, sort the parts so that you do not mix them up during reassembly. (1) Carefully sort the removed parts. (2) Distinguish between parts which are being replaced and those which will be reused. (3) When replacing screws, etc., be sure to use the specified sizes. Assembly and Installation Unless specified otherwise, perform the removal procedures in reverse during assembly and installation. In cases where protrusions or holes are provided to assist in positioning parts, use them for accurate positioning and securing.
Half pierced
OE
(Protrusions and holes for positioning parts section)
Half-pierced section
0101
Tools Using tools other than those specified can lead to injury or damage screws and parts. Have all the tools necessary for the work available.
[Standard Tool list]
Tip size
Shaft length, etc.
No. 2 No. 2 No. 2 No. 1
(250 mm) (100 mm–150 mm) (stubby type) (75 mm–100 mm)
Standard screw driver
6 mm 3 mm 1.8 mm
(100 mm–150 mm) (100 mm–150 mm) (precision type)
Nut driver (box driver)
8 mm 7 mm
(100 mm–150 mm) (100 mm–150 mm)
High frequency driver
2.5 mm
RIS
Type
Phillips screw driver
Spanners
Hex w renches
5 mm 8 mm
Type Steel scale
Rem arks 150 mm
Feeler gauge Radial cutting pliers Pliers Nipper Small flashlight Multimeter Soldering iron
20 W–30 W
File
Flat, round
0103
5.5 mm 7 mm 10 mm 13 mm Monkey
5.0 mm 4.0 mm 3.0 mm 2.5 mm 2.0 mm 1.5 mm (For 3.0mm, 2 pieces required )
0102
[1-3]
OP
CAUTION
E
CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE
[Handling of Lithium Battery]
- Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the used lithium battery.
OE
UR
1. Never let the battery short-circuited. If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the battery will be short-circuited. If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly or one upon another, the above-mentioned case will occur. - DANGER If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some cases explode into fire. 2. Never heat up the battery. - DANGER If you heat the battery up to more than 100 degrees Celsius or put it into the fire, it may burn dangerously or explode. 3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation. - DANGER If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurt your throat or the negative lithium may heat up into fire. If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out of the sealed part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode. 4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children. If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down. Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor. [Replacement of the Lithium Battery]
RIS
1. The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized service technician. 2. The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
[1-4]
!! WARNING !!
E
CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE
OP
Important Safety Precautions
1. Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the machine. I. To avoid injuries: Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling, or when making adjustments on the machine.
2. WARNING:
UR
II. Protection of the machine: Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplugging the electrical connectors, or when connecting a Meter.
The back light tube of LCD of the Control Panel on this Model contains mercury which must be recycled or disposed of as hazardous waste.
3. Always connect electrical connectors firmly.
OE
I. To avoid electrical failure: The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs. Press on the ends of the connectors and then on the middle to ensure a firm fit. II. Protection of the electrical components: The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a loose connector.
Wire harness connector
RIS
FIRST
Press the ends.
THEN
Press the center, firmly. 0116
[1-5]
Chapter 1 Maintenance
Wire bundle bands (bar lock ties)
UR
OP
• After removing wire bundles, fasten them with wire bundle bands (bar lock ties) so they will not sag. • When installing parts, be careful to avoid pinching or damaging the wire bundles. • If a fuse blows, always replace with a fuse of the specified capacity. Light-emitting section • As well as damaging parts, using a larger capacity fuse may result in fire. • Be careful to avoid dropping image scanners, thermal print heads, or other sensors. These components are easily damaged.
E
Electrical system work
Sensor types
• Photoelectric sensors can be roughly classified into the following five categories: interrupt type (Ushaped), actuator type, reflective type, transmissive type, and reflective (prism) type. • Always switch off power before plugging or unplugging sensor connectors.
Interrupt type
OE Reflective (prism) type
0105
Switch types
Light receiving section
Prism
RIS
Light-emitting section
Light receiving section
Reflective type
Transmissive type
Light-emitting section
Light receiving section
• Microswitches may be divided into either normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) types. • In an N.O. type microswitch, pressing the switch actuator connects the internal contact. • In an N.C. type microswitch, pressing the switch actuator disconnects the internal contact.
Actuator type
Light-emitting section
Light receiving section
Light-emitting section
0104
Light receiving section
N.C. N.O.
Light-emitting section
N.C. N.O. COM (common terminal)
COM (common terminal)
Note
The RZ series contains may gears. When inspecting or replacing parts, be sure to apply lubrication to the gears. If gears are not properly lubricated, abnormal sounds, malfunctions, or mechanical problems may result.
[1-6]
0106
0107
CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE
Do not install the machine in any of the following locations.
E
Installation location
OP
(1) Those subject to direct sunlight or any bright location such as by a window (If you must install in such a location, put a curtain or the like over the window.). (2) Those where the temperature changes drastically. (3) Those that are too hot, cold, humid, or dry. RECOMMENDED: Temperature range: Humidity range:
15 degrees Celsius - 30 degrees Celsius
40% - 70% No condensation allowed
UR
(4) Those with radiant heat sources and any locations in the direct path of air from air conditioners or heaters. (5) Any poorly ventilated location. (6) Dusty atmosphere. (7) Any tilted location.
OE
(Installation height difference: 10 mm max. front - rear, 10 mm max. left - right).
Electrical connection -
Plug the plug securely into the socket so that there is no problem with the contact in the power supply plug section. Do not use any triplets or extension cords. Do not allow any other machine to stand on or crush the power cord.
RIS
Ground connection -
Always ground this machine to prevent electrical shock in case of an electrical leakage. • Never connect the ground wire to any of the following: Gas pipe Ground wire for telephone Lightning rod Water supply pipe or faucet with plastic pipe used at one or more sections
[1-7]
Chapter 1 Maintenance
Description of Jigs
OP
E
2.
Screen jig
UR
0108
OE
Form a hook on the ring end of the screen spring assembly 13 (021-16007-005) and attach a wire tie band to the other side.
0109
0110
Jig: 4 mm (Dia.) x 120 mm (Length)
Jig: 8 mm (Dia.) x 160 mm (Length) (2 pieces required)
RIS
024-75064-006
016-16141-003
* These part numbers are accurate as of December 2004. Note that part numbers are subject to change without notice.
[1-8]
3. NOTICE
024-36008-107
E
Notice
1
ミラーマット
The following procedures are required when installing the printer. 6.
1.
Remove the Scanner Cover; R.
OP
Scanner Cover; R
く。
製版ユニット
5.
UR
製版ユニットを元に戻す。 製版ユニットを開け、ミラーマット（2 枚）を取り除
Securing plate
2.
Remove the protectors from both sides of the Master making unit.
重要： 板金は手順7で再度固定します。
4.
3.
Remove the screws which lock the Master making
板金を取り外す（ネジ2 本）。
unit and pull out the Master making unit.
スペーサー
Protectors
OE
Important: Retain the removed screws as they will
重要： ネジは手順 7で再利用します。
し、製版ユニットを引き出す。
4.
be reused at procedure7.
Remove the securing plate. (two screws)
3.
製版ユニットを固定しているネジ（2 本）を取り外
RIS
Important: Retain the securing plate as it will be
5.
板金
2.
スペーサー（2 本）を取り除く。
Master making unit
fixed again at procedure7.
Open the Master making unit and remove the Shock absorbing sheets.
6.
Replace the Master making unit as before.
Shock absorbing sheets
[1-9]
1
スキャナカバー;右
1.
スキャナカバー;右を取り外す。
必ず下記の手順で設置準備を行ってください
お願い
2 7.
E
3. NOTICE
Replace the securing plate and secure it with the screws.
OP
Important: Slightly slide the securing plate upwards and fix it at the upper position.
Replace the Scanner Cover; R.
UR
8.
User's guide case
9.
Attach the User's guide case to the printer. Remove the adhesive cover sheet on the backside and affix the case on the printer. Be sure to consult your
取説ケース
取説ケースを取り付ける。
9.
スキャナカバー；右を元通りに取り付ける。
8.
RIS
上で、ケース裏面のテープで架台側面などに 重要： どこに取り付けるか、お客様の意向を確認した
重要： 板金は上に寄せて取り付けてください。
板金をネジ（2本）で取り付ける。
[1-10]
7.
2
取り付けてください。
OE
customer for attachment position.
4. OPTIONS
1) Inkless Print Cylinder (Drum)
Installation Procedure for The Ztype series Inkless Print Cylinder (Drum) Packing List
The following printer models are the intended basic units for installing the Ztype inkless print cylinder (drum).
This package contains the following items. 1. Print cylinder (drum) ................................... 1 unit 2. Ink color indication label ...................... 1 sheet 3. Print cylinder (drum) indication label ...... 2 sheets 4. *Caution label ....................................... 1 sheet (*for UI print cylinder (drum) only ) 5. Installation guide (This manual) .......... 1 copy 6. *Declaration of conformity .................. 1 copy (*for EU only)
RISO MZ7 series Nobody but Riso-authorized service representatives is allowed to install this unit. Important !
OP
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models
E
Types of Applicable Printers
UR
Be sure to follow the given instructions, or the warranty on this Print cylinder (drum) may be invalidated.
1. Print Cylinder (Drum) Preparation
1) Remove two Shock absorbing blocks from the Print cylinder (drum). 2) Insert an ink cartridge into the Print cylinder (drum). Lead ink to the nozzle of the cartridge in advance. Important !
Be sure that the Print cylinder (drum) temperature is above 59 °F (10 °C). 3) Plug the power cord of the printer and start up the test mode. Important !
OE
Be sure that there is no Print cylinder (drum) installed in the printer at this point. 4) Install the Print cylinder (drum) in the printer. Press the Reset key when an error code appears.
5) Input the test item code “No. 117” and press the Start key. 6) Input the test item code “No. 890” and press the Start key.
Print Cylinder (Drum) Selection screen will appear. Select the Print Cylinder (Drum) which is installing at the present time and press the Start key. 7) Once turn the power switch off and start up the test mode again. 8) Input the test item code “No. 887” and press the Start key. Print Cylinder (Drum) Selection screen will appear. Select the Print Cylinder (Drum) which is installing at the present time and press the Start key.
RIS
When the ink supply action is completed, a buzzer sounds. NOTE : If the action is interrupted, restart the test mode “No.887”.
9) Restart the printer to quit the test mode. Ztype
2. Operation Check
1) Make a master with Riso test chart No.8 and print 200 copies at speed 3. 2) Check density balance and if necessary, re-adjust the gap between Squeegee roller and Print cylinder (drum) body.
A3
3. Labeling
1) Affix the following labels on the Print cylinder (drum) as illustrated. - Print cylinder (drum) indication label - Model name indication label - Ink color indication label - Caution label (for UI print cylinder (drum) only ) 2) Affix the following labels on the Print cylinder (drum) case as illustrated. - Print cylinder (drum) indication label - Model name indication label
This document is printed on recycled paper.
[1-11]
Ztype A3
024-36061-300
2) Stand D Type (II)
E
RISO Stand D Type (II) Installation Procedure Packing List Stand ................................ 1 pc. Door R ................................ 1 pc. Door L ................................. 1 pc. Guide pin ............................. 2 pcs. Screws ................................ 1 set
Guide pin
Nobody but Riso-authorized representatives is allowed to install this unit.
OP
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
OE
UR
1. Secure two Guide Pins on the top of the stand.
2. Secure the Doors to each Side panel with binding screws.
RIS
Important: Hook the square hole of a hinge on the Boss of the panel and secure it at the position where it becomes equal space between a Boss and a hole.
3. Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet in the dents on the Stand top board.
Boss
Equal space
024-36001-005
[1-12]
3) Stand N Type (II)
OP
E
RISO Stand N Type (II) Installation Procedure
Packing List 1. Stand ................................. 1 pc. 2. Guide pin ........................... 2 pcs.
UR
Guide pin
Nobody but Riso-authorized representatives is allowed to install this unit.
1. Insert the guide pins into the holes in the front side dents of the Stand top board.
2. Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet in the dents on the Stand top board.
RIS
OE
Stand
024-36002-001
[1-13]
4) Document Storage Card DM-128CF:Z
E
Document Storage Card DM-128CF;Z Installation Procedure Packing List
The following printer models are the intended basic units for installation.
This package contains the following items.
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models RISO MZ Series
OP
Types of Applicable Printers
1. Document Storage Card DM-128CF;Z .... 1 pc. 2. Installation guide (This manual) ............... 1 copy Nobody but Riso-authorized service representatives is allowed to install this unit.
Important ! Unplug the power cord of the printer before
UR
installation.
Remove the cover plate on the Interface port terminal, which is located on the paper feed side.
OE
1.
Cover plate
2.
Insert the Document storage card into the slot until it stops.
3.
Replace the cover plate.
RIS
Document storage card
[1-14]
024-36301-106
この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
参考： プラテンカバーは再使用しません。
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
ンカバーを取り外す。
E
4.
プラテンカバー背面のアース線を取り外し、 プラテ 図のように取り付ける。 （２ケ所） プラテンカバーのヒンジ部にあるネジを取り外し、 左
3.
電源を切り、電源コードを印刷機から抜き取る。
2.
けて実行する。 プラテンカバー
Types of Applicable Printers
Packing List
The following printer models are the intended basic units for installing the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI:N.
1.
テストモードで起動し、 「154」および「155」を続
RP215/250/255, RX215/250/255への設置手順
RN25 series RP series MZ7 series S37 series V8000 series S8000
Nobody but Riso-authorized service representatives is allowed to install this unit.
1. ADF unit .................................................... 1 unit 2. ADF control wire harness .......................... 1 pc. 3. ADF connector mount ............................... 1 pc. 4. ADF original stopper ................................. 1 pc. 5. Stage pad .................................................... 1 pc. 6. Wire clamper .............................................. 2 pcs.
7. Screws ........................................................ 1 set 8. Instruction labels ........................................ 1 set 9. Installation guide (This manual) ................ 1 copy 10. Declaration of Conformity (for EU only) ..... 1 copy
OE
Required parts
This package contains the following items.
UR
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models RISO RISO RISO RISO RISO RISO
OP
Auto Document Feeder AF-VI : N Installation Procedure
Check the parts required to install in the corresponding printer. Printer model
Required parts ADF unit ADF control wire harness ADF connector mount
RIS
ADF original stopper Stage pad Wire clamper Control panel key label
RN25
RP/ S37
MZ7
V8000/ S8000
○
○
○
○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
Wire clamper ○ Screws Following parts are additionally required. N/A ADF control wire harness;V8
○
○
○
N/A
N/A
○
N/A ○
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
○
ADF scanner control wire harness Scanner table base cushion
N/A
1
RISOMEISTER 機種名 RISO RP3 リソグラフ RP215/250/255 RP3 同梱部品 SPEDIO RX215/250/255 RX3 AFユニット ○ ○ AF 内部束線 ○ ○ コネクタ取付板金 ○ ○ 原稿突当板（AF） ○ ○ OAパット ○ ○ 束線バンド ○ ○ 取付ネジ ○ ○ ▼サービスパーツ（設置対象機種に応じて、別途用意してください） AF I/F ASSY × × AF 本体側束線 × × 開閉パッド ○ ×
○ ○ ×
× × ×
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ MZ7
V8000PS V8000
設置対象機種に応じて、 必要な部品が揃っていることを確認してください。 （○：必要 ×：不要）
設置に必要な部品 本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って ください。 RISO RP3シリーズ MZ7シリーズ V8000 RISOMEISTER V8000PS リソグラフ RP215/250/255 RP3シリーズ SPEDIO RX215/250/255 RX3シリーズ
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
AFユニット............................................ 1個 AF 内部束線 ........................................ 1 本 コネクタ取付板金 .................................. 1個 原稿突当板（AF）................................ 1枚 OAパット............................................... 1枚 束線バンド ............................................ 2本 取付ネジ ............................................... 1 式 シール ................................................... 1式 設置手順書（本書）............................. 1冊 Declaration of Conformity （CE 宣言書；EU 向け）........................ 1 枚
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。
本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。
内容物リスト
適合機種
AF-VI : N 設置手順書 [1-15]
024-36301-106
8
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N 良の原因になることがあります。） 参考： 原稿突当板（標準）は再使用しません。
原稿突当板（標準）を取り外す。
8.
上左カバーを取り外す（ネジ5本）。
7.
E
OP
原稿突当板
Open the Stage cover and remove the securing screws on the hinges.
原稿突当板（AF）を、手順8で取り外したネジで
3.
9.
Turn off the main power switch of the printer and unplug the power cord.
取り付ける。
Reuse at 19
2.
重要： 取り付ける前に、原稿突当板（AF）裏面の
Plug the power cord of the printer, start up the test mode on the printer and activate the test mode No.289.
シェーディングシート（白い部分）を清掃してく
1.
Stage cover
ださい。 （ゴミやほこりがついていると、画像不
Installation Procedure = For RISO MZ7 series models
Important: Retain the removed screws as they will be reused at procedure 19.
Dismount the Stage cover.
UR
4.
NOTE: The Stage cover is not reused.
4.
OE
プラテンカバーを取り外す。 重要： 取り外したネジは手順19で再利用します。
（２ケ所） プラテンカバーのヒンジ部にあるネジを取り外す。
3.
電源を切り、電源コードを印刷機から抜き取る。
2.
テストモードで起動し、 「289」 を入力して実行する。
1.
NOTE: The Original stopper is not reused. 9.
Secure the ADF original stopper with the screws which were removed in the step 8. Important: Before securing the ADF original stopper, be sure to clean the shading sheet (a white sheet) on the back side. If it is stained or dusty, unwanted images may appear on prints.
[1-16]
MZ7シリーズへの設置手順
RIS
参考： プラテンカバーは再使用しません。
Remove the securing screws on the Original stopper.
ゲージシートが装着されている場合は、マーカー
8.
5.
Remove the Scanner left cover.(five screws)
ゲージシート
7.
などで右側の調整部に目印を付けてから、 ゲージ
2
Remove the Scanner rear cover.(four screws)
シートを取り外す。
Original stopper
6.
マーカーで目印を付ける
Scanner left cover
上後カバーを取り外す（ネジ4本）。
Scanner rear cover
6.
Mark here
Remove the Gauge cover after putting a marking at the right-hand position adjusting point, when the Gauge cover is attached to the printer.
上後カバー
5.
上左カバー
Gauge cover
9 5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
E
上後カバー
ADF connector mount 取付穴カバー （再利用）
ください。 重要： 取付穴カバーは再利用するので破棄しないで
破棄
に元通りに取り付ける。
ADF control wire harness
OP
10. Lead the ADF control wire harness through the opening of the ADF connector mount and secure the ADF connector at the end of the wire harness to the ADF connector mount with screws (Binding screw M3x8, 2pcs).
15. 上後カバーから左図の部分を切り取り後、 印刷機
11. Insert the tab of the ADF connector mount into
Hinge housing
UR
the slit in the rear corner of the Scanner table and secure the ADF connector mount to the Scanner
ワイヤーサドル
table with screws (Double-washered screw M4x8, 2pcs).
12. Secure the terminal of the Ground wire coming out of the wire harness as illustrated. (Collar screw
Ground wire
る。
Wire saddle
M3x6, 1pce)
ADF connector mount
AF 内部束線 AF 中継束線
OE
13. Connect the ADF Conversion wire harness with
14. AF中継束線をワイヤーサドル（4ケ所） で固定す 13. AF内部束線を、AF 中継束線に接続する。
ADF Conversion wire harness
the ADF Control wire harness.
ADF Control wire harness
14. Secure the ADF Control wire harnesses with the
ワイヤーサドル
コネクタ取付板
アース線
RIS
existing four wire saddles.
15. Cut off the illustrated parts from the Scanner rear cover and replace it on the printer.
で固定する。 12. アース線をヒンジ取付板に取付ネジ （ITネジM3×6） M4×8）2 本で固定する。 取付板金の凸部を差し込み、取付ネジ（Wセムス ヒンジ取付板
11. 印刷機リア側にあるスリットに左図のようにコネクタ
Un necessary
Important: Retain the Blind plate as it will be reused.
Blind plate
(necessary)
Scanner rear cover
[1-17]
3
AF 内部束線 コネクタ取付板金
（バインドM3×8）２本で固定する。 10. AF内部束線をコネクタ取付板金に通し、 取付ネジ
10
E
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
16. Cut off the illustrated part from the Scanner left
順 3で取り外した取付ネジ（バインドM4×8）2 本 19. 手順 15で切り取った取付穴カバー（２個）を、手 HJ ベース
OP UR
で取り付ける。
Stepped screw
重要： 取付穴カバーをAF-VI:Nのヒンジに突き当てて
package) on the Hinge housings.
Hinge housing
取り付けてください。
17. Secure the stepped screws (provided in the
取付穴カバー
Cut off
20. AFユニットのコネクタを印刷機本体に接続する。
Scanner left cover
本書 14ページ「AFユニットの位置調整」に進む。
cover and replace the cover on the printer.
18. Mount the ADF unit on the printer while sliding the stepped screws (added in the previous step)
18. AFユニットを、HJベースのスリットが専用段付きネ
instead of Binding screws. Be sure to align the
ジと本体のすき間に入るようにセットして、 取付ネジ
dedicated pins and screws previously removed
（バインドM４×１０）２本で取り付ける。
models, replace the Gauge cover with the
Gauge cover with the marking put when removing it. 専用段付きネジ
3).
Blind plate
Important: The Blind plates are pushed and attached to the Hinge housings.
切り取る
20. Connect the ADF unit cable to the ADF connector on the printer.
16. 上左カバーから左図の部分を切り取り後、 印刷機
[1-18]
に元通りに取り付ける。
Proceed to the section "ADF Unit Balance Adjustment" on page 5.
上左カバー
RIS
17. ヒンジ取付板に、同梱の専用段付きネジを取り付
M4x10, 2pcs which were removed at procedure
ける。 （２ケ所）
procedure 15) with the screws(Binding screws
ヒンジ取付板
19. Secure two Blind plates(these were cut off at
4
AF ユニット
OE
参考： ゲージシートが装着されていた場合は、 始めに
NOTE: When working on the printer with Gauge cover
ADF hinge base
取り外したゲージシートの専用ピンとネジで、 元
2pcs).
の位置に取り付けます。 （外す前につけておい
with two additional screws (Binding screw M4x10,
た目印に、調整ネジの位置をあわせます。）
into the slits of the ADF hinge bases, and secure it
ADF unit
消灯する。 上記調整完了後、 テストモードを終了して、 ランプを フロント側
E
ADF Unit Balance Adjustment リア側
Important: Be sure to carry out the following adjustment steps to avoid causing original feed troubles and undesirable print results.
OP
Start up the test mode of the printer and input the test code "151" ("281" for MZ7 series ) using print quantity keys to return the scanner carriage to the original position.
UR
・左側面のツメ2点（左図参照）が原稿台にバラ ンスよく当っているか。 ・右側面のボス2点（左図参照）が原稿台にバラ 平になっているかを確認する。
If the ADF unit is raised on the front side, rotate
と原稿台のすき間をのぞき込み、AFユニットが水 4.
the adjusting screws clockwise.
AFユニットを閉じた状態で、側面からAFユニット する。 歪み補正（次ページ）と同じ手順で位置を調整 ないことを確認する。干渉している場合は、画像 き込んで、原稿突当板とAFガイド板が干渉してい Rear side
3.
AFユニットと原稿台のすき間をフロント側からのぞ トキーを押して実行する。
Front side
原稿突当板
「130」 （MZ7シリーズは「260」） と入力し、 スター
If the ADF unit is raised on the rear side, rotate
・ 印刷機をテストモードで起動して、テンキーで
the adjusting screws counterclockwise.
CCDランプを点灯させる。 AF ガイド板
2.
RIS
ボス
OE
ンスよく当っているか。
Adjusting screws on the ADF hinges
AFユニットが水平になっていない場合は、左右の
When the ADF unit is unevenly seated on the printer, make the level even as follows.
高さ調整ネジを以下のように調整する。
5.
● フロント側が上がっている場合は、
Close the ADF unit and check if all its feet and bosses evenly touch the Scanner table by looking into the opening between the ADF unit and the Scanner table.
高さ調整ネジを時計回りに回す。
4.
高さ調整ネジ
Bosses
ツメ
Check if the ADF original stopper and the ADF guide plate do not touch each other by looking into the opening between the ADF unit and the Scanner table from the front side. If they touch each other, adjust the position of the ADF unit by following the procedures described in the section "Compensation for slanted printed images" on page 15.
リア側
3.
フロント側
Input the test code "130" ("260" for MZ7 series )using print quantity keys to turn on the CCD light of the Scanner Unit.
● リア側が上がっている場合は、
ADF original stopper
2.
高さ調整ネジを反時計回りに回す。
ADF guide plate
5.
1.
確認作業をしやすくするため、スキャナー部の トキーを押して実行する。 「151」 （MZ7シリーズは「281」） と入力し、 スター ・ 印刷機をテストモードで起動して、テンキーで Rear side
キャリッジをホームポジションに戻す。
Front side
重要：
Check that the ADF unit appropriately works and adjust it with the Riso test chart, following the procedures on the following page.
原稿づまりや画像の不具合を防ぐため、下記の調整作
7.
5
AFユニットの位置調整（共通手順）
After the above adjustment, quit the test mode to turn off the CCD light.
業を必ず行ってください。
[1-19]
6.
1.
Bosses
6.
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
する。
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
上記手順1) ∼5) を繰り返し、 適切な値になるまで調整
E
5) プリントをして、画像の位置を確認する。 を１秒以上押してテストモードを終了する。
Adjustment of Scanning Parameters
4) スタートキーを押して設定値を確定し、 リセットキー
OP
If printed images are of a different size and/or by far offset when originals are scanned in the ADF unit, compared with when scanned on the Stage glass, adjust the scanning parameters as follows.
て−（マイナス）に切り替える。 画像を右方向に移動したい場合は、 ＊キーを押し 入力する。）
1. Compensation for slanted printed images
Loosen the binding screws (M4x10) on the ADF hinge bases.
2)
Loosen the nut on the Hinge base sliding screw which is located on the rear side of the hinge on the paper receiving side.
画像を左方向に＋１mm移動したい場合は「１０」 と
右
ること。1ステップが0.1mmを表している。 （例えば、 ● AF ユニットを使用 した印刷画像
左
5ステップごとに調整する。必ず5の倍数を入力す 3)
調整したい値をテンキーで入力する。 替わる。
2) ● AF ユニットを使用 しない印刷画像
再度スタートキーを押すと、 「実行中」画面に切り を押す。
天
地
UR
1)
3)
（MZ7シリーズは「3072」）と入力してスタートキー 1)
印刷機をテストモードで起動し、テンキーで「782」
2. 主走査（左右）方向の画像位置調整（AF主走査読み込み左右位置調整）
Nut
Turn the Hinge base sliding screw and adjust the position of the ADF Hinge base, referring to the guidelines on it.
整する。
Turn the screw clockwise ( A ) when printed images are slanted as illustrated in the left-hand figure.
HJ ベース調整目盛
HJ スライド BKT
上記手順 1) ∼5) を繰り返し、適切な値になるまで調 5) プリントして、画像の状態を確認する。
Bottom
OE
も締める。 Hinge base sliding screw
4) 地
手順2）のナットを締め、手順1）の固定ネジ2ケ所 天
Bottom
HJスライドネジを B 方向に回す。 左図のように画像が歪んでいる場合は、
HJ スライドネジ 地
天
HJスライドネジを A 方向に回す。 左図のように画像が歪んでいる場合は、
Guidelines
Turn the screw counterclockwise ( B ) when printed images are slanted as illustrated in the left-hand figure.
Top
4)
Secure the nut on the Hinge base sliding screw and then the binding screws on the ADF hinge bases.
5)
Check if printed images are squared in the same way as when the original is scanned on the Stage glass.
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until obtaining squared printed images.
Hinge base
ナット
RIS
Top
を目安にする。） BKTの位置を微調整する。 （HJベース調整目盛 3)
2. Adjustment of scanning start position (Compensation for printing position in vertical direction)
下記のようにHJスライドネジを回して、HJスライド しているナットをゆるめる。
2) ヒンジ部分背面（排紙側） のHJスライドネジを固定
The printed image scanned on the Stage glass
Bottom
Top
1)
Start up the test mode of the printer and input the test code "783" ("3073" for MZ7 series) using print quantity keys.
2)
Press the Start key twice to make the message "In Action" appear on the display.
3)
Input a required value with print quantity keys to compensate the vertical scanning start position. The position is shifted 0.1mm per one step. (ex. To shift the scanning start position by 1mm upward, input "10". To shift the position by 1mm downward, on the other hand, input * before inputting "10".)
Print position difference
The printed image scanned on the ADF unit
４×10）２本をゆるめる。 1)
AFユニットを固定している左図のネジ（バインドM
1. 画像歪み補正 れる場合は、以下の手順で調整します。 AF を使用して印刷した画像と、使用しないで印刷した画像を比べて、画像の歪み、位置ズレ、伸縮が見ら
AFユニットの画像調整（共通手順）
Bottom
6
Top
[1-20]
OP
Check if the vertical print position is the same as when the original is scanned on the Stage glass.
5) プリントをして、画像の伸縮量を確認する。
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until obtaining an identical vertical print position.
4) スタートキーを押して設定値を確定し、 リセットキー 画像を縮めたい場合は、 ＊キーを押して− （マイナ
UR
OE
上記手順1) ∼5) を繰り返し、 適切な値になるまで調整 を１秒以上押してテストモードを終了する。 4) スタートキーを押して設定値を確定し、 リセットキー て−（マイナス）に切り替える。 画像を地方向に移動したい場合は、 ＊キーを押し る。） 向に＋１mm 移動したい場合は「10」と入力す １ステップが0.1mmを表す。 （例えば、画像を天方 再度スタートキーを押すと、 「実行中」画面に切り を押す。
天
（MZ7シリーズは「3073」）と入力してスタートキー 1)
印刷機をテストモードで起動し、テンキーで「783」
3. 副走査（天地）方向の画像位置調整（AF 読み込み開始位置調整）
7
2)
Input a required value with print quantity keys to compensate the scanning speed for vertical image size. The vertical image size is changed 0.1% per one step. (ex. To extend 300mm-long images by 3mm (1%), input "10". To shorten them by 3mm, on the other hand, input * before inputting "10".)
替わる。
3)
● AF ユニットを使用 しない印刷画像
調整したい値をテンキーで入力する。
Press the Start key twice to make the message "In Action" appear on the display.
3)
2)
画像位置ズレ
Start up the test mode of the printer and input the test code "784" ("3074" for MZ7 series) using print quantity keys.
● AF ユニットを使用 した印刷画像
1)
地
Check if the horizontal printing position is the same as when the original is scanned on the Stage glass.
5) プリントをして、画像の位置を確認する。
RIS
する。
[1-21]
4. 副走査（天地）方向の画像長さ調整（AF 読み込み画像伸縮補正）
Top
印刷機をテストモードで起動し、テンキーで「784」
Bottom
（MZ7シリーズは「3074」）と入力してスタートキー
The printed image scanned on the ADF unit
1)
5)
Image size difference
を押す。
Top
天
Press the Start key to confirm the input value, and press the Reset key more than one second to quit the test mode.
4. Adjustment of scanning speed (Compensation for printed image size in vertical direction)
Bottom
再度スタートキーを押すと、 「実行中」画面にな
4)
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until obtaining an identical horizontal print position.
The printed image scanned on the Stage glass
2)
NOTE: Be sure to input a multiple of "5 (five)".
る。
Right
調整したい値をテンキーで入力する。
Input a required value with print quantity keys to compensate the horizontal scanning position. The horizontal scanning position can be changed by 0.5 mm. (ex. To shift the scanning position to the left by 1mm, input "10". To shift the position to the right by 1mm, on the other hand, input * before inputting "10".)
3)
Left 3)
画像伸縮量
Press the Start key twice to make the message "In Action" appear on the display.
１ステップが0.1％ （印刷画像の長さを100％とする）
2)
Top
を表す。 （例えば、300mmの長さで印刷された画
Start up the test mode of the printer and input the test code "782"("3072" for MZ7 series) using print quantity keys.
像を3mm（１％）伸ばしたい場合は「10」と入力す
The printed image scanned on the ADF unit
1)
る。）
Bottom
ス）に切り替える。
The printed image scanned on the Stage glass
を１秒以上押してテストモードを終了する。
3. Adjustment of scanning position (Compensation for printing position in horizontal direction)
● AF ユニットを使用 しない印刷画像 地
5)
上記手順1) ∼5) を繰り返し、 適切な値になるまで調整
Press the Start key to confirm the input value, and press the Reset key more than one second to quit the test mode.
する。
4)
E
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
E
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
Press the Start key to confirm the input value, and press the Reset key more than one second to quit the test mode.
5)
Check if the vertical image size is the same as when the original is scanned on the Stage glass.
OP
4)
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until obtaining an identical vertical image size.
ADF hinges 原稿解除レバー シール スキャナーガラス
ADF hinge stopper
After adjusting scanning parameters, proceed to the following steps.
1.
Remove the screws which secure the ADF hinge stopper on the rear side of the ADF hinges.
2.
Rotate the ADF hinge stoppers by 180 degrees and secure them with the screws again.
3.
Stick the instruction labels to the places indicated in the figure.
OE
Original release dial
UR
Installation procedures after adjustment
シール
Instruction label
・原稿解除レバーの右側 ・スキャナーガラスの上側 ・原稿解除ダイヤルの下側
原稿解除ダイヤル
3.
左図のように3ケ所にシールを貼る。
ADF scanner glass
RIS
HJ ストッパー
Instruction label
Original release lever
ジで固定し直す。 （２ケ所） ヒンジ部分
2.
HJストッパーを左図のように１８０度回転させて、 ネ 固定しているネジを取り外す。 （２ケ所）
1.
AFユニットのヒンジ部分背面にあるHJストッパーを
本書 14 ∼ 16 ページに記載されている調整を行った 後、以下の手順を行います。
調整後に行う作業（共通手順） 8 [1-22]
Gauge cover
Stage pad (sponge side)
Place the Stage pad on the Gauge cover, facing the sponge side upwards.
5.
Align the longer edge of the Stage pad to the subsiding line of the Gauge cover shifting toward you by 1mm. Then remove all adhesive cover sheets from the Stage pad.
6.
Close the ADF unit gently and press it down on the Stage pad.
7.
Open the ADF unit gently and affix the Stage pad to it firmly by pressing the adhesive parts.
Stage pad
Gauge cover
RIS
OE
Align the left edge to the Original stopper.
4.
UR
1mm
OP
E
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
9
[1-23]
6) Job Separator IV: N
113-36004-200
この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
1
E
Job Separator IV : N Installation Procedure はめ込んでからネジを締めなおす
Packing List
The following printer model is the intended basic unit for installing the Job Separator IV:N.
This package contains the following items.
OP
Types of Applicable Printers
4. 3.
UR
6. Screws ....................................................... 1 set 7. JS paper size indication label .................... 1 pc. 8. Instruction label(J/E/PICT) ....................... 1 pc.each 9. Paper tape roll ........................................... 1 roll 10. Installation guide(This Manual) ................ 1 copy 11. User’s guide .............................................. 1 copy 12. Declaration of Conformity(for EU only) .. 1 copy
1.
Place the JS positioning bracket;RZ on the JS base bracket;RZ and secure them with the stepped screws.
2.
Loosen two mounting screws on the bottom of the Job separator IV:N.
OE
STソーターを取付スライド板；RZのスリットの奥ま 絶対にゆるめないでください。 重要:
2. Nobody but Riso-authorized service representatives is allowed to install this unit.
3ヵ所のネジの内、中央の六角穴付きボルトは
STソーター底面のネジ2ケ所をゆるめる。
取付支持板；RZ
付きネジ2 個で固定する。
取付スライド板；RZ
1.
JS base bracket;RZ
共通手順 本ユニットの設置は、必ず専門の技術者が 行ってください。
JS positioning bracket;RZ
RIS
印刷機の電源を切り、電源コードを抜き取る。 でしっかりとはめ込んで、ネジを締めなおす。
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Model RISO RZ series MZ series
1. Job separator IV:N unit ............................. 1 unit 2. JS positioning bracket ; RZ ....................... 1 pc. 3. JS base bracket : RZ .................................. 1 pc. 4. JS IV wire harness .................................... 1 pc. 5. DKN-10 NK clamper (for MZ series only) .... 1 pc.
Important: Do not loosen the center screw on the bottom of the Job separator IV:N.
Slide the mounting screws into the slits and tighten them.
3.
Slide the mounting screws on the bottom of the Job separator IV:N into the slits of the JS positioning bracket;V8 as far as they will go. Then tighten the mounting screws.
4.
Turn off the main power and unplug the power cord from the printer.
RISO RZシリーズ MZシリーズ SPEDIO RXシリーズ
本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。
適合機種 [1-24]
1
取付スライド板；RZと取付支持板；RZを重ね、段
1. STソーターIV :N 本体 ........................ 1 個 2. 取付スライド板 ; RZ ............................. 1個 3. 取付支持板 ; RZ ................................. 1 個 4. STソーター束線 .................................. 1 個 5. DKN-10 日幸NKクランプ （MZシリーズのみ使用します）............ 1個 6. 取付ネジ .............................................. 1 式 7. 用紙サイズシール ................................ 1 枚 8. 注意シール（日／英／絵文字）......... 各 1枚 9. 紙テープ .............................................. 1 本 10. 設置手順書（本書）............................ 1部 11. 取扱説明書 ......................................... 1 部 12. Declaration of Conformity （CE宣言書；EU 向け）........................ 1枚
内容物リスト STソーターIV:N設置手順書 このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。
6) Job Separator IV: N
合わせて貼り付けてください。 重要： 基板取付カバーの端面とNKクランプの端面を Rear cover R
5.
Remove the Rear cover R from the printer.
6.
Cut off the illustrated part from the Rear cover R.
プを貼り付ける。
貼り付け位置
8.
UR
OP
NK クランプ Cutting
E
= RISO MZ series models =
基板取付カバーを開き、左図の位置にNKクラン
基板取付カバー
Remove the screws of PCB mount plate.
OE
7.
7.
PCB mount plate
RIS
基板取付カバーのネジを取り外す。
カバー;後右
Attachment position
8.
Important: The right side of a NK clamper is attached according to the end on the right side of PCB mount plate.
切り取る
NK clamper
MZシリーズへの設置手順 2
Open the PCB mount plate and attach a NK clamper onto the back side of PCB mount plate.
[1-25]
左図の部分を切り取る。
6.
カバー；後右を取り外す。
5.
6) Job Separator IV: N
E
束線クランプ
18. カバー；後右を元通りに取り付ける。
OP
16. ワイヤーサドル2ヶ所で固定する。
Lead the JS IV wire harness through the square hole at the rear side frame to the Mechanical control PCB as instructed in the illustration.
17. 基板取付カバーを元通りネジ止めする。 アース線
外し、STソーター束線のアース線を共締めする。 15. MECHA-CONTOROL-PCBのネジをいったん取り
ワイヤーサドル
PCBのCN17に接続する。
10. Insert the two tabs of the metal busing on the wire harness into the square hole and secure the metal busing there with a screw. (Binding screw, M3× 6)
CN17
9.
14. STソーター束線のコネクタをMECHA-CONTOROL重要： たるみが無いように引き回してください。
UR
13. STソータ−束線を左図のように引き回す。
JS IV wire harness
11. Secure the JS IV wire harness with a NK clamper. Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness is secured with a NK clamper, avoiding contact with the parts in action.
いように固定してください。 重要： 可動部への接触をふせぐため、束線がたるまな
11. STソーター束線をNKクランプで固定する。
JS IV wire harness
12. Secure the JS IV wire harness with a wire clamper.
12. STソータ−束線を、束線クランプで固定する。
Wire clamper
NK クランプ
OE
束線クランプ
NK clamper
13. Lead the JS IV wire harness onto PCB mount plate as illustrated. ST ソータ−束線
RIS
Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness should not slacken.
Mechanical control PCB
14. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness to CN17 on the Mechanical control PCB.
Wire clamper
18. Replace the rear cover R.
3 [1-26]
側板フレームの角穴からSTソーター束線を左図
17. Replace the PCB mount plate and secure with the screws.
のように引き回す。
16. Secure the JS IV wire harness with a wire clamper and existing wire saddles at 2 points.
9.
Ground wire
M3×6）
CN17
15. Remove one of the mounting screws of the Mechanical control PCB near the CN17 and secure the ground wire coming from the JS IV wire harness to the Mechanical control PCB with removed screw.
10. 角穴部に板金をはめ込みネジ止めする。 （バインド
Wire saddle
E
6) Job Separator IV: N
19. Secure the JS unit to the side plate of the printer with two screws. (Binding screw, M4×8) 20. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness to the bottom of the JS unit.
OP
JS paper size indication label
21. Stick a Paper size label and a Caution label on the Job Separator as illustrated. 22. Plug the power cord to the printer and turn on the main power.
UR
Instruction label
23. Put the Paper tape roll into the Job separator IV:N and check the Job separator IV:N functions correctly.
OE
JS IV wire harness
RIS
ST ソーター束線
4
[1-27]
ことを確認する。 23. STソーターに紙テープをセットし、 正常に動作する 注意シール
22. 電源コードを印刷機に差し込み、電源を入れる。 り付ける。 21. 用紙サイズシールと注意シールを左図の位置に貼 続する。 用紙サイズシール
20. STソーター束線のコネクタをSTソーター底面に接 ンドネジ M4×8 ２本） 19. STソーターを印刷機の側板に取り付ける。 （バイ
この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
E
7) Key/Card Counter IV
架台モール
Key/Card Counter IV Installation Procedure Packing List
OP
排紙カバー
Type of Connectable Printer
The following printer models are the intended basic units for connection to the Key/card counter IV. RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models
NOTE :
1. Key/card counter unit ............................... 2. Counter main wire harness III .................. 3. Counter extension wire harness A (long) .. 4. Counter extension wire harness B (short) . 5. Counter extension ground wire ................. 6. Counter bracket A ..................................... 7. Counter bracket RZ ................................... 8. Lithium battery (CR-2032) ....................... 9. Battery expiration date label .....................
UR
RISOGRAPH GR3770 RISOGRAPH FR series RISOGRAPH CR 1630-AN/C/EN/UP/AW CR 1620-C CR 1610-AS/UI/AW CR 1600-C RISOGRAPH RN series RISO RP series RISO S37 series RISO RN25 series RISO RZ/RV series RISO MZ/MV series RISO V8000 series
This package contains the following items.
1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 2 pcs. 5 pcs. 2 pcs.
10. Ferrite core ................................................ 11. NK clamper ............................................... 12. Wire clamper ............................................. 13. Screwed clamper ....................................... 14. Wire harness protection tape ..................... 1 pc. 15. Screws ....................................................... 1 set 16. Installation guide (This manual) ............... 1 copy 17. User's guide ............................................... 1 copy 18. Control card .............................................. 1 pc. 19. Operator card ............................................ 30 pcs.
OE
- When installing on GR3770 or FR series models (except for FR-α models), the Interface board III(S) is required.
1 unit 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
- When installing on CR series models, the Interface board IV is required. As for the procedures of leading the Key/card counter wire harnesses inside CR series models, refer to the Interface Board IV Installation Procedure Guide. After that, install the Key/card counter IV referring to steps 16-21 in the page 3 and page 13 in this guide.
前カバー
後カバー
・RP3 / RX3 シリーズおよび RE33P に設置す るには、カードカウンター IV 取付 A キットが 必要です。設置手順については、取付Aキット 付属の設置手順書をご覧ください。 ・V8000 / V8000PS / S8000に設置するには、以 下のサービスパーツが必要です。 ・カードカウンター IV 取付板 ・CC 中継束線；V8000 用 ・製版カバー追加工 ・リア右カバー追加工 ・GR および FR シリーズ（N なし機）に設置す るには、インターフェイスボード III(S)が必要 です。
重要 本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って ください。
・CRシリーズに設置するには、インターフェイ スボード IV が必要です。束線の接続手順につ いては、インターフェイスボード IV 設置手順 書をご覧ください。その後の手順については、 本書 P.3 の手順 16 ∼ 22 および P.11 をご覧く ださい。 ・MZ / MX シリーズに設置するには、カードカ ウンター IV 取付キット;2C が必要です。設置 手順については、取付キット;2C 付属の設置 手順書をご覧ください。 （CE 宣言書；EU向け）.................................... 1 枚 21. Declaration of Conformity 20. CLEANING CARD（クリーニングカード）....... 1 枚 19. OPERATOR CARD（オペレーターカード）..... 30 枚 18. CONTROL CARD（コントロールカード）......... 1 枚
- When installing on RP or S37 series models, the Key/ card counter IV Attachment Kit A is required. For the installation procedure for these models, refer to the guide included in the kit.
20. Cleaning card ............................................ 1 pc. 21. Declaration of Conformity (for EU only) ............................................. 1 copy Nobody but Riso-authorized service representatives is allowed to install this unit.
17. 取扱説明書 ...................................................... 1 冊 16. 設置手順書（本書）......................................... 1 冊 15. 取付ネジ ........................................................... 1 式 14. 保護テープ ....................................................... 1 枚
- When installing on V8000 series or S8000 models, following items are additionally required ; • Counter bracket • Counter extention wire harness;V8 • Master making unit cover;modified • Rear cover (right);modified
RIS
13. ナイロンクリップ.................................................. 2 個 12. 束線バンド ........................................................ 5 本 11. NKクランプ ....................................................... 2 個 10. フェライトクランプ ............................................... 1 個 9. 電池交換シール ............................................... 1枚 8. リチウム電池（CR-2032）................................. 1個
- When installing on MZ/MV series models, Key/Card Counter IV Attachment Kit :2C is required. For the installation procedure for these models, refer to the guide included in the kit.
Instructions continue from next page.
1 112-36002-308
[1-28]
7. 取付板金（RZ用）........................................... 1個 6. 取付板金 A ....................................................... 1 個 5. CCアース中継線 50 ......................................... 1本 4. CC中継束線B（短い束線）............................ 1本 3. CC中継束線A（長い束線）............................ 1本 2. カードカウンター束線III .................................... 1 本 1. カードカウンター ................................................ 1 個
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。
本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。
内容物リスト
適合機種
7) Key/Card Counter IV この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
E
Key/Card Counter IV Attachment Kit:2C Installation Procedure Packing List
The following printer models are the intended basic units for installing the Key/Card Counter IV:N Attachment Kit:2C.
This package contains the following items.
SHノイズ遮蔽板
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models RISO MZ Series
OP
Types of Applicable Printers
1. Counter bracket;S ..................................... 1 unit 2. Counter socket adapter ............................. 1 pc. 3. Screws ....................................................... 1 set 4. Installation guide (This manual) ............... 1 copy
In addition to the above items, the contents in the Key/Card Counter IV:N package are to be used.
RISO MV Series
5.
UR
Nobody but Riso-authorized service representatives is allowed to install this unit.
4. 3.
左図の部分を切り取る。 排版カバー;1とカバー;後左を取り外す。 が装備されている場合は、取り外す。
2. 排版カバー；1
切り取る
プラテンカバーまたはAF ユニット、デジタイザなど ら抜く。
1.
印刷機の電源を切り、 電源コードを印刷機本体か
RIS
Rear cover L
Cut off
1.
Turn off the main power switch of the printer and unplug the power cord.
2.
Dismount the Stage cover (or the optional ADF unit). If the Digitizer is installed, dismount it as well.
OE
SHノイズ遮蔽板を取り外す。
カバー；後左
Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1
3.
Remove the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1 and the Rear cover L from the printer.
4.
Cut off the illustrated part from the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1.
5.
Remove the Cover plate; SH.
Cover plate; SH
本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って ください。
梱包されている部品を使用します。 上記の他に、 「カードカウンター IV:N」本体に RISOGRAPH MZシリーズ SPEDIO MXシリーズ
以下の機種に接続できます。
1. 2. 3. 4.
カードカウンターIV取付板；S .............. 1個 L型アダプタ.......................................... 1個 取付ネジ............................................... 1 式 設置手順書（本書）............................ 1 冊
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。
本キットを使用すると、カードカウンター IV:Nを
内容物リスト
適合機種
カードカウンター IV 取付キット：2C 設置手順書 2
[1-39]
OP
Connect the Counter extension ground wire and the Ground wire of the connector.
9.
Remove a screw of the upper left corner of the SH4F-PCB and secure the ground wire to the SH4F-PCB with the screw.
10. Put the Ferrite core on the Counter main wire harness III.
UR
CN6
11. Hold the Counter main wire harness III with an existing Wire saddle.
固定する。
Counter extension ground wire
13. カードカウンター束線IIIをワイヤーサドル3ケ所で ワイヤーサドル
OE
CC アース中継束線 50
12. Replace the Cover plate; SH and secure it with the screws removed in Step 5.
る。 11. カードカウンター束線IIIをワイヤーサドルで固定す フェライトクランプ
10. フェライトクランプを取り付ける。 ター束線IIIのアース線を共締めする。 9.
SH4F-PCB のネジをいったん外し、カードカウン 続する。 CCアース中継束線 50をコネクタのアース線と接
中継コネクタ
SH4F-PCBのCN6に接続する。 7.
カードカウンター束線 IIIを左図のように引き回し、 外す。
6.
カードカウンター束線 III の中継コネクタを取り
[1-30]
カードカウンター束線 III
8.
3
カードカウンター束線 III
14. Remove the case cover from the Key/Card counter unit and put a Lithium battery into the battery holder with the + side facing upward.
ワイヤーサドル
Cover plate; SH
Lithium battery
CN6
RIS
13. Hold the Counter main wire harness III with the existing Wire saddles at three points.
SH4F-PCB
Wire saddle
12. SHノイズ遮蔽板を取り付ける。
Ferrite core
SH4F-PCB
8.
SHノイズ遮蔽板
Counter main wire harness III
Lead the Counter main wire harness III and connect it to CN6 of the SH4F-PCB.
14. カードカウンターのカバーを取り外し、 リチウム電池
Wire saddle
Relay connector
7.
を取り付ける。（＋極を表にしてください。）
Counter main wire harness III
Remove the Relay connector from the Counter main wire harness III.
リチウム電池
6.
E
7) Key/Card Counter IV
7) Key/Card Counter IV
ト、デジタイザを元通りに取り付ける。
E
24. 手順2で取り外したプラテンカバーまたはAFユニッ 23. 印刷機のカバー；後左を元通りの取り付ける。
15. Replace the case cover on the Key/card counter unit and secure it on the front side only with the screws removed in Step 14.
OP
示言語の切り替え」を行う。 設置手順書を参照して、 「動作確認」、 「パネル表
16. Secure the Counter socket adapter to the Counter connector with P-tight screws (M3x14, 2pcs) and tighten the screws located on the adapter.
22. カードカウンターIVの本体梱包に同梱されている 排版カバー；1
17. Secure the Key/card counter unit to the Counter bracket;S. (Double-washered screw M3x8, 4pcs)
カードカウンターに貼る。
Front side
21. 電池交換シールに 2 年後の年・月を記入して、 部分に通します。
電池交換シール
UR
参考： カードカウンター束線IIIは手順4で切り取った
20. 排版カバー；1を取り付ける。 Counter bracket;S
Counter socket adapter
Counter main wire harness III
18. Secure the Counter bracket;S to the left side panel of the Scanner table with two screws. (Binding screw M4x8, 2pcs)
OE
19. Connect the Counter main wire harness III to the Key/card counter.
する。 19. カードカウンター束線IIIをカードカウンターに接続 カードカウンター束線 III
（バインドM4×8 2 本） 18. カードカウンターを印刷機本体に取り付ける。
カードカウンター取付板；S
L 型アダプタ
20. Replace the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1 and secure it with the screws removed in Step 3.
RIS
Battery expiration date label
Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1
NOTE:
Make sure that the Counter main wire harness III is coming through the square hole that you made in Step 4.
21. Write the date of two years later on the Battery expiration date label and stick the label on the side of the Key/card counter unit. 22. Referring to the Installation guide included in the Key/card counter IV package, check the operation and select the language shown on the display. 23. Replace the Rear cover L and secure it with the screws removed in Step 3. 24. Mount the Stage cover (or the optional ADF unit). If the Digitizer is dismounted, replace it as well.
4
[1-31]
に取り付ける。 （WセムスM3×8 4 本） 17. カードカウンタIV取付板；Sをカードカウンター本体 フロント側
ジ2ケ所を締める。 ×14 2本で固定し、L型アダプタについているネ 16. L型アダプタをコネクタ部に取り付けて、PタイトM3 手順 14で取り外したネジのうち2本で固定する。 15. カードカウンターのカバーを取り付け、 フロント側を
7) Key/Card Counter IV
2.
Pressing both "0" and "C" keys on the Key/ card counter control panel together, turn on the main power switch on the printer. After confirming that the indication "FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF" appears in the display on the Key/card counter control panel, press the "1", "9", "5" and "3" keys orderly. NOTE : If no indication appears when the printer is turned on, return to the step 1.
No.
MSTR
PRINTS
1 ALL
1 1
5 5
6.
To clear the above data, follow the procedures below. 1) Press the "1" key more than a second leaving the "CONTROL CARD" in the Key/card counter. 2) After the indication "TTL- 1- 5" appears on the display, press the "C" and "SET" keys orderly. The panel indication is changed to "TTL- 0 -0" and the data are all cleared.
Insert the "CONTROL CARD" into the Key/ card counter and press the "1" key more than a second. Then press the "PRINT" and "SET" keys orderly to print out the data of master count and print count.
OE
4.
After the display message changes to "INSERT CARD", insert the "OPERATOR CARD No. 1" into the Key/card counter and print 5 copies with a newly made master.
Check that the following data are printed out on copies.
UR
3.
5.
OP
1.
E
Operation check
Battery replacement
The used battery (normally after two years' operation) can be replaced by the following procedures.
RIS
1.
Important! Always replace the used battery with the power of the printer turned ON. Otherwise, all memories in the Key/card counter will be cleared out.
2.
Pick off the used battery from the battery holder and put a new one (CR-2032) there.
3.
Replace the case cover on the Key/card counter unit.
4.
Write the date of two years later on the Battery expiration date label on the side of the Key/card counter unit.
Battery expiration date label
Lithium battery (CR-2032)
Turn on the main power of the printer and remove the case cover of the Key/card counter unit by removing the securing screws on the bottom of the unit.
[1-32]
5
8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed/ Ejection
E
Cover Kit;Paper Feed / Ejection Installation Procedure
024-36101-000
この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
1
SH 取付板
Applying Models 7.
Riso MZ series
6. 5.
Packing list:
SH取付板を閉じてネジ止めする。 SH取付板に吸音材；SH 基板裏を貼り付ける。
吸音材；SH 基板裏
4.
SH取付板の固定ネジ（4 本）を外して開く。
カバー；後左
1. Noise Absorber; SH PCB ........................ 1pc. 2. Noise Absorber; Suction Cover. ............. 1pc. 3. Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Side ... 2pcs. 4. Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Center ... 1pc.
10. Noise Reduction Cover; Paper Feed ....... 1pc. 11. Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Upper .......... 1pc. 12. Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Lower .......... 1pc. 13. Magnet Catcher; Paper Feeder Cover ..... 1pc. 14. Mounting Screws .................................... 1set 15. Installation Procedure Guide (This manual) .. 1copy
UR
カバー；後左を元通りに取り付ける。 重要： 取付板を閉じた時に、 バネやギア等の駆動部に 吸音材が当たらない用に貼り付けてください。
The installation of this unit must be done by a technical expert.
OP
This optional unit applies to the following model:
5. Noise Absorber; Suction ............................ 2pcs. 6. Noise Absorber; Stand Front ................... 1pc. 7. Noise Absorber; Stand R ......................... 1pc. 8. Noise Absorber; Stand L ......................... 1pc. 9. Noise Absorber; Stand Rear .................... 1pc.
1.
Turn off the power and plug off the code.
OE
Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1
2.
Detach the Rear Cover L from the printer.
3.
Detach the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1.
4.
Unscrew four securing screws of the SH PCB Securing Plate to open it. Attach the Noise Absorber of SH PCB to the SH PCB Securing Plate on its reverse side.
RIS
Rear Cover L
Noise Absorber; SH PCB
5.
Important: Arrange the location of the absorber so as not to interfere driving parts like springs or gears when the plate is closed.
6.
Close the SH PCB Securing Plate and fix it with four securing screws taken off in 4.
7.
Put the Rear Cover L back as before.
SH PCB Securing Plate
[1-33]
1
排版カバー；1
排版カバー；1を取り外す。
3.
カバー；後左を取り外す。
2. 1.
電源をオフにして電源コードを抜く。
1. 吸音材；SH 基板裏 ................................. 1個 2. 吸音材；排紙カバー裏 ........................... 1個 3. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド.................... 2個 4. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-センター ................ 1個 5. 吸音材；排紙口 ...................................... 2個 6. 吸音材；架台 -フロント ............................ 1個
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。
内容物リスト 本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って ください。
RISO
MZシリーズ
7. 吸音材；架台- 排紙 ................................ 1個 8. 吸音材；架台-リア .................................. 1個 9. 吸音材；架台- 給紙 ................................ 1個 10. 給紙防音カバー ...................................... 1個 11. 上部固定組立 ......................................... 1個 12. 下部固定組立 ......................................... 1個 13. マグネット受け .......................................... 1個 14. 取付ネジ .................................................. 1 式 15. 設置手順書（本書）............................... 1冊
本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。
適合機種
給排紙カバー 設置手順書（2COLOR）
2 Detach the Paper Receiving Cover.
UR
OP
9.
13. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド（2個）を貼り付ける。
Detach the Paper Receiving Tray.
重要： 吸音材は左図の位置に貼り付けてください。
8.
吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド
Paper Receiving Cover
E
8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed/ Ejection
10. Attach the Noise Absorber; Suction Cover to the exposed part.
排紙口塞ぎ
Important: Please beware of injuring yourself with
12. 排紙口塞ぎを取り外す。
jaggy fringes.
Important: Refer to the left illustration for the direction of the Noise Absorber.
吸音材；排紙カバー裏
OE
11. Put the Paper Receiving Cover back as before.
Noise Absorber; Suction Cover
11. 排紙カバーを元通りに取り付ける。
12. Detach the Paper Ejection Cover. 重要： 吸音材は左図の向きに貼り付けてください。 排紙カバー
13. Attach the two pieces of Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Side to the exposed part. Important: Refer to the left illustration for the
排紙台を取り外す。
8.
[1-34]
排紙カバーを取り外す。
position of the Noise Absorber.
9.
2
10. 吸音材；排紙カバー裏を貼り付ける。
Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Side
重要： バリで怪我をしないように注意してください。
RIS
Paper Ejection Cover
3
E
8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed/ Ejection
14. Push the Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-
OP
Center into the center of the Paper Ejection Cover. Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Center
15. Put the Paper Ejection Cover back as before.
吸音材；架台-フロント
吸音材；架台-排紙
Paper Ejection Cover Center
ながら押し込んでください。
UR
重要： 上下の隙間が出来ない向きで、吸音材をつぶし
16. Attach the Noise Absorber; Suction as well.
18. 吸音材；架台- 排紙を押し込む。
Important: Please beware of injuring yourself with
ながら押し込んでください。
jaggy fringes.
重要： 上下の隙間が出来ない向きで、吸音材をつぶし
Important: Refer to the left illustration for the
17. 吸音材；架台-フロントを押し込む。
direction of the Noise Absorber.
OE
吸音材；排紙口
Noise Absorber; Suction
17. Push the Noise Absorber into the gap between the stand and the printer.
重要： 吸音材は左図の向きに貼り付けてください。
RIS
Important: Push the Noise Absorber into the gap in the direction suitable to the shape of space, as squashing the reqired number of pieces.
The two pieces of Noise Absorber which is used at this point: Noise Absorber; Stand Front----1pc. Noise Absorber; Stand R----1pc.
重要： バリで怪我をしないように注意してください。
16. 吸音材；排紙口（2個）を貼り付ける。
Noise Absorber; Stand Front
Noise Absorber; Stand R
[1-35]
3
15. 排紙口塞ぎを元の位置に取り付ける。 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-センター
し込む。 14. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎセンターを、排紙口塞ぎに押
4
E
8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed/ Ejection
18. Push the Noise Absorber into the front gap between マグネットキャッチ
OP
the stand and the printer.
Important: Push the Noise Absorber into the gap in the direction suitable to the shape of space, as squashing the reqired number
給紙防音カバー
of pieces.
UR
Noise Absorber; Stand Rear----1pc.
OE
(Self-binding screw Ni M4 x 8 2 pieces)
Note: A short screw driver is suitable for this operation.
21. Secure the Magnet Catcher of Paper Feeding Cover
22. Put the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1 back as
Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Lower
21. 上部固定組立を取付ネジで固定する。
(Self-binding screw Ni M4 x 8 1 piece)
（バインドNi M4×8 2本）
with the screw.
上部固定組立
with the mounting screws as well.
22. 下部固定組立を取付ネジで固定する。
20. Secure the Hinge of Paper Feeder Cover Lower
マグネット受け
binding screw Ni M4 x 8 2 pieces)
（バインドNi M4×8 2本）
the paper feeding area with the screws. (Self-
23. マグネット受けを取付ネジで固定する。
19. Secure the Hinge of Paper Feeder Cover Upper to
（バインドNi M4×8 1本）
Magnet Catcher; Paper Feeding Cover
24. 排版カバー；1を元通りに取り付ける。
Noise Absorber; Stand L (paper feeding side)
下部固定組立
Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Upper
25. 給紙防音カバーを取り付ける。
Noise Absorber; Stand Rear
間にすきまがある場合は、マグネットキャッチの
Noise Absorber; Stand L----1pc.
重要： 給紙防音カバーを閉じた状態で、 外装カバーとの
this point:
位置を調整してください。
The two pieces of Noise Absorber which is used at
before. 吸音材；架台 - 給紙
RIS
23. Attach the Noise Reduction Cover of Paper Feed. Important: Adjust the location of the Magnet Clasp
20. 吸音材；架台- 給紙を押し込む。 吸音材；架台 -リア
ながら押し込んでください。 重要： 上下の隙間が出来ない向きで、吸音材をつぶし
Magnet Clasp
19. 吸音材；架台-リアを押し込む。
Noise Reduction Cover; Paper Feed
4
ながら押し込んでください。
and the closed Noise Reduction Cover.
重要： 上下の隙間が出来ない向きで、吸音材をつぶし
if there is any gap between the outer cover
[1-36]
5
Numbers are corresponding to the packing list’s. Part name Part number No.
Dimensions (mm)
Dimension (inch)
60 ｘ 40
13.4 x 2.4 x 1.6
340 ｘ
024-75019
Noise Absorber; SH PCB
2
024-75014
Noise Absorber; Suction Cover
3
024-75017
Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Side
4
024-75018
5
024-75015
6
024-75010
Noise Absorber; Stand Front
7
024-75012
Noise Absorber; Stand R
8
024-75013
Noise Absorber; Stand L
9
024-75011
Noise Absorber; Stand Rear
10
024-75001
11
OP
1
E
8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed/ Ejection
400 ｘ 155 ｘ 55
15.7 x 6.1 x 2.2
115 ｘ
62 ｘ 18
4.5 x 2.4 x 0.7
Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Center
157 ｘ
63 ｘ 30
6.2 x 2.5 x 1.2
Noise Absorber; Suction
115 ｘ 75.5 ｘ 40
4.5 x 3.0 x 1.6
576 ｘ
65 ｘ 50
22.7 x 2.6 x 2.0
640 ｘ
65 ｘ 50
25.2 x 2.6 x 2.0
576 ｘ 100 ｘ 50
22.7 x 3.9 x 2.0
50 ｘ 40
25.2 x 2.0 x 1.6
Noise Reduction Cover; Paper Feed
488 ｘ 312 ｘ 105
19.2 x 12.3 x 4.1
024-75005
Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Upper
70 ｘ 69.4 ｘ 24
12
024-75004
Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Lower
75 ｘ
13
023-75003
Magnet Catcher; Paper Feeder Cover
36 ｘ
UR
640 ｘ
2.7 x 0.9
65 ｘ 54.6
3.0 x
2.6 x 2.1
29 ｘ 25
1.4 x
1.1 x 1.0
RIS
OE
2.8 x
023-75003
13
024-75004
12
024-75005
11
024-75001
10
024-75011
9
024-75013
8
024-75012
7
024-75010
6
024-75015
5
024-75018
4
024-75017
3
024-75014
2
024-75019
1 番号
品番
マグネット受け 下部固定組立 上部固定組立 給排紙防音カバー 吸音材；架台- 給紙 吸音材；架台-リア 吸音材；架台- 排紙 吸音材；架台-フロント 吸音材；排紙口 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-センタ 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド 吸音材；排紙カバー裏 吸音材；SH基板裏
品名
番号は、内容物リストに対応しています。 《サイズリスト》
[1-37]
5
36 ｘ 29 ｘ 25 75 ｘ 65 ｘ 54.6 70 ｘ 69.4 ｘ 24 488 ｘ 312 ｘ 105 640 ｘ 50 ｘ 40 576 ｘ 100 ｘ 50 640 ｘ 65 ｘ 50 576 ｘ 65 ｘ 50 115 ｘ 75.5 ｘ 40 157 ｘ 63 ｘ 30 115 ｘ 62 ｘ 18 400 ｘ 155 ｘ 55 340 ｘ 60 ｘ 40 サイズ
Chapter 1 Maintenance
Removing Exterior Covers
E
5.
Front cover
(1) Open the front cover, loosen the mounting screw on the upper hinge assembly, then lower and remove the front cover.
OP
Cover (front lower)
(1) Remove the front cover. (2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), then remove the cover (front lower).
Cover (front left)
(1) Remove the front cover. (2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs) , then remove the cover (front left).
Cover (front right)
(1) Remove the front cover. (2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the cover (front right).
UR
Panel case
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), disconnect the connector, then remove the panel case.
Panel lower cover
(1) Remove the front cover, cover (front left), cover (front right), and panel case. (2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), then remove the panel lower cover.
Cover (front upper)
OE
(1) Remove the front cover, cover (front left), cover (front right), panel case, and panel lower cover. (2) Remove the mounting screw (bind, M4 x 8, 1 pc), then remove the cover (front upper). Hinge assembly
Panel case and panel lower cover * The panel lower cover becomes visible after the panel case is removed.
0112
RIS
Cover (front upper)
0111
Front cover
Cover (front left)
Cover (front lower)
[1-38]
Cover (front right)
Chapter 1 Maintenance
Stage cover
E
(1) Open the stage cover. Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 10, 1 pc each) from the hinge sections (one each on the right and left sides), and temporarily install them in the holes in the back side. Then remove the stage cover.
Cover (upper right)
OP
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs), then remove the cover (upper right). * To remove one of the six mounting screws, you must first open the cover of the bottle cap holder.
Master removal cover (2)
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), then remove the master removal cover (2).
Stage cover
Cover (upper right)
RIS
OE
UR
Cover for bottle cap holder
0113
Master removal cover (2)
[1-39]
Chapter 1 Maintenance
Cover (rear left)
E
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the cover (rear left).
Cover (rear right)
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs), then remove the cover (rear right).
Master removal cover (1)
OP
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the master removal cover (1).
Cover (upper left)
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the cover (upper left).
Cover (upper rear)
Cover (upper left)
Master removal cover (1)
RIS
OE
Cover (upper rear)
UR
(1) Remove the stage cover, the cover (upper right), and the cover (upper left). (2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 4 pcs), then remove the cover (upper rear).
Cover (rear right)
0114
Cover (rear left)
[1-40]
Chapter 1 Maintenance
E
6. Opening the SH PCB Bracket and Power Supply/System PCB Bracket Opening the SH PCB bracket
OP
(1) Turn off power and remove the cover (rear left). (2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and open the SH PCB bracket.
Opening the power supply/system PCB bracket
UR
(1) Turn off power. (2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs) and open the power supply/ system PCB bracket.
SH PCB bracket
RIS
OE
Power supply/system PCB bracket
0115
[1-41]
Chapter 1 Maintenance
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
MEMO
[1-42]
Chapter 2 Machine Summary
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 2 Machine Summary
Optional Accessories .............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.
Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 2-4 RISO MZ 790 U ................................................................................................................... 2-4 RISO MZ 770 A ................................................................................................................... 2-6 RISO MZ 770 E ................................................................................................................... 2-8
3.
Optional Accessories (China model) ................................................................................... 2-10
4.
Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 2-10 RISO MV 7690 C .............................................................................................................. 2-11
5.
Paper Sizes ............................................................................................................................ 2-12
RIS
OE
UR
1.
[2-1]
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Blank Page
[2-2]
E UR OP
Optional Accessories
A variety of optional accessories are available to enhance the capabilities of the machine. For details about the optional accessories, see your dealer (or authorized service representative).
! Auto Document Feeder
Feed up to 50 sheets of originals automatically.
! Color Cylinder (Drum)
Simply change the Cylinder (Drum) to print in multiple colors. (Case included)
! Key Card Counter
With a single button press, shows the numbers of printed copies and consumed masters within a given period of time. This can help you manage costs.
! Job Separator
With the Programed Printing function, allows the machine to print and sort into groups separated by tape.
! Stand
OE
! RISO PRINTER Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET
Use to directly connect the machine to the network. This comes with the RISO-MONITOR software that allows you to check the status of the machine from computers.
! Special Paper Feed Kit
This unit allows you to feed thicker paper such as cards and envelopes.
! Ink/Master Holder
A rack kit for storing supply such as ink and masters.
! Document Storage Card DM-128CF ! Wide Stacking Tray
RIS
Paper Receiving Tray for sizes A6 - A3/Ledger 13.4" × 18.5" (340mm × 470mm).
! RISO Color Separation Software CS-2000 Easy to use application software for printing multi-colored, computer-generated images on your RISO printer.
[2-3]
Master-making/printing methods Original Type
High-speed digital master-making/full automatic stencil printing
Book (22 lb (10 kg) or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.)
Original Paper Weight Print Paper Size (max./min.)
Paper Supply Capacity Print Paper Weight
When using the Stage Glass : 115/16" × 39/16" (50mm × 90mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm) When using the ADF unit (option) : 39/16" × 51/2" (90mm × 140mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm) When using the Stage Glass : 22 lb (10 kg) or less When using the ADF unit (option) : 15-lb bond (50g/m2) - 34-lb bond (128g/m2)
When simultaneously 2-Color printing: 73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm) When 1-Color printing (using Cylinder (Drum) 1): 315/16" × 513/16" (100mm × 148mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm) When 1-Color printing (using Cylinder (Drum) 2): 73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
1000 sheets (17-lb bond (64 g/m2))
13-lb bond (46g/m2) - 110-lb index (210g/m2)
Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo, Pencil
OE
Image Processing mode Resolution
UR OP
RISO MZ790 U
E
Specifications
D600dpi
Approx. 57 seconds (for dual-color print) Master-making Time (for A4/portrait/100% reproduction ratio) Approx. 24 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 1)) Approx. 34 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 2)) 117/16" × 163/4" (291mm × 425mm)
Print Reproduction Ratio
Zoom : 50 - 200% Standard reproduction ratio (enlargement) : 200%, 154%, 129%, 121% Standard reproduction ratio (reduction) : 78%, 65%, 61%, 50% Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Print Speed
Approx. 60 - 150 sheets per minute (Control panel: five steps variable, touch panel: 150ppm)
RIS
Printing Area (max.)
Print Position Adjustment
Vertical : ±19/32" (±15mm) Horizontal : ±3/8" (±10mm)
Ink Supply
Full automatic (1000 ml per cartridge)
Master Supply/Disposal
Full automatic (approx. 220 sheets per roll)
Master Disposal Capacity
80 sheets
User Interface
LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators, front-side operation
Optional Accessories
Auto Document Feeder, Job Separator, Key Card Counter, Color Cylinder (Drum), Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET, Special Paper Feed Kit, Stand, Document Storage Card DM-128CF, Wide Stacking Tray, RISO Color Separation Software CS-2000
Power Source
MZ790U : 100V-120V / 220V-240V AC, 50/60Hz
[2-4]
When in use : 633/16"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1605mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H)) When in storage : 393/4"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1010mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H))
Weight
Approx. 370 1/16 lb (168 kg)
UR OP
Note:
E
Dimensions
RIS
OE
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine, some images and explanations in this manual may not correspond to your machine. • The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
[2-5]
RISO MZ770 A Master-making/printing methods Original Type
E High-speed digital master-making/full automatic stencil printing
Book (22 lb (10 kg) or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.)
Original Paper Weight Print Paper Size (max./min.)
Paper Supply Capacity Print Paper Weight
When using the Stage Glass : 115/16" × 39/16" (50mm × 90mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm) When using the ADF unit (option) : 39/16" × 51/2" (90mm × 140mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm) When using the Stage Glass : 22 lb (10 kg) or less When using the ADF unit (option) : 15-lb bond (50g/m2) - 34-lb bond (128g/m2)
When simultaneously 2-Color printing: 73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297 mm × 432 mm) When 1-Color printing (using Cylinder (Drum) 1): 315/16" × 513/16" (100mm × 148mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm) When 1-Color printing (using Cylinder (Drum) 2): 73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297 mm × 432 mm)
1000 sheets (17-lb bond (64 g/m2))
13-lb bond (46g/m2) - 110-lb index (210g/m2)
Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo, Pencil
OE
Image Processing mode Resolution
UR OP
Specifications
D600dpi
Approx. 57 seconds (for dual-color print) Approx. 24 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 1)) Approx. 34 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 2))
Printing Area (max.)
117/16" × 161/4" (291mm × 413mm)
Print Reproduction Ratio
Zoom : 50 - 200% Standard reproduction ratio (enlargement) : 163%, 141%, 122%, 116% Standard reproduction ratio (reduction) : 87%, 82%, 71%, 61% Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Print Speed
Approx. 60 - 150 sheets per minute (Control panel: five steps variable, touch panel: 150ppm)
RIS
Master-making Time (for A4/portrait/100% reproduction ratio)
Print Position Adjustment
Vertical : ±19/32" (±15mm) Horizontal : ±3/8" (±10mm)
Ink Supply
Full automatic (1000 ml per cartridge)
Master Supply/Disposal
Full automatic (approx. 220 sheets per roll)
Master Disposal Capacity
80 sheets
User Interface
LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators, front-side operation
Optional Accessories
Auto Document Feeder, Job Separator, Key Card Counter, Color Cylinder (Drum), Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET, Special Paper Feed Kit, Stand, Document Storage Card DM-128CF, Wide Stacking Tray, RISO Color Separation Software CS-2000
Power Source
MZ770A : 100V-120V/220V-240V AC, 50/60Hz
[2-6]
When in use : 633/16"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1605mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H)) When in storage : 393/4"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1010mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H))
Weight
Approx. 370 1/16 lb (168 kg)
UR OP
Note:
E
Dimensions
RIS
OE
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine, some images and explanations in this manual may not correspond to your machine. • The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
[2-7]
E
Specifications
OP
RISO MZ770 E
High-speed digital master-making/full automatic stencil printing
Original Type
Book (10 kg or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.)
When using the Platen Glass : 50mm × 90mm - 297mm × 432mm When using the ADF unit (option) : 90mm × 140mm - 297mm × 432mm
Original Paper Weight
When using the Platen Glass : 10 kg or less When using the ADF unit (option) : 50g/m2 - 128g/m2
Print Paper Size (max./min.)
When simultaneously 2-Colour printing: 182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm When 1-Colour printing (using Drum 1): 100mm × 148mm - 297mm × 432mm When 1-Colour printing (using Drum 2): 182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
Paper Supply Capacity Print Paper Weight Image Processing mode
1000 sheets (64 g/m2) 46g/m2 - 210g/m2
Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo, Pencil D600dpi
OE
Resolution
UR
Master-making/printing methods
Master-making Time Approx. 57 seconds (for dual-colour print) (for A4/portrait/100% reproduction ratio) Approx. 24 seconds (for single-colour print (Drum 1)) Approx. 34 seconds (for single-colour print (Drum 2)) Printing Area (max.)
291mm × 413mm
Print Reproduction Ratio
Zoom : 50 - 200% Standard reproduction ratio (enlargement) : 163%, 141%, 122%, 116% Standard reproduction ratio (reduction) : 87%, 82%, 71%, 61% Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Print Speed
Approx. 60 - 150 sheets per minute (Control panel: five steps variable, touch panel: 150ppm) Vertical : ±15mm Horizontal : ±10mm
Ink Supply
Full automatic (1000 ml per cartridge)
Master Supply/Disposal
Full automatic (approx. 220 sheets per roll)
Master Disposal Capacity
80 sheets
User Interface
LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators, front-side operation
Optional Accessories
Auto Document Feeder, Job Separator, Key Card Counter, Colour Drum, Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET, Special Paper Feed Kit, Stand, Document Storage Card DM-32CF/128CF, Wide Stacking Tray, RISO Colour Separation Software CS-2000
Power Source
MZ770E : 220V-240V AC, 50/60Hz
Dimensions
When in use : 1605mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H) When in storage : 1010mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H)
Weight
Approx. 168 kg
RIS
Print Position Adjustment
[2-8]
E
Note:
RIS
OE
UR
OP
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine, some images and explanations in this manual may not correspond to your machine. • The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
[2-9]
选购附件
E UR OP
附录
有各种各样的选购附件可用于增强本机功能。 如需了解有关选购附件的详情，请联系您的经销商 （或授权维修中心）。
自动进稿机
可自动供给多达 50 张原稿。
彩色滚筒
只需更换滚筒便可用多种颜色印刷。（包含外壳）
磁卡计数器
只要按一个键，即可显示指定时间段内的印刷量与版纸消耗量。这有助于成本管理。
分页机
使用编程印刷功能，可供本机进行印刷并以胶带分页成组。
撑脚
OE
理想速印机网卡 RISORINC-NET
用于直接将本机接入网络。 此附件附带 RISO-MONITOR 软件，可用于从计算机检查本机状态。
特殊纸张进纸组件
通过本机组可以送入较厚的纸张，如卡片与信封。
油墨 / 版纸支架
用于储存备件 （如油墨与版纸）的支架组件。
宽型堆垛盒
RIS
对应 A6-A3 尺寸的出纸盒 /Ledger （340 mm × 479 mm）。
[2-10]
E
技术规格 制版 / 印刷方法
UR OP
RISO MV7690 C 高速数字制版 / 全自动模版印刷 书本 （10 kg 或以下）、稿纸
原稿类型 原稿尺寸 （最大 / 最小）
使用扫描台玻璃时：50 mm × 90 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm 使用自动进稿机组 （选购件）时：90 mm × 140 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
使用扫描台玻璃时：10 kg 或以下 使用自动进稿机组 （选购件）时：50 g/m2 - 128 g/m2
原稿纸张重量 印刷纸张尺寸 （最大 / 最小）
双色印刷时： 182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm 单色印刷时 （用滚筒 1）： 100 mm × 148 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm 单色印刷时 （用滚筒 2）： 182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
1000 张 （64 g/m2）
进纸容量
46 g/m2 -210 g/m2
印刷纸张重量
文字、照片 （标准 / 肖像 / 群组）、图文、铅笔
图像处理模式
D600dpi
分辨率
约 57 秒 （双色印刷） 约 24 秒 （单色印刷 （滚筒 1）） 约 34 秒 （单色印刷 （滚筒 2））
OE
制版时间 （对于 A4/ 肖像 /100% 缩放比率） 印刷区域 （最大）
291 mm × 413 mm
印刷缩放比率
任意指定：50 - 200% 标准缩放比率 （放大）：163%, 141%, 122%, 116% 标准缩放比率 （缩小）：87%, 82%, 71%, 61% 页边放大：90 - 99 %
印刷速度 印刷位置调整 油墨供给
垂直：±15 mm，水平：±10 mm
全自动 （每筒 1000 毫升） 全自动 （约每卷 220 张）
RIS
版纸供给 / 回收
每分约 60 - 150 张 （控制面板：5 级速度调节，触摸面板：150 ppm）
废版盒容量
80 张
用户界面
带进度箭头指示灯的 LCD 触摸面板，正面操作
选购附件
自动进稿机、分页机、磁卡计数器、彩色滚筒、网卡 RISORINC-NET、特 殊纸张进纸组件、撑脚、油墨 / 版纸支架、宽型堆垛盒
电源
MV7690C：220V AC, 50 Hz
尺寸
使用时：1605 mm (W) × 725 mm (D) × 730 mm (H) 存储时：1010 mm (W) × 725 mm (D) × 730 mm (H)
重量
约 168 kg
注：
• •
请注意，由于本机的改进与修改，本手册中的某些图像与说明可能与您的速印机不同。 以上规格如果变更恕不另行通知。
[2-11]
Chapter 2 Machine Summary
4. Paper Sizes
Second paper 2次給紙部 feed section
OP
E
Center transport 中間搬送部 section
Transport flap 搬送フラッパ
244㎜
UR
69㎜
313㎜
Paper is transported from the pickup roller to the second paper feed roller and discharged by a pair of pressure rollers. Paper is held in place by a roller at any given time during printing.
OE
If paper is not held in place by a roller, it may move in any of the four directions during printing. The amount of positional shift grows especially large for small copy paper sheets, resulting in noticeable print registration problems.
RIS
A print registration problem can cause serious problems, particularly with dual-color printing. Since paper shorter than 244 mm cannot be held in place by the center transport section, the minimum standard paper size that can be printed is B5 (loaded vertically). The single-color printing operation using the first print drum is identical to that of an ordinary single-color printer. Thus, the paper size restrictions are also the same. For single-color printing using the second print drum, the distance between the second paper feed section and the second print drum is 313 mm and longer than when using the first print drum. However, this has minimal consequences for single-color printing. The minimum paper size that can be printed appropriately is B5. Paper will shift significantly with smaller paper sizes, and the machine will not provide maximum printing quality.
[2-12]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 3-2 Main Drive Rotation Mechanism ............................................................................................... 3-2 Print Drum Rotation Angle Detection Mechanism ..................................................................... 3-3 Print Drum FG Sensors ............................................................................................................. 3-4 Vertical Position Adjustment Mechanism .................................................................................. 3-6 Drive Brake Mechanism ............................................................................................................ 3-8 Main Motor Safety Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 9 Print Drum Set Safety Mechanism .......................................................................................... 3-11
UR
1. 2. 3. 4 5. 6. 7.
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Removing Pressure Springs ................................................................................................... 3-13 Removing the Position-B Sensor and Print Drum FG Sensor (Same Procedure as for First and Second Print Drum Sides) ................................................. 3-14 Removing the Drive Encoder (Same Procedure as for First and Second Print Drum Sides) ....................................................................................................... 3-15 Removing the Vertical Print Position Main Unit ....................................................................... 3-17 Removing the Solenoid Brake ................................................................................................. 3-21 Removing the Print-positioning Pulse Motor ........................................................................... 3-22 Removing the Main Motor ....................................................................................................... 3-24
OE
1. 2.
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 3-26 Print Drum Position-A Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-26 Print Drum Position-B Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-26
RIS
1. 2.
[3-1]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
1.
E
Mechanism Main Drive Rotation Mechanism
UR
OP
When the main motor turns ON, the main motor gear rotates. This rotation is transmitted to the first print drum drive gear by means of main drive gear A and main drive gear B. The first print drum drive gear then turns the vertical print position input gear. This rotation is transmitted to the second print drum drive gear by the planetary gear and vertical print position output gear. The main motor FG sensor detects the rotation speed and angle of the print drums.
Vertical print position input gear (gear on the rear side) Vertical print position output gear (gear on the front side)
OE
Second print drum drive gear
First print drum drive gear
Main drive gear B
RIS
Main drive gear A
Main motor
Main motor FG sensor
0301 0302 0303
>
[3-2]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Print Drum Rotation Angle Detection Mechanism
E
2.
Position-B sensor
Position-B actuator plate
Position-B sensor
OE
UR
Print drum FG sensor
OP
For print drum rotation angle detection, the position-B sensors on the first print drum side and second print drum side and the position-B actuator plates on the pressure cams check the machine position-B. Then, using machine position-B as the reference, the main motor FG sensors check the print drum rotation angles. When the machine position-B is at the center of the position-B actuator plate, the print drum angle is indicated as 0° machine position-B. Machine position-A is at a 65° turn from the machine position-B, and the FG count is 2,880 pulses for one full print drum rotation.
Print drum FG sensor
>
0304
>
RIS
Position-B actuator plate
0305
[3-3]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Print Drum FG Sensors
E
3.
For detailed information on the second paper feed mechanism, refer to Chapter 5. (1) Second paper feed operation, with the first print drum set in the main unit
UR
OP
The paper feed timing of the second paper feed section is used for vertical print position adjustment of the first print drum. (Refer to the section on second paper feed section.) When the first print drum rotates to a specified position, the second paper feed motor rotates and begins transporting paper toward the print drum. The registration sensor detects the leading edge of the paper to confirm the start of paper feed action. (Condition (a) the diagram below) The second paper feed motor continues the rotation to transport the paper until its leading edge reaches the print drum. (Condition (b) the diagram below) While first print drum FG sensor monitors the rotation speed of the first print drum, the rotation of the second feed motor is controlled under conditions between (a) and (b) so that the paper feed speed is equivalent to the print drum circumferential speed in condition (b) and the timing of the arrival of paper leading edge at the print drum remains constant. (2) Second paper feed operation, without the first print drum in the main unit The operation is basically the same as described in (1), but the rotation of the second paper feed motor is controlled based on feedback from the second print drum FG sensor.
OE
Registration sensor Second paper feed roller
(a)
RIS
(b)
0306
With first print drum installed
Without first print drum
[3-4]
E
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
OP
Guide roller
Registration sensor
UR
Timing roller
0307
Second paper feed motor
RIS
OE
First drum FG sensor
Second drum FG sensor
0308
>
[3-5]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Vertical Position Adjustment Mechanism
E
4
UR
OP
The paper feed timing of the second paper feed section is used for vertical print position adjustment of the first print drum in single-color printing (with the first print drum) or in dual-color printing, and for adjustment of the vertical print position of the second print drum for single-color printing using just the second print drum, when no first print drum is installed in the main unit. (Refer to the section on the second paper feed section.) Vary the phase difference between the first and second print drums to adjust the vertical print position of the second print drum in dual-color printing or in single-color printing with the first print drum installed in the main unit. The phase difference is varied by the vertical print position main unit installed between the first print drum drive gear and the second print drum drive gear. The vertical print position main unit incorporates a planetary gear mechanism and uses the print-positioning pulse motor of the vertical print position adjusting unit to control the phase difference. At the initial vertical print position, the phase difference of the second print drum relative to the first print drum is 162.6° (equivalent to the distance from the first print drum to the second print drum). In addition, to prevent load fluctuations on the second print drum from causing a backlash in the vertical print position adjusting input gear, resulting in print registration problems with the second print drum, the vertical print-position-control spring, spring attachment gear, and speed reduction gear press the vertical print position adjusting input gear in the counterclockwise direction. If you press the vertical print-positioning key while the machine is in standby, the print-positioning pulse motor will not start. Only the panel display will reflect this operation. The vertical print position is varied when printing starts. >
Spring attachment gear
Vertical print-position-control spring
OE
Speed reduction gear
RIS
First print drum drive gear
Print-positioning pulse motor
Second print drum drive gear
Vertical print position adjusting input gear
0309
First print drum
Second print drum
162.6°
0310
[3-6]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
When
key (upward) of the second print drum is pressed in dual-color printing
OP
E
Pressing the < > key (upward) causes the print-positioning pulse motor to rotate the vertical print position adjusting input gear counterclockwise. Since the vertical print position output gear rotates clockwise (it rotates clockwise during normal printing operations) and the second print drum drive gear turns counterclockwise, the phase of the second print drum advances, raising the print position.
UR
Vertical print position output gear
0311
Second print drum drive gear
>
When
key (downward) of the second print drum is pressed in dual-color printing
Pressing the < > key (downward) causes the print-positioning pulse motor to rotate the vertical print position adjusting input gear clockwise. Since the vertical print position output gear rotates counterclockwise and the second print drum drive gear turns clockwise, the phase of the second print drum is retarded, lowering the print position.
RIS
Vertical print position output gear
0312 Second print drum drive gear
Vertical print position adjusting input gear
>
[3-7]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Drive Brake Mechanism
E
5.
UR
OP
During printing operations, when the pressure lever on the second print drum side begins to move down relative to the pressure cam lobe, the pressure spring force turns the second print drum upward as much as the backlash (backlash from the first print drum drive gear to the second print drum drive gear) of the second print drum gear allows. The degree of this deviation varies with each rotation, potentially resulting in transfer ghosting (i.e., ink transferred by the first print drum pressing against the second master, resulting in the superimposition of the image printed by the first print drum during the next printing operation). To prevent this, the drive brake is switched ON when the second print drum angle is between 215.4° and 267.4°, applying a load on the second print drum drive gear. This keeps the pressure spring from preventing the second print drum from turning due to backlash.
Second print drum drive gear
OE
Drive brake
First print drum drive gear
0313
Pressure cam
RIS
Pressure lever
Pressure spring
[3-8]
0314
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Main Motor Safety Mechanism
E
6.
UR
OP
Five safety switches (rear cover safety SW1, rear cover safety SW2, master making unit drawer cover safety SW, first master disposal box safety SW, and second master disposal box safety SW) will make it impossible to turn ON the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second master compression motor, first horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal pulse motor, cutter motor, and master making unit transport pulse motor of any of these sections is not set. * Note that the cutter motor turns ON in the test mode even if the master disposal box is not set in place.
RIS
OE
Second master disposal box safety SW
0315
Master making unit drawer cover safety SW
[3-9]
Rear cover safety SW 1
OP
Rear cover safety SW 2
E
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
RIS
OE
UR
First master disposal box safety SW
[3-10]
0316
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Print Drum Set Safety Mechanism
E
7.
OE
UR
OP
If the front cover safety switch is OFF and either the first print drum safety switch or second print drum safety switch is OFF, the safety mechanism prevents the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second master compression motor, first horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal pulse motor, cutter motor, and master making unit transport pulse motor from turning ON. While the front cover safety switch is ON, the machine will operate if either the first print drum safety switch or second print drum safety switch is ON, even when the other is OFF. This permits printing with a single print drum.
RIS
Print drum safety SW
[3-11]
0317
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
OP
E
Disassembly
PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN DRIVE SECTION AND PRESSURE SECTION
RIS
OE
UR
Following removal of the main cover, the pressure springs must be removed before disassembly of the main drive or pressure sections. Failure to remove the pressure springs may result in sudden rotation of gears or cams from the force of the springs and cause injury. To prevent accidents, always remove the pressure springs (on both the first and second print drum sides) before disassembly. Reattach the pressure springs (the first and second print drum sides) only at the end of reassembly.
[3-12]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Removing Pressure Springs
E
1.
UR
OP
(1) Run Confidential Mode for both the first and second print drums. (2) Run Test Mode No. 908 (Pressure Control Maintenance Positioning) for both the first and second print drum sides. (3) Run Test Mode No. 892 (Machine Position-B stop (The position in which the print drum can be removed from the machine.)) for the second print drum side, then switch off power. (4) Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket. (5) On both the first and second print drum sides, turn the pressure lever assemblies slightly clockwise. With the solenoid levers positioned away from the pressure lever assemblies, return the pressure lever assemblies to their original positions. (6) On both the first and second print drum sides, dismount the pressure springs from the pressure spring hook plate, then remove the pressure lever assemblies.
Pressure lever assembly
RIS
OE
Pressure spring
Pressure spring hook plate
0318 Solenoid lever
[3-13]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Removing the Position-B Sensor and Print Drum FG Sensor (Same Procedure as for First and Second Print Drum Sides)
E
2.
Removing the position-B sensor
OP
(1) Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket.
(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), and dismount the position-B sensor together with the bracket.
Removing the print drum FG sensor
(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screw (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 1 pc), and dismount the print drum FG sensor together with the bracket.
0319
RIS
OE
Print drum FG sensor
UR
Position-B sensor
0320
[3-14]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Removing the Drive Encoder (Same Procedure as for First and Second Print Drum Sides)
E
3.
Remove the pressure springs. (Refer to .) Close the power supply/system PCB bracket and attach the cover (rear right). Move the first print drum to position-B, then switch off power. Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket and SH PCB bracket. Remove the print drum FG sensors from the first and second print drum sides. Remove the connectors for the position-B sensors from the first and second print drum sides, then remove the reusable band (at four locations). (7) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs each) and dismount the pressure shaft bearing assemblies from the first and second print drum sides. (8) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8, 6 pcs), then remove the main cover. * In this step, remove the main cover while pressing against the shafts of the print drum drive gear assemblies, to keep the print drum drive gear assemblies on the first and second print drum sides in their installed positions.
UR
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Position-B sensor
Main cover
Position-B sensor
RIS
OE
Print drum FG sensor
Print drum FG sensor
Pressure shaft bearing assembly
0321
Shaft of print drum drive gear assembly
Pressure shaft bearing assembly
>
• When mounting the main cover, fasten screws A and B before tightening the remaining four screws, then install the pressure shaft bearing assemblies.
[3-15]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
UR
OP
E
(9) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 6 pcs) and dismount the drive encoder.
0322
RIS
OE
>
0323
Drive encoder
[3-16]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Removing the Vertical Print Position Main Unit
E
4.
First print drum drive gear assembly
UR
Second print drum drive gear assembly
OP
(1) Remove the pressure springs. (Refer to .) (2) Close the power supply/system PCB bracket and attach the cover (rear right). (3) Pull out both the first and second print drums, set the first print drum side to position-B, and switch off power. (4) Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket and SH PCB bracket. (5) Remove the main cover. (Refer to Steps (5) through (8) in .) (6) Remove the separation springs from the first and second print drum sides. (7) Remove the vertical print-position-control spring. (8) Remove the first and second print drum drive gear assemblies. (9) Remove the vertical print position main unit.
RIS
OE
Vertical print position main unit
Separation spring
Separation spring
[3-17]
0324
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
>
Vertical print position output gear
UR
8-mm-diameter jig
OP
E
(1) Align the phase alignment holes of the vertical print position adjusting input gear assembly, vertical print position input gear, and vertical print position output gear of the vertical print position main unit. Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the holes. * Phase alignment holes of the vertical print position input gear and vertical print position output gear will align only once every four turns of the vertical print position output gear. (2) With the 4-mm-diameter jig inserted into the phase alignment holes of the print-positioning control plate and the print positioning plate, install the vertical print position main unit, confirming that the 8mm-diameter jig inserted into the vertical print position main unit aligns with the phase alignment hole of the vertical print position drive shaft bearing plate.
Vertical print position input gear
Vertical print position adjusting input gear assembly
0325
OE
>
Print-positioning control plate
4-mm-diameter jig
RIS
Print positioning plate
8-mm-diameter jig
0326
Vertical print position drive shaft bearing plate
0327
Vertical print position main unit
> • When inserting the 4-mm-diameter jig, confirm that the master making unit is in the pulled-out position.
[3-18]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
E
(3) Since the gear alignment marks are not visible, remove the pressure cams of the first and second print drum drive gear assemblies. (with double-washer, M4 x 10, 3 pcs each)
OP
Pressure cam
UR
0328
>
OE
(4) With the 8-mm-diameter jig inserted into the vertical print position main unit, insert the 4-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment hole of the separation pump gear assembly on the first print drum side, then align the marks on the vertical print position input gear and first print drum drive gear and attach the first print drum drive gear assembly.
Separation pump gear assembly on first print drum side
First print drum drive gear
RIS
Vertical print position input gear
4-mm-diameter jig
0330
0329 First print drum drive gear assembly
Alignment marks
[3-19]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Separation pump gear assembly on second print drum side
OP
4-mm-diameter jig
E
(5) With the 8-mm-diameter jig inserted into the vertical print position main unit, insert the 4-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment hole of the separation pump gear assembly on the second print drum side, then align the marks on the vertical print position output gear and second print drum drive gear and attach the second print drum drive gear assembly.
Vertical print position output gear
UR
Second print drum drive gear
0332
OE
0331
Alignment marks
Second print drum drive gear assembly
RIS
(6) Install the pressure cams in the first and second print drum drive gear assemblies. * In this step, insert the 4-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes of the pressure cams and print drum drive gears to secure them in position. (7) Attach the main cover.
4-mm-diameter jig
Pressure cam
0333
[3-20]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Removing the Solenoid Brake
E
5.
RIS
OE
Connector
UR
Solenoid brake
OP
(1) Stop the first print drum at position-B, then switch off power. (2) Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket. (3) To keep the gears from turning, insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes of the main cover, pressure cam, and rear plate on the second print drum side. (4) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M4 x 10, 4 pcs). Unplug the connector and dismount the solenoid brake.
0334
Phase alignment hole
0335
Main cover
[3-21]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Removing the Print-positioning Pulse Motor
E
6.
Remove the pressure springs. (Refer to .) Close the power supply/system PCB bracket and attach the cover (rear right). Set the first print drum at position-B, then switch off power. Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket. Insert the 8-mm-diameter jigs into the phase alignment holes of the main cover (indicated by the arrow in the photo), pressure cams, and rear plate on both the first and second print drum sides. (6) Remove the vertical print-position-control spring. (7) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs) and unplug the connector for the print-positioning pulse motor. Remove the reusable band and dismount the vertical print position adjusting unit.
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
UR
Vertical print-position-control spring
Connector for print-positioning pulse motor
OE
0336
RIS
Reusable band
0337
[3-22]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
E
(8) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the print-positioning pulse motor.
UR
OP
Print-positioning pulse motor
0338
>
>
OE
• With the 8-mm-diameter jigs (A, B) inserted into phase alignment holes of the main cover, pressure cams, and rear plate of both the first and second print drum sides, insert the 4-mm-diameter jig (C) into the phase alignment holes of the print-positioning control plate and print positioning plate. Install after aligning the phases of the drive system gear and vertical print position adjusting unit.
Print-positioning control plate
RIS
Print positioning plate
0339
[3-23]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
Removing the Main Motor
E
7.
OP
(1) Switch off power. (2) Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the SH PCB bracket. (3) Remove the sheet metal at three locations (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs on center sheet metal, 1 pc each on left and right sheet metal). (4) Remove the reusable band at one location. (5) Remove the pressure springs and dismount and move the pressure control unit to the left to provide space. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs) (6) Remove the two bearing sheet metal plates (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs each), then remove the main drive transmission cover. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 5 pcs) Main drive transmission cover
OE
UR
Pressure spring
Pressure control unit
Bearing sheet metal
0340
Sheet metal at three locations
RIS
Reusable band
(7) Remove the C-ring and dismount main drive gear A.
Main drive gear A
C-ring
0341
[3-24]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
E
(8) Unplug the two connectors, remove the mounting screws, and dismount the main motor (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs).
UR
OP
Mounting screws
0342
>
OE
Main motor
If the main motor has been replaced, you must perform and .
RIS
(Procedure) (1) Set the first and second print drums in the main unit. (2) Run Test Mode No. 1105 (Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode). (3) Run Test Mode No. 1106 (Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode). For detailed information, refer to .
[3-25]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
1. Print Drum Position-A Adjustment Adjustment and adjustment procedures
E
Adjustment
OP
(1) Open the front cover. (2) Launch test mode and run Test Mode No. 881 (Position-A action of the print drum). (3) Confirm that the stamped mark on the print drum cover is within 1° of the left edge of the projection on the clamp plate base. (4) If the measurement fails to meet this standard, run Test Mode No. 941 (Print-drum Position-A adjustment) and adjust print drum position-A. (5) Repeat the steps from (2).
RIS
OE
UR
Confirm that the gap between the left edge of the projection on the clamp plate base and the steel measure (or similar tool) is approximately 1.5 mm.
0343
Position a steel measure or similar tool along the groove on the drum cover.
2.
Print Drum Position-B Adjustment
Adjustment and adjustment procedures (1) Open the front cover and press the print drum removal button. (2) Move the print drum in and out to confirm that it moves smoothly. (3) If the print drum does not move smoothly in and out, run Test Mode No. 942 (Print-drum position-B adjustment) and adjust print drum position-B. (4) Repeat the steps from (2).
[3-26]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 4 First Paper Feed Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Paper Feed Tray Mechanism .................................................................................................... 4-2 Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism .................................................................................... 4-3 Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism ......................................................................................... 4-5 Remaining Paper Volume Detection Mechanism ...................................................................... 4-6 Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Mechanism .......................................................................... 4-7 Paper Feed Reverse-Rotation Prevention Mechanism ............................................................. 4-8 Initial Paper Feed Operation ..................................................................................................... 4-9 Custom Paper Feed Adjustment Function .............................................................................. 4-10 Paper Stripper Mechanism ...................................................................................................... 4-11
UR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................... 4-12
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit ....................................................................................... 4-12 Removing the Paper Detection Sensor, Paper Size Detection Sensor, and Paper Width Potentiometer .......................................................................................................................... 4-14 Removing the Scraper and Pickup Roller ............................................................................... 4-18 Removing the Paper Feed Roller Assembly ........................................................................... 4-20 Removing the Paper Feed Tray Button and Paper Feed Tray Upper Safety Switch ............... 4-21 Removing the Elevator Upper-limit Sensors and Paper Feed Pressure Sensor ..................... 4-23 Removing the Paper Feed Reverse-rotation Prevention Solenoid .......................................... 4-24 Removing the Paper Feed Clutch ........................................................................................... 4-25 Removing Remaining Paper Volume Sensors A and B ........................................................... 4-27 Removing the Elevator Motor .................................................................................................. 4-28 Removing the Elevator Lower-limit Sensor and Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch ......... 4-29 Removing the Stripper Pad Unit .............................................................................................. 4-30 Removing the Stripper Pad Assembly ..................................................................................... 4-31
OE
1. 2.
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 4-32 Elevator Upper-limit Sensor Position Adjustment .................................................................... 4-32 Stripper Pad Adjustment .......................................................................................................... 4-33 Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-34 Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle Adjustment ............................................................................. 4-34 Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment .................................................................................. 4-35
RIS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
[4-1]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
1.
E
Mechanism Paper Feed Tray Mechanism
OE
UR
OP
The paper feed tray is equipped with a paper width potentiometer and a paper size detection sensor to determine the size of paper placed in the paper feed tray. The paper width potentiometer detects the paper width, while the paper size detection sensor identifies the paper length (whether positioned vertically or horizontally). Because the horizontal print position is adjusted on the print drum side, the paper feed tray does not move horizontally.
Paper size detection sensor
RIS
Paper feed tray
[4-2]
Paper width potentiometer
0401
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism
E
2.
UR
OP
The paper detection sensor detects the presence of paper in the paper feed tray. Pressing the Start key while the paper detection sensor senses light (indicating the presence of paper) indicates that paper is present switches ON the elevator motor and lifts the paper feed tray until the upper-limit detecting plate (card) blocks the light path of elevator upper-limit sensor A. The upper-limit detecting plate (normal) blocks the light path of elevator upper-limit sensor B (refer to the > on the next page regarding upper-limit positions determined by elevator upper-limit sensors A and B). During printing, the elevator motor remains ON until the set upper-limit position is attained. When no more paper is left in the paper feed tray and no light strikes the paper detection sensor, the elevator motor switches ON and lowers the paper feed tray until the light path of the elevator lower-limit sensor is blocked. Press the Feed Tray button (for 0.7 seconds or less) during print standby to turn the elevator motor ON and lower the paper feed tray until the light path of the elevator lower-limit sensor is blocked or the Feed Tray button is pressed once again. Depress the Feed Tray button for more than 0.7 seconds to lower the paper feed tray until the Feed Tray button is released. Pressing the Feed Tray button when the paper feed tray is at the lower-limit position and the paper detection sensor senses light will switch the elevator motor ON and lift the paper feed tray to the upperlimit position.
Upper-limit detecting plate (normal)
Elevator upper-limit sensor A
Elevator upper-limit sensor B
RIS
OE
Upper-limit detecting plate (card)
Elevator motor
Feed Tray button
0402
Paper detection sensor
Elevator lower-limit sensor
[4-3]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
>
UR
OP
E
There are two elevator upper-limit sensors, A and B. The elevator upper-limit sensor B is paired with the upper-limit detecting plate (normal), while the elevator upper-limit sensor A is paired with the upper-limit detecting plate (card). Based on various combinations of these elements, three paper feed tray upperlimit positions are possible, as shown in the diagram below. Selecting in Test Mode No. 740 (Elevator upper-limit position selection) makes it possible to adjust the paper feed tray upper-limit position using the paper feed pressure lever. Setting the paper feed pressure lever to sets the upper-limit position of the paper feed tray to the normal position. Setting the paper feed pressure lever to sets the upper-limit position of the paper feed tray to the card position. Selecting a setting other than sets the paper feed tray at the upper-limit position of the selected paper feed tray. Setting the paper feed tray upper-limit position to using in the custom paper feed adjustment sets the upper-limit position of the paper feed tray to the normal position. Setting this to sets the upper-limit position to the card position. Setting this to sets the upper-limit position to the custom position.
Upper-limit position
Feed tray down
Blocked Elevator upper-limit sensor A Open
Elevator upper-limit sensor B
Blocked
OE
Open
RIS
Custom paper
[4-4]
Normal
Card
0403
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism
E
3.
Paper feed tray upper safety switch
OE
UR
Paper feed cover
OP
The paper feed tray upper safety switch and the paper feed tray lower safety switch ensure safety while the paper feed tray is rising or stationary. Lifting the paper feed cover opens the paper feed tray upper safety switch. Pressing down the lower-limit frame opens the paper feed lower safety switch. If either of the two safety switches opens, a paper feed tray error is detected and the elevator motor switches OFF.
Lower-limit frame
RIS
Paper feed tray lower safety switch
[4-5]
0404
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Remaining Paper Volume Detection Mechanism
E
4.
OP
Two sensors (remaining paper volume sensor A and remaining paper volume sensor B) detect the volume of paper remaining in the paper feed tray when the paper feed tray is at the upper-limit position. If the paper feed tray is not at the upper-limit position, the remaining paper volume is indicated as .
Remaining paper volume and remaining paper volume sensor operations Volume of remaining paper
Sensor status
Remaining paper volume sensor A
Remaining paper volume sensor B
100% to 50%
OFF
OFF
50% to 30%
ON ON OFF
ON
ON
OE
UR
30% to 10% Less than 10%
OFF
0405
Remaining paper volume sensor B
RIS
Remaining paper volume sensor A
[4-6]
0406
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Mechanism
E
5.
OP
The paper feed pressure lever is located on the left-hand side of the first paper feed stay assembly. R adjusts the paper feed pressure (scraper pressure) between (low) and Sliding this lever L (high). Setting the paper feed pressure lever to the right for increases paper feed pressure (scraper pressure). The paper feed pressure sensor checks the position of the paper feed pressure lever and switches the paper feed clutch OFF angle, switches the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid ON-OFF, and adjusts the paper wing position.
Paper feed pressure sensor
OE
UR
First paper feed stay assembly
Paper feed pressure lever
RIS
P.U. frame unit (scraper located within)
[4-7]
0407
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Paper Feed Reverse-Rotation Prevention Mechanism
E
6.
OP
The high resilience of thick paper stock can produce a force that reverses the rotation of the pickup roller if the paper feed clutch is switched OFF, even when the paper feed operation provides a certain amount of slack. This may eliminate slack in the paper and cause a paper feed failure. To prevent reverse rotation of the pickup roller, the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid remains ON during printing when the paper feed pressure lever is set to , and the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention hook assembly is engaged to the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly. Page 4-9 Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly
Pickup roller
OE
UR
Paper feed clutch
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention hook assembly
0408
RIS
>
0409
>
[4-8]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Initial Paper Feed Operation
E
7.
Main drive gear B
UR
OP
At the start of a print job, the main motor switches ON and rotates the print drum via main drive gears A and B. The paper feed clutch gear rotates continuously when the main motor is ON. When the print drum rotates from position-B to a certain angle (angle set by adjusting the paper feed clutch ON angle during test mode or by the custom paper feed ON timing), the paper feed clutch switches ON, turning the scraper and pickup roller and transporting paper from the paper feed tray into the machine. When the print drum rotates through a certain angle (angle set by adjusting the paper feed clutch OFF angle in test mode or by the amount of slack set during custom paper feed adjustment) after the paper is fed into the machine and the paper sensor senses light, the paper feed clutch switches OFF, and the first paper feed operation stops. In this process, the leading edge of the paper contacts the guide roller and timing roller. When paper transport stops, some slack is left in the paper. Additionally, when the print drum rotates to the paper feed jam detection angle/IN angle after the paper feed clutch switches ON, the machine polls the paper sensor for a paper failure feed error. The scraper and pickup roller are equipped with a one-way clutch to enable free rotation and to keep the first paper feed section from halting or slowing paper feeding after the paper is fed to the second paper feed section. Pickup roller
Paper feed clutch
Scraper
RIS
OE
Main drive gear A
Main motor
Pickup roller
Paper sensor (light receiver)
0410
Guide roller
Scraper
0411 Stripper pad
Timing roller
Paper sensor (light emitter)
[4-9]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Custom Paper Feed Adjustment Function
E
8.
UR
OP
To use this function, open the Function List tab on the normal master making/print screen of the operation panel. Press the Custom Paper Feed Adjustment button to open the custom paper feed adjustment screen. Pressing the Manual Adjustment button on the custom paper feed adjustment screen changes the display to the screen shown in Fig. 1. This screen enables adjustment of the paper feed tray upper-limit position and amount of paper slack. To adjust paper feed ON timing and paper feed OFF timing (amount of slack), press the Detail button at the lower right corner of the screen. The display changes to the screen shown in Fig. 2. To save the adjustment values, press the Register/Recall button. In the screen shown in Fig. 3, press the Register button, then select one of the six buttons A-1 to A-6 to save the parameters. Saving adjustment values to any of the buttons from A-1 through A-6 makes it possible to quickly recall a set of adjustment values. Recall settings by pressing the Recall button on the screen shown in Fig. 3 and selecting the corresponding button. Press the Manual Adjustment button on the custom paper feed adjustment screen and the Enter button on the manual adjustment screen to keep the adjustment values indicated on the custom paper feed adjustment screen (shown in Figs. 1 and 2) active until power is switched off even if the adjustment values are altered or recalled. Setting items on screen shown in Fig. 1
OE
> Selects the paper feed tray stop position (paper feed position). Adjustment range: +1 (Card position) 0 (Normal position) –1 (Custom position)
>
0468
> Adjusts the angle at which the paper feed clutch switches OFF. Adjustment range: –8 to +8° Adjustment steps: 2° Setting items on screen shown in Fig. 2
RIS
> Adjusts the angle at which the paper feed clutch switches ON. Adjustment range: –20 to +20° Adjustment steps: 1°
>
>
> Adjusts the angle at which the paper feed clutch switches OFF. Adjustment range: –20 to +20° Adjustment steps: 1°
0469
> Altering the setting for Test Mode No. 741 (Paper-feedclutch ON angle) will change the reference value for paper feed ON timing of custom paper feed adjustment. Altering the setting for Test Mode No. 742 (Paper-feed-clutch OFF angle) will also change the reference values for the amount of slack and the paper feed OFF timing (amount of slack) of custom paper feed adjustment.
0470
[4-10]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Paper Stripper Mechanism
E
9.
OP
The scraper and pickup roller rotate to transport paper from the paper feed tray to the stripper pad. The pickup roller and the stripper pad loosen the stacked paper and transport the uppermost sheet into the machine. The stripper pad is pressed against the pickup roller by the stripper spring, which applies resistance to the paper being transported to ensure only a single sheet of paper is fed at a time. Use the stripper angle adjuster and stripper pressure adjuster to adjust the stripper pad angle and stripper spring pressure, if necessary.
Stripper pad
UR
Pickup roller
Stripper angle adjuster
Stripper spring
RIS
OE
Stripper pressure adjuster
0413
>
[4-11]
0412
0414 >
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
1.
E
Disassembly Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit
OE
UR
OP
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power. (2) Remove the ribbon cable cover. (bind, M3 x 6, 1 pc) (3) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the connector and remove the ribbon cable holder from the paper feed tray frame (rear). (4) Remove the E-rings (one each) from the front and rear sides and detach the paper feed tray retaining plates (one each). Dismount the paper feed tray unit.
Paper feed tray unit
RIS
Ribbon cable cover
0416
[4-12]
0415
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
UR
OP
E
Ribbon cable holder
0417
Connector
OE
Ribbon cable
0418
RIS
Paper feed tray retaining plate
Paper feed tray retaining plate
0419
Paper feed tray frame (rear)
[4-13]
0420
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Detection Sensor, Paper Size Detection Sensor, and Paper Width Potentiometer
E
2.
UR
OP
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, switch off power, and dismount the paper feed tray unit. (2) Remove the E-rings and paper guide lock levers (on both the front and rear sides). (3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 2 pcs each) and dismount the paper feed guide (front) and the paper feed guide (rear).
Paper guide lock lever E-ring
OE
0421
Paper feed guide (front)
RIS
Paper feed guide (rear)
Paper feed tray table S
Paper feed tray table L
0422 >
[4-14]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the paper detection sensor
Paper detection sensor
0423
RIS
OE
UR
Connector
OP
E
(4) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 8 pcs) and dismount paper feed tray table S. (5) Unplug the connector and remove the paper detection sensor.
0424
[4-15]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section (4) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 7 pcs) and dismount paper feed tray table L.
E
Removing the paper size detection sensor/paper width potentiometer (5) Unplug the connector and remove the paper size detection sensor.
Removing the paper width potentiometer
RIS
OE
UR
OP
(5) Unplug the connector and remove the mounting screws (P tight, 3 x 8, 3 pcs). Dismount the paper width potentiometer assembly.
0425
Paper width potentiometer assembly
Connector for paper width potentiometer
0426
Connector for paper size detection sensor
Paper size detection sensor
[4-16]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
>
UR
OP
E
• Align the mark (projection line) on the paper guide rack with the mark (projection line) on the spur gear when installing the paper width potentiometer assembly.
0427
RIS
OE
Paper width potentiometer assembly
Spur gear
[4-17]
Paper guide rack
Paper guide rack
0428
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the Scraper and Pickup Roller
E
3.
Removing the scraper
OP
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power. (2) Remove the retaining ring from the scraper shaft and remove the bearing metal from the front side. (3) Slide the scraper shaft toward the back, remove the bearing metal on the rear side from the P.U. frame unit, and dismount the scraper together with the scraper shaft from the bottom side. (4) Remove the scraper from the scraper shaft. * The only consumable part here is the paper feed roller. Remove it from the core assembly, then replace. The paper feed roller of the pickup roller is also a consumable part.
OE
UR
P.U. frame unit
Retaining ring
Scraper shaft
RIS
Scraper
0429
0430 Bearing metal
Scraper
Retaining ring
Scraper shaft
[4-18]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the pickup roller
OP
E
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power. (2) Remove the retaining ring from the P.U. extension shaft assembly, slide the shaft toward the front, and remove the bearing metal from the side plate. (3) Remove the retaining ring from the P.U. shaft. (4) Remove the pickup roller from the P.U. shaft.
UR
P.U. extension shaft assembly
0431
0432
OE
Retaining ring
Bearing metal
Retaining ring
RIS
P.U. extension shaft
0433
P.U. shaft
0434 Retaining ring
Pickup roller
[4-19]
Bearing metal
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Feed Roller Assembly Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power. Remove the paper feed cover. (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) Remove the P.U. extension shaft assembly. Remove the mounting screw (double-washer cap screw, M4 x 8, 1 pc) and dismount the paper feed roller assembly.
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
E
4.
UR
Paper feed cover
OE
0435
P.U. extension shaft assembly
RIS
Paper feed roller assembly
0436
[4-20]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Feed Tray Button and Paper Feed Tray Upper Safety Switch
E
5.
UR
OP
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power. (2) Remove the following parts: • Paper feed cover • Paper feed roller assembly (3) Unplug the connectors (2 locations). (4) Remove the upper safety switch spring. (5) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M3 x 6, 3 pcs) and dismount the first paper feed stay assembly.
0437
OE
Upper safety switch spring
0439
0438
RIS
Connectors
0440 >
[4-21]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the paper feed tray button Removing the paper feed tray upper safety switch
E
(6) Unplug the connector, disengage the two hooks, and dismount the paper feed tray button.
UR
OP
(6) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 14, 2 pcs), and dismount the paper feed tray upper safety switch.
OE
0441
RIS
Feed tray button
0442
Paper feed tray upper safety switch
[4-22]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the Elevator Upper-limit Sensors and Paper Feed Pressure Sensor
E
6.
OP
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power. (2) Remove the paper feed cover. (3) Remove the first paper feed stay assembly.
Removing the elevator upper-limit sensors
(4) Unplug the connectors and dismount the elevator upper-limit sensors.
Removing the paper feed pressure sensor
0443
RIS
OE
UR
(4) Set the paper feed pressure lever to the position. (5) Unplug the connector and dismount the paper feed pressure sensor.
position
0445
0444
Paper feed pressure sensor
Paper feed pressure lever
[4-23]
Elevator upper-limit sensor B
Elevator upper-limit sensor A
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Feed Reverse-rotation Prevention Solenoid
E
7.
Switch off power and remove the rear cover. Open the SH PCB bracket. Remove the E-ring and dismount the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly. Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and dismount the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention assembly. (5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid.
RIS
OE
UR
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly
0446
0447
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid
>
[4-24]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Feed Clutch
E
8.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the rear cover. (2) Open the SH PCB bracket. (3) Remove the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly and the paper feed reverserotation prevention assembly. (4) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) and dismount the P.U. clutch bracket. (5) Unplug the connector and dismount the paper feed clutch.
0448
RIS
P.U. clutch bracket
0449 >
[4-25]
E
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
0450
UR
OP
Rotation stopper on paper feed clutch
Indentation on P.U. shaft
Projection on paper feed clutch
RIS
OE
Bent portion on P.U. clutch bracket
[4-26]
0452
0451
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Removing Remaining Paper Volume Sensors A and B
E
9.
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power, remove the rear cover, and open the SH PCB bracket. (2) Unplug the connector and dismount remaining paper volume sensors A and B from the paper feed relay PCB bracket.
OE
0453
Paper feed relay PCB bracket
RIS
Remaining paper volume sensor A
Remaining paper volume sensor B
0454
[4-27]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
E
10. Removing the Elevator Motor Remove the front cover. Remove the left front cover. (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs) Remove the elevator spring on the front side. Remove the mounting screw (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 1 pc) and disconnect the ground wire. Unplug the connector and remove the reusable band. Detach the E-ring, remove the mounting screw (RS tight, M4 x 8, 1 pc), and dismount the elevator motor unit. * When dismounting the elevator motor unit, grasp the paper feed tray to prevent the paper feed tray from rising abruptly. (7) Remove the mounting screw (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc) and dismount the elevator motor cover. (8) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 4 pcs) and dismount the motor cover. (9) Remove the helical/spur gears. (10) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 2 pcs), and dismount the elevator motor. Elevator spring
UR
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
0455
Ground wire
OE
Reusable band
Elevator motor cover
RIS
Elevator motor
Elevator motor unit
Motor cover
Helical/spur gears
0456
[4-28]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
E
11. Removing the Elevator Lower-limit Sensor and Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch (1) Raise the paper feed tray to the upper-limit position, then switch off power. (2) Remove the rear cover and open the SH PCB bracket.
OP
Removing the elevator lower-limit sensor
(3) Unplug the connector and dismount the elevator lower-limit sensor.
Removing the paper feed tray lower safety switch
OE
UR
(3) Remove the lower safety switch spring. (4) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screw (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 1 pc), and dismount the paper feed tray lower safety switch together with the bracket.
0457
RIS
Elevator lower-limit sensor
Lower safety switch spring
Bracket
0458
Paper feed tray lower safety switch
[4-29]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
E
12. Removing the Stripper Pad Unit
OP
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power. (2) Lower the lock knob and release the lock for the stripper pad unit. (3) Press the stripper pad release lever and dismount the stripper pad unit.
RIS
OE
UR
Lock knob
Stripper pad unit
0459
Stripper pad release lever
[4-30]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
E
13. Removing the Stripper Pad Assembly (1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, switch off power, and remove the stripper pad unit. (2) Manually lift and remove the stripper pad assembly.
OP
>
• Press the edge of the stripper pad (indicated by the arrows) against the section of the stripper pad base (indicated by the arrows) when attaching the stripper pad.
Stripper pad assembly
OE
UR
Stripper pad
Stripper pad base
0461
RIS
0460
Stripper pad cover
Stripper pad unit
Stripper pad Stripper pad base
0463
[4-31]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
1.
E
Adjustment Elevator Upper-limit Sensor Position Adjustment
Adjustment and adjustment procedures
OP
(1) Remove paper from the paper feed tray and set the paper feed pressure lever to the position. (2) Run Test Mode No. 681 (Paper feed tray maximum up positioning) to lift the paper feed tray. Bring to a full stop. (3) After the paper feed tray comes to a complete stop, confirm that the gap between the pickup roller and the paper feed tray ranges from 1.5 to 2.5 mm. (4) If the measured value falls outside this range, adjust by inserting a flat-head screwdriver through the opening in the paper feed cover and turning the upper-limit adjustment shaft to move the elevator upper-limit sensor assembly vertically.
Problems
UR
* Turning the upper-limit adjustment shaft clockwise lowers the elevator upper-limit sensor assembly and increases the gap. Setting the elevator upper-limit sensor position too high increases paper feed pressure and may result in multiple paper feeds. Setting the sensor position too low can reduce paper feed pressure until paper frequently fails to feed at all.
Paper feed pressure lever
Paper feed cover
0465
Pickup roller
0464
Elevator upper-limit sensor assembly
1.5 to 2.5 mm
RIS
OE
Upper-limit adjustment shaft
Paper feed tray
[4-32]
0466
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Stripper Pad Adjustment
E
2.
Adjustment procedure
1) When multiple paper feeds occur:
OP
(1) Switch the paper feed pressure lever position to suit the paper type and begin printing. (2) If a multiple paper feed or paper feed failure occurs, adjust the stripper pad angle or stripper pad pressure. • Turn the stripper pad angle adjuster clockwise to increase the stripper pad angle (toward vertical). • Turn the stripper pad pressure adjuster clockwise to increase stripper pad pressure.
2) When paper feed failures occur:
UR
• Turn the stripper pad angle adjuster counterclockwise to decrease the stripper pad angle (toward horizontal). • Turn the stripper pad pressure adjuster counterclockwise to reduce stripper pad pressure.
Raises stripper pad toward vertical position. Stripper pad angle adjuster
OE
Normal position
Increases stripper pad pressure.
RIS
Normal position
Stripper pad pressure adjuster
[4-33]
Decreases stripper pad angle.
Reduces stripper pad pressure.
0467
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle Adjustment
E
3.
Checks and adjustment procedures
OP
(1) Print and confirm that the paper feeds reliably and smoothly. (2) If the timing is off for the first paper feed, launch test mode for the paper feed clutch ON angle adjustment and adjust, based on the paper type selection setting entered by the user. (For setting procedures and related information, refer to the section on test modes.) (3) Repeat the steps from (1).
Problem
4.
UR
If first paper feed timing is off, paper jams or print position deviations may occur.
Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedures
Problem
OE
(1) Print and confirm that printing occurs smoothly. (2) If the paper slack is excessive or inadequate and results in unsatisfactory printing results, launch test mode for the paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment and make adjustments based on the paper type selection setting entered by the user. (For setting procedures and related information, refer to the section on test modes.) (3) Repeat the steps from (1).
RIS
If the paper slack is excessive or inadequate, paper will not transfer to the second paper feed section, resulting in paper jams.
[4-34]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment
E
5.
Checks and adjustment procedures
OP
(1) Set the paper guide width to 105 mm and run Test Mode No. 1102 (Paper size VR adjustment). (2) Set the paper guide width to 297 mm and run Test Mode No. 1103 (Paper size VR adjustment). (3) Set the paper guide width to 105 mm, run Test Mode No. 721 (Paper width potentiometer data), and confirm that the display indicates a value between 1020 and 1080 (1050±30). (4) While running Test Mode 721 (Paper width potentiometer data), set the paper guide width to 297 mm and confirm that the display indicates a value between 2940 and 3000 (2970±30). * When setting the paper guide width, slide the paper guides from the outer position toward the center.
Problem
RIS
OE
UR
The size of the paper in the paper feed tray is not correctly identified, resulting in reduced or increased print areas. An excessive print area can result in ink contamination of the rollers.
[4-35]
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
[4-36]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 5-2 1. 2. 3. 4.
Second Paper Feed Mechanism ............................................................................................... 5-2 Guide Roller Vertical Operation Mechanism ............................................................................. 5-3 Vertical Print Position Control Mechanism ................................................................................ 5-4 Multiple Paper Feed Detection Mechanism .............................................................................. 5-5
Removing the Registration Sensor (Light Receiver) ................................................................. 5-6 Removing the Guide Roller ....................................................................................................... 5-7 Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Emitter) ............................................................................. 5-8 Removing the Timing Roller ...................................................................................................... 5-9 Removing the Paper Guide Plate (Upper) .............................................................................. 5-13 Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Receiver) ......................................................................... 5-15 Removing the Paper Guide Plate Assembly ........................................................................... 5-16 Removing the Registration Sensor (Light Emitter) .................................................................. 5-18 Removing the Guide Roller Release Home Position Sensor .................................................. 5-19 Removing the Guide Roller Release Motor ............................................................................. 5-20
OE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
UR
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 5-6
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 5-22 Guide Roller Release Plate B Installation Position Adjustment ............................................... 5-22 Paper Feed Skew Adjustment ................................................................................................. 5-23 Print Start Position Adjustment ................................................................................................ 5-24 Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment ............................................................................ 5-24 Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment ............................................................................. 5-24
RIS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
[5-1]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
1.
E
Mechanism Second Paper Feed Mechanism
UR
OP
During printing, at the end of the first paper feed operation, the second paper feed motor switches ON at the preset timing, rotating the timing roller and feeding the paper to the print drum. The registration sensor is located between the timing roller and the print drum. The registration sensor detects the leading edge of the paper sheet and controls the second paper feed motor to ensure constant timing of the arrival of the paper leading edge at the print drum. The second paper feed motor rotates at the same speed as the print drum circumferential speed. When the paper sensor switches OFF, the motor stops after rotating for a distance of 26.5 mm. The paper sensor also checks the proper transfer of paper.
Guide roller
OE
Registration sensor (receive) Paper sensor
Timing roller
RIS
Registration sensor (send)
0501
Second paper feed motor
[5-2]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
2.
Guide Roller Vertical Operation Mechanism
OP
E
At the start of a print job, the guide roller release motor switches ON, rotating the guide roller release cam to the nipping position. When the guide roller release cam rotates, the guide roller release plate assembly at the release position is turned counterclockwise by the force of the guide roller pressure spring, pressing the guide roller integrated with the guide roller release plate assembly against the timing roller. During printing, the guide roller is constantly pressed against the timing roller by the guide roller pressure spring. Thus, the guide roller rotates together with the timing roller. When the printing operation stops, the guide roller release motor switches ON, rotating the guide roller release cam to the release position. The guide roller release cam causes the guide roller release plate assembly to rotate clockwise, moving the guide roller away from the timing roller.
0502
Guide roller
UR
Guide roller release motor
Guide roller release home position sensor
Timing roller
OE
Guide roller release cam
Guide roller release plate assembly
Guide roller pressure spring
RIS
>
>
[5-3]
0503
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Vertical Print Position Control Mechanism
E
3.
OP
The second paper feed motor ON timing is used to adjust the vertical position of the first print drum in single-color printing (with the first print drum) or in dual-color printing. The second paper feed motor ON timing is also used to adjust the vertical position of the second print drum for single-color printing using just the second print drum, when no first print drum is installed in the main unit. > key or < > key for vertical print position adjustment changes the second feed Pressing the < motor ON timing, altering the timing of paper fed to the print drum and thereby changing the vertical print position.
(A)
Single-color printing with first print drum
(A)
(A)
OE
Single-color printing with second print drum
(B)
UR
Dual-color printing
0504
RIS
The vertical print position for print drum (A) is controlled by the second paper feed motor ON timing. The vertical print position for print drum (B) depends on changes in phase relative to the first print drum.
0505
Second paper feed motor
[5-4]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Multiple Paper Feed Detection Mechanism
E
4.
UR
OP
Multiple paper feeds are detected by the paper sensor, which assesses the intensity of light transmitted through paper to identify multiple paper feeds. The light intensity is sampled for a set number of times at set intervals, starting from the print drum angle position of 2.5° from the paper leading edge, producing an average value. This average value is then compared against the value measured with the first sheet of paper printed. If the value differs by 20% or more, a multiple paper feed is identified.
RIS
OE
Paper sensor
[5-5]
0506
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
1.
E
Disassembly Removing the Registration Sensor (Receive)
OP
(1) Remove the first print drum, then switch off power. (2) Remove the mounting screw (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc), then remove the registration sensor retaining plate. (3) Unplug the connector and dismount the registration sensor (receive).
RIS
OE
UR
Registration sensor retaining plate
0507
Registration sensor (receive)
Connector
0508
[5-6]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Removing the Guide Roller
E
2.
OP
(1) Remove the first print drum and switch off power. (2) Remove the registration sensor retaining plate and move the registration sensor (receive) out of the way. (3) Remove the stopper plate and bearing metal on the front side, then remove the guide roller. Registration sensor (receive)
Registration sensor retaining plate
RIS
OE
UR
Guide roller
0509
Stopper plate
Bearing metal
0510
[5-7]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
(1) (2) (3) (4)
E
Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Emitter) Lower the paper feed tray and switch off power. Remove the stripper pad unit. Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), then remove the stripper pad rear cover. Loosen the screws, unplug the connector, and dismount the paper sensor (light emitter) together with the multiple paper feed sensor bracket.
OP
3.
UR
Stripper pad rear cover
0511
OE
0512
RIS
Multiple paper feed sensor bracket
Paper sensor (light emitter)
Multiple paper feed sensor bracket
0513 Connector
0514
[5-8]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
(1) (2) (3) (4)
E
Removing the Timing Roller Remove the first print drum and switch off power. Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the SH PCB bracket. Dismount the paper sensor (light emitter). Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes of the main cover, pressure cam, and rear plate on the first print drum side.
OP
4.
> When removing main drive gears A and B, you must perform step (4); to prevent sudden rotation of the gears and resulting injury.
Alignment hole
RIS
OE
UR
Jig
0515
[5-9]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
OP
E
(5) Remove the main motor bearing. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) (6) Remove the T-roller bearing plate. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) (7) Remove the power supply bracket. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 1 pc) (8) Remove the main drive transmission cover. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 5 pcs) (9) Remove the C-ring and dismount main drive gear A. (10) Remove the main drive transmission gear bracket with main drive gear B attached. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs)
OE
Main motor bearing
UR
T-roller bearing plate
Power supply bracket Main drive gear B
RIS
Main drive transmission cover
0516
0517 Main drive gear A
C-ring
0518 Main drive transmission gear bracket
[5-10]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Second idler spring
Second idler assembly
0519
RIS
OE
Second paper feed drive belt
UR
OP
E
(11) Remove the second idler spring, loosen the two mounting screws, slide the second idler assembly, then loosen the tension of the second paper feed drive belt and remove the second paper feed drive belt. (12) Remove the E-ring and bearing on the front side.
0520 E-ring
Bearing
[5-11]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
OP
E
(13) Remove the T-roller bracket mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), and pull the timing roller toward the front through the larger end of the keyhole-shaped opening in the rear plate.
UR
Keyhole-shaped opening
0521
RIS
OE
T-roller bracket
0522 Timing roller
0523
>
[5-12]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Guide Plate (Upper)
E
5.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Remove the first print drum and switch off power. (2) Remove the following parts: • Guide roller • Paper feed cover • P.U. extension shaft assembly • Paper feed roller assembly • First paper feed stay assembly (3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), then remove the G-roller cover. (4) Unplug the connector.
RIS
G-roller cover
0524
Connector
0525
[5-13]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
UR
OP
E
(5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 8, 1 each) on the front and rear sides, and plate guide plate (upper) toward the paper feed tray side and remove.
0527
Mounting screw
0526
RIS
OE
Mounting screw
0528
>
[5-14]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Receiver)
E
6.
UR
OP
(1) Remove the paper guide plate (upper). (2) Remove the multiple feed sensor shield. (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc) (3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and dismount the paper sensor (light receiver).
0529
OE
>
0530
RIS
Multiple feed sensor shield
0531 Paper sensor (light receiver)
[5-15]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Removing the Paper Guide Plate Assembly
E
7.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Remove the first print drum and switch off power. (2) Remove the following parts: • Guide roller • Paper feed cover • P.U. extension shaft assembly • Paper feed roller assembly • First paper feed stay assembly • Paper feed tray unit • Timing roller
0532
RIS
E-reinforcement plate
0533 Retaining screw Retaining screw
0535 0534
[5-16]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
OP
E
(3) Remove the E-reinforcement plate. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs). (4) Loosen the retaining screws (with double-washer, cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 10, 2 pcs) on the print drum side until they extend out to about half their length. (5) Unplug the connectors (2 locations). (6) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs) in the paper feed tray side and dismount the paper guide plate assembly.
0536
RIS
OE
UR
Connectors
0537 Paper guide plate assembly
[5-17]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Removing the Registration Sensor (Send)
E
8.
0539
Registration sensor (send)
0540 Connector
[5-18]
0538
Registration sensor retaining plate
RIS
OE
UR
OP
(1) Remove the paper guide plate assembly. (2) Remove the mounting screw (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc), then remove the registration sensor retaining plate. (3) Unplug the connector and dismount the registration sensor (send).
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Removing the Guide Roller Release Home Position Sensor
E
9.
OE
0541
Guide roller release home position sensor
UR
Connector
OP
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left), and open the SH PCB bracket. (2) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and dismount the guide roller release home position sensor together with the bracket.
RIS
Bracket
0542
[5-19]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left), and open the SH PCB bracket. Remove the guide roller pressure spring. Unplug the connector at the upper right corner. Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), then remove the guide roller release cover.
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
E
10. Removing the Guide Roller Release Motor
OE
UR
Connector
0544
Guide roller release cover
RIS
0543
0545 Guide roller pressure spring
[5-20]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
OE
UR
OP
E
(5) Remove the guide roller release cam. (6) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and dismount the guide roller release unit. (7) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and dismount the guide roller release motor.
Connector
RIS
Guide roller release cam
Guide roller release motor
0547
>
[5-21]
0546
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
1.
E
Adjustment Guide Roller Release Plate B Installation Position Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedures
OE
Guide roller release base plate
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left), and open the SH PCB bracket. (2) Run Test Mode No. 702 (Guide Roller Release Motor) and shift the phase of the guide roller release cam. Switch off power. (3) Remove the guide roller release cover and dismount the guide roller release cam. (4) Install the guide roller release cam by positioning the alignment mark (3-mm-diameter boss on the rib) on the guide roller release cam toward the cut-out section (this mark is located at 9 o’clock) on the leading edge of the guide roller release base plate. (5) Confirm that the gap between the guide roller release plate B and the guide roller release cam is 2±1 mm. (6) If the gap fails to meet this standard, loosen the two mounting screws on the guide roller release plate B and make the appropriate adjustments.
RIS
Alignment mark (3-mmdiameter boss) located at 9 o’clock
Guide roller release cam
2 mm ± 1 mm
0548 Guide roller release plate B
Problems
• If the gap is excessive, you may not be able to remove the jammed paper in the event of a paper jam. • If the gap is too narrow, paper feed failure or print registration problem may occur.
[5-22]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Paper Feed Skew Adjustment
E
2.
UR
OP
Checks and adjustment procedures (1) Load A3-size paper in the paper feed tray, run Test Mode No. 81 (Test Print B (Crossed Lines)), and print. (2) Measure the distance from the left edge of the paper to the intersection of the leftmost vertical and topmost horizontal lines. (A in the diagram below) (3) Measure the distance from the left edge of the paper to the intersection of the leftmost vertical and bottommost horizontal lines. (B in the diagram below) (4) Measure the distance between the intersections described in the above steps (2) and (3) (C in the diagram below). (5) Confirm that (A - B)/C x 100 is less than 0.5%. (6) If the skew exceeds this standard value, move the timing roller adjusting plate and guide roller adjusting plate on the front side in the same direction and by the same amount. * Moving the adjusting plates one increment mark on the scale will change the paper skew by 0.25%. Moving the plates toward the stamped F mark will shift the bottom of the printed image on the sheet to the front side while moving the plates toward the R mark will shift the bottom of the printed image to the rear.
A
RIS
C
OE
Top of the printed image
B
0549
Bottom of the printed image
[5-23]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Print Start Position Adjustment
E
3.
Checks and adjustment procedures
OP
(1) Run Test Mode No. 80 (Test Print A (Checkered)). (2) Measure the distance from the leading edge of the paper to the top of the printed image and confirm that the measured value is 4±1 mm. (3) If the measurement falls outside the standard range, run Test Mode No. 971 (Vertical HP Paper Feed Timing Adj) and make necessary adjustments. * When checking the second print drum side, be sure to remove the first print drum. * Increasing the setting will move the printed image toward the top. Setting increments: 1 (0.1 mm)
Checks and adjustment procedures for second print drum relative to first print drum position
Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment (1) (2) (3) (4)
5.
Pull out the first print drum. Manually feed thin RISO paper into the multiple paper feed sensor light path. Run Test Mode No. 705 (Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment). Start Test Mode No. 722 (Multiple Paper Feed Sensor) and confirm that the panel displays a value between 484 and 508 (496±12).
OE
4.
UR
(1) Run Test Mode No. 80 (Test Print A (Checkered), then perform printing by both the print drums (Speed 3). (2) On the fifth sheet printed by the second print drum, confirm that the position of the first line at the paper leading edge does not deviate more than 2 mm from the line on the printed image made with the first print drum. (3) If the measurement falls outside the standard range, run Test Mode No. 969 (Vertical Print HP Position Adj) and make necessary adjustments. * Increasing the setting moves the printed image toward the top. Setting increments: 1 (0.1 mm)
Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment
RIS
(1) Pull out the first print drum. (2) Manually feed thin RISO paper into the registration sensor light path. (3) Run Test Mode No. 709 (Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment).
[5-24]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 6-2 1. 2.
Pressure Mechanism ................................................................................................................ 6-2 Pressure Control Mechanism .................................................................................................... 6-4
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 6-5 Removing the Pressure Roller .................................................................................................. 6-6 Removing the Print Pressure Control Sensor ........................................................................... 6-7 Removing the Pressure Control Pulse Motor ............................................................................ 6-8 Removing the Pressure Solenoid ............................................................................................ 6-10 Removing the Pressure Lever ................................................................................................ 6-11
UR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 6-12 Pressure Lever Assembly Installation Position Adjustment ..................................................... 6-12
RIS
OE
1.
[6-1]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
1.
E
Mechanism Pressure Mechanism
UR
OP
The main motor switches ON at the start of a print job, and the pressure solenoid switches ON when the print drum rotates to a specified angle. When the clamp plate base of the print drum approaches the pressure roller, the lobe of the pressure cam pushes the pressure cam follower assembly and turns it clockwise. This rotation causes the pressure cam follower assembly to push against the pressure lever assembly, causing the solenoid lever to disengage from the pressure lever assembly and descend. When the lobe of the pressure cam passes, the pressure cam follower assembly rotates counterclockwise. Because the pressure lever assembly is pulled by the pressure spring and rotates together with the pressure cam follower assembly, the pressure shaft installed in the pressure lever assembly also rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the pressure roller rises and presses against the print drum. During printing, the pressure cam pushes the pressure cam follower assembly to lower the pressure roller, keeping the pressure roller from contacting the print drum clamp plate base. The pressure solenoid remains ON. After printing ends, the pressure solenoid turns OFF when the print drum reaches a specified angle.
Print drum
Clamp plate base
OE
Pressure cam
Pressure lever assembly
Pressure cam follower assembly Pressure roller
RIS
Pressure spring
Pressure shaft Solenoid lever Pressure solenoid
[6-2]
0601
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
E
Pressure roller in raised position
Print drum
OP
Pressure cam
UR
Pressure lever assembly
0602
Pressure roller
Pressure cam follower assembly
OE
Pressure shaft
RIS
Pressure roller in lowered position
Print drum
Clamp plate base
0603
[6-3]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Pressure Control Mechanism
E
2.
OP
Pressing the < > or < > key for print density switches ON the pressure control pulse motor and moves the pressure control plate. The movement of the pressure control plate varies the tension of the pressure spring. Since this changes the force applied to the pressure lever assembly, the force of the pressure roller applied to the print drum also changes, altering print density. However, during actual operations, the pressure control pulse motor switches ON only after the Start key is pressed. Pressure also varies with printing speed and print density settings, ink color, time since the print drums last operated, and the print drum internal temperature. The print pressure control sensor checks the standard pressure control position.
Pressure lever assembly
RIS
OE
UR
Pressure spring
Pressure control plate
0604
Print pressure control sensor
[6-4]
Pressure control pulse motor
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
OP
E
Disassembly
PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN DRIVE SECTION AND PRESSURE SECTION
RIS
OE
UR
Following removal of the main cover, the pressure springs must be removed before disassembly of the main drive or pressure sections. Failure to remove the pressure springs may result in sudden rotation of gears or cams from the force of the springs, resulting in injury. To prevent accidents, always remove the pressure springs (on both first print drum side and second print drum side) at the start of disassembly. Reattach the pressure springs (first print drum side and second print drum side) only at the end of reassembly.
[6-5]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Removing the Pressure Roller
E
1.
Pressure roller
Bearing
Roller adjustment plate
RIS
OE
UR
Shoulder screw
OP
(1) Pull out the print drums and switch off power. (2) Insert a screwdriver into the hole in the horizontal sliding unit and side plate on the front side and remove the shoulder screw. (3) Pull the pressure roller forward until the pressure roller bearing disengages from the roller adjustment plate, then lift and remove the roller.
Hole in the horizontal sliding unit and side plate
[6-6]
0605
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Removing the Print Pressure Control Sensor
E
2.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right), and open the power supply/ system PCB bracket. (2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screw (RS tight with round tip, M3 x 6, 1 pc), and dismount the print pressure control sensor together with the bracket.
0606
RIS
Print pressure control sensor
0607
[6-7]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Removing the Pressure Control Pulse Motor
E
3.
(1) Remove the pressure springs. * Refer to in . (2) Launch test mode.
OP
> (3) Run Test Mode No. 904 (Print-pressure home positioning) for the first print drum side and switch off power. > (3) Run Test Mode No. 904 (Print-pressure home positioning) for the second print drum side and switch off power.
UR
> (4) Unplug the connector for the print pressure control sensor and the connector for the pressure control pulse motor. (5) Unplug the connectors from both sides of the relay connector mounted on the panel and remove the reusable band. (6) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and dismount the pressure control unit. (7) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the pressure control pulse motor.
RIS
OE
Pressure spring
0608
[6-8]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Relay connector
E
Reusable band
UR
OP
Pressure control unit
0609
Connector for pressure control pulse motor
RIS
OE
Connector for Print pressure control sensor
Pressure control pulse motor
0610
>
[6-9]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Removing the Pressure Solenoid
E
4.
OP
(1) Remove the pressure springs. * Refer to in . (2) Remove the separation spring. (3) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and dismount the pressure solenoid assembly. (4) Remove the solenoid spring. (5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the pressure solenoid.
OE
UR
Separation spring
0612 Connector
0611
RIS
>
0613 Pressure solenoid
[6-10]
Solenoid spring
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
E
Removing the Pressure Lever Remove the pressure springs. (Refer to the section on the main drive section.) Move the print drum on the side where the pressure lever is to be removed to position-B. Remove the main cover. (Refer to the section on the main drive section.) Loosen the mounting screws (cap screw, M6 x 10, 2 pcs) and dismount the pressure lever assembly. Remove the pressure lever spring and dismount the pressure cam follower assembly.
>
OP
5.
• Be sure to adjust the pressure lever installation position.
RIS
OE
UR
Pressure lever assembly
0614 Pressure cam follower assembly
Pressure lever spring
[6-11]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
1.
E
Adjustment Pressure Lever Assembly Installation Position Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedures
Pressure cam
Pressure cam follower assembly
Bearing
RIS
OE
UR
Pressure lever assembly
OP
(1) Remove the main cover assembly. (Refer to the section on the main drive section.) (2) Hook the pressure spring onto the pressure lever assembly. (3) Release the solenoid lever lock and allow the pressure roller to contact the print drum under the force applied by the pressure spring. (4) With the bearing of the pressure lever assembly resting on the low section on the pressure cam, confirm that the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is located between the two stamped lines on the pressure cam follower assembly.
Pressure spring
0615
Solenoid lever
Pressure lever assembly
Pressure cam follower assembly
0616
[6-12]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
Pressure lever assembly
RIS
OE
UR
8-mm-diameter jig
OP
E
(5) If the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is not at the position specified in step (4), disengage the pressure spring and loosen the two cap screws on the pressure lever assembly. (6) Align the positioning hole on the pressure lever assembly with the positioning hole on the sub-frame and insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the holes. (7) Insert the 4-mm-diameter jig or 4-mm hex wrench into the hole in the pressure shaft and turn in the direction indicated by the arrow. With the pressure roller lightly contacting the print drum, tighten the two cap screws on the pressure lever assembly. (8) Perform the checks described in steps (2) through (4). If the criteria are not met, repeat steps (5) through (7).
4-mm-jig or 4-mm hex wrench
0617 Pressure shaft
Problems
• If the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is shifted to the left, pressure will weaken, potentially resulting in low print density. Since this shift also causes the timing of the pressure roller vertical movement to deviate, ink leaks may occur. • If the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is shifted to the right, the amount of movement of the pressure roller from the clamp plate base will drop. This may cause the pressure roller to contact and damage the clamp plate base. Since this shift also causes the timing of the pressure roller vertical movement to deviate, ink leaks may occur.
[6-13]
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
[6-14]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 7-2 1. 2. 3. 4.
Copy Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print Drum Side) ...................... 7-2 Separator Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print Drum Side) ........................................... 7-3 Center Transport Mechanism .................................................................................................... 7-4 Central Flap Mechanism ........................................................................................................... 7-5
Removing the Central Transport Unit ........................................................................................ 7-6 Removing the Central Suction Fan ........................................................................................... 7-8 Removing the Central Flap Motor Assembly ............................................................................. 7-9 Removing the Central Transport Sensor ................................................................................. 7-10 Removing the Central Transfer Belts ...................................................................................... 7-11 Removing the First Separation Fans ....................................................................................... 7-13 Removing the Separator (Same for First and Second Print Drum Sides) ............................... 7-14 Removing the First Separator Lever ....................................................................................... 7-15 Removing the First Separation Pump Assembly ..................................................................... 7-16 Removing the Separation Pump Solenoid .............................................................................. 7-18 Removing the Separator Pump O-ring, Piston, and Cylinder .................................................. 7-19
OE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
UR
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 7-6
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 7-22 Separator Position Adjustment ................................................................................................ 7-22
RIS
1.
[7-1]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Copy Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print Drum Side)
OP
1.
E
Mechanism
RIS
OE
Duct
UR
When the first print drum is used for printing, the first separation pump solenoid switches ON at the start of a print job and closes the pressure control valve to allow air to escape from the separator. The first separation fan also switches ON. The first separation pump solenoid and the first separation fan remain ON during printing, switching OFF when the print job is completed. The printed paper is separated from the print drum by the separator. Air is ejected from the separator directed from the separation fan through the duct and out from the nozzle.
Separator
First separation pump solenoid Pressure control valve
First separation fan
[7-2]
0701
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Separator Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print Drum Side)
E
2.
OP
When paper is separated from the print drum, the separator is positioned close to the print drum. However, as the print drum rotates and the clamp plate base of the print drum approaches the separator, the cam on the back side of the drive gear pushes the separator lever assembly, turning the separation shaft and moving the separator away from the print drum. Pulling out the print drum causes the release arm attached to the slide rail to push the release lever, turning the separation shaft and moving the separator away from the print drum.
UR
Drive gear
Separator lever assembly
Separator lowers.
Separator rises.
OE
Separator
0703
0702
Print drum
RIS
Slide rail Release arm
Release lever Separator
[7-3]
Separation shaft
0704
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Center Transport Mechanism
E
3.
Central transport sensor
OP
Copy paper separated from the first print drum by the separator and the separation fan is sent to the second print drum by the rotating central transfer belts when printing is to be performed by the second print drum (in which case the central flap is raised). If no printing is performed by the second print drum, the paper is sent to the paper ejection section. While the main motor operates, the central transfer belts rotate continuously. The central suction fan is located under the central transfer belts and helps the paper adhere to the central transfer belts. The central transport sensor confirms proper paper transport.
Copy paper transport direction
Central flap
OE
UR
Separator
Central transfer belt
RIS
Central suction fan
Separation fan
[7-4]
0705
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Central Flap Mechanism
E
4.
The central flap rises when the second print drum prints. If the second print drum is not used, the central flap descends.
>
>
OP
The central flap motor switches ON and rotates the main cam gear. The cam on the main cam gear rotates the flap lever toward the front side. The flap lever slides the flap rack toward the front side. The two flap cam gears engaging with the flap rack rotate and lift the central flap. The central flap motor stops when the central flap home position sensor changes from ON to OFF.
RIS
OE
UR
The central flap motor switches ON and rotates the main cam gear. At the low section of the main cam gear, the flap lever is turned toward the rear side by the force of the flap spring. The flap lever slides the flap rack toward the rear side. The two flap cam gears engaging with the flap rack rotate and lower the central flap. The central flap motor stops when the central flap home position sensor switches from OFF to ON.
[7-5]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the Central Transport Unit (1) (2) (3) (4)
Pull out both the first and second print drums and switch off power. Remove the pressure roller from the second print drum side. Remove the two mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and detach the suction plate (center). Push the coupling of the main unit side toward the back until it clicks and locks into position and the connection disengages.
0706
RIS
OE
UR
Suction plate (center)
OP
1.
E
Disassembly
Coupling
0707 0708
[7-6]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
OP
E
(5) Unplug the connector and remove the reusable band. (6) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 8, 2 pcs) and dismount the central transport unit from the second drum side next to the side plate by lifting it at an angle toward the paper ejection side.
Central transport unit
UR
Reusable band
Connector
OE
0709
0710
>
RIS
• Push the central transport unit toward the rear side to install. • Pull the connection release lever toward the front to unlock the coupling of the main unit side, then connect the coupling of the main unit side to the coupling of the central transport unit. • Press the suction plate (center) against the central transport plate to attach.
Coupling of main unit side
Coupling of central transport unit
Connection release lever
0711
[7-7]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the Central Suction Fan
E
2.
OP
(1) Pull out both the first and second print drums, switch off power, and remove the central transport unit. (2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 40, 3 pcs), unplug the connector, and dismount the central suction fan.
RIS
OE
UR
Central suction fan
0712
0713
>
[7-8]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the Central Flap Motor Assembly
E
3.
>
OP
(1) Pull out both the first and second print drums, switch off power, and remove the central transport unit. (2) Dismount the central suction fan. (3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), unplug the connector for the central flap motor and the connector for the central flap home position sensor, remove the reusable band, and dismount the central flap motor assembly. • After installing the central flap motor assembly, confirm that the central flap is not in a raised position.
Connector for central flap motor
Reusable band
OE
UR
Reusable band
Connector for central flap home position sensor
0714
Central flap home position sensor
RIS
Central flap motor
0715
>
[7-9]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the Central Transport Sensor
E
4.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Pull out both the first and second print drums, switch off power, and remove the central transport unit. (2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 8, 2 pcs) and slide the central transport plate toward the rear side to remove. (3) Remove the mounting screw (bind, M3 x 8, 1 pc), unplug the connector, and dismount the central transport sensor.
RIS
Central transport plate
0716
>
Connector
Central transport sensor
0717
0718
[7-10]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the Central Transfer Belts
E
5.
RIS
OE
UR
OP
(1) Pull out both the first and second print drums, switch off power, and remove the central transport unit. (2) Remove the central transport plate. (3) Remove the shoulder screws (one each) from the front and rear sides and dismount the central flap.
Central flap
0719
0720 Shoulder screw
[7-11]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
UR
OP
E
(4) Disengage the driven shaft assembly from the hook section of the transport base and remove. (5) Remove the stopper plate and bearing from the front side of the drive shaft assembly, slide the drive shaft assembly toward the rear side, and remove the central transfer belts.
Transport base
OE
Driven shaft assembly
0721
Bearing
Stopper plate
Drive shaft assembly
0722
RIS
Central transfer belt
0723
[7-12]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the First Separation Fans
E
6.
OE
UR
First separation fan
OP
(1) Pull out both the first and second print drums, switch off power, and remove the central transport unit. (2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 40, 3 pcs each), unplug the connector, and dismount the two first separation fans. * Remove the rear-side separation fan together with the fan cover.
0724
RIS
First separation fan
>
• When installing the separation fans, insert the air outlet for each separation fan into the opening of the duct assembly before securing the fan into position.
[7-13]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the Separator (Same for First and Second Print Drum Sides)
E
7.
Air hose
RIS
OE
UR
Separator
OP
(1) Pull out the print drum on the side from which the separator is to be removed. Switch off power. (2) Move the power band out of the way and disconnect the air hose from the separator. (3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 8, 2 pcs) and dismount the separator.
0725
Power band
>
• Install the power band so that the grips are positioned on the front side and angled upward, as shown in the photo.
[7-14]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the First Separator Lever
E
8.
RIS
OE
UR
Separator lever
OP
(1) Remove the vertical print position main unit. (See the section on the main drive unit.) (2) Remove the mounting screw (double-washer cap screw, M3 x 10, 1 pc), and dismount the separator lever.
Pressure lever assembly
[7-15]
0726
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the First Separation Pump Assembly
E
9.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right), and open the power supply/ system PCB bracket and the SH PCB bracket. (2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), and move the power band out of the way. Disconnect the air hose from the cylinder and dismount the first separation pump assembly.
0727
RIS
Connector
Air hose
0728 Cylinder
[7-16]
Power band
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
>
Side plate
Pump base
Timing plate
Separation pump gear
RIS
OE
UR
First print drum drive gear
OP
E
Be sure to align phases between the first print drum drive gear and the separation pump gear. (1) Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes in the main cover, first pressure cam, and side plate. (2) Make sure that the hole in the timing plate with the mark is positioned at the location shown in the photo and that the 4-mm-diameter jig can be inserted through the hole in the main cover into the phase alignment holes of the timing plate and pump base when engaging the gear teeth during installation.
Main cover 8-mm-diameter jig
Phase alignment hole
[7-17]
0729
4-mm-diameter jig
Phase alignment hole
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
E
10. Removing the Separation Pump Solenoid
OP
(1) Remove the separation pump assembly. (2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the separation pump solenoid.
OE
UR
Separation pump solenoid
RIS
>
[7-18]
0730
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
E
11. Removing the Separator Pump O-ring, Piston, and Cylinder
OP
(1) Remove the separation pump assembly. (2) Remove the E-ring and pull out the arm from the shaft in the timing plate assembly. (3) Turn the piston assembly 90°, pull out to a location near the cylinder opening, and move the arm out of the way. (4) Remove the E-ring and dismount the separation pump gear assembly. (5) Pull the piston assembly from the cylinder.
OE
UR
Shaft in timing plate assembly
Arm
RIS
E-ring
Concave side of rib on arm
0731 Cylinder
0732 >
> • When installing the piston assembly into the cylinder, make sure that the concave side of the rib on the arm is positioned toward the front side.
[7-19]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the O-ring (6) Remove the O-ring from the piston assembly.
OP
E
Piston assembly
Removing the piston
0733
UR
O-ring
(6) Detach the E-ring, pull out the arm shaft and remove the piston.
OE
Piston
Arm
Arm shaft
0734
>
RIS
• Apply grease during installation. • Make sure that the concave side (side on which bearing metal and bearing are installed) of the rib on the arm faces the suction hole side of the piston.
Concave side of rib on arm
Suction hole in piston
0735 Piston
[7-20]
Arm
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
Removing the cylinder
OE
UR
OP
E
(6) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 4 pcs) and dismount the cylinder. * Since the control valve and spring come loose at the same time, be careful to avoid losing them.
0736
RIS
Cylinder
0737 Control valve
[7-21]
Spring
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
1.
E
Adjustment Separator Position Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedures
OP
* To adjust the separator on the first print drum side, first pull out the second print drum first. * Set the separator to position B for checks and adjustments.
UR
(1) Pull the print drum from the side to be checked and adjusted, remove the front frame cover, and reinstall the print drum in the main unit. Switch off power. (2) Look through the hole in the print drum front frame and confirm that the gap between the print drum and the separator tip is 1 mm ± 0.5 mm. (3) If the gap deviates from the standard value, remove the mounting screw (bind, M4 x 8, 1 pc), detach the cover (separator adjustment) from the side to be adjusted, and loosen the stopper retaining screw. (4) While looking through the hole in the print drum front frame, adjust the gap between the print drum and the separator tip to the standard value, then tighten the stopper retaining screw.
Print drum
OE
Separator
0738
RIS
Cover (separation adjustment)
0739
[7-22]
UR
OP
E
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
0740
RIS
OE
Stopper
0741
Problems
• Contact between the tip of the separator and the print drum surface will scratch the surface of the master, resulting in a black streak at the center of printed pages. • If the tip of the separator is too far from the print drum surface, the separator will fail to separate the paper from the print drum, resulting in paper jams on the print drum.
[7-23]
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
[7-24]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 8-2 1. 2. 3. 4.
Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum Side) .................................... 8-2 Separator Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum Side) ................................................ 8-3 Paper Transport Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 8-4 Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism .............................................................................................. 8-5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
UR
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 8-7 Removing the Paper Receiving Tray ......................................................................................... 8-7 Removing the Suction Unit ........................................................................................................ 8-8 Removing the Second Separation Fans ................................................................................... 8-9 Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Paper Ejection Motor FG Sensor ............................ 8-10 Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Home Position Sensor .................................................... 8-12 Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor .................................................................... 8-13 Removing the Paper Ejection Sensor and Transfer Belts ....................................................... 8-14 Removing the Second Separation Pump Assembly ................................................................ 8-17
Adjusting the Suction Plate (Paper Ejection)........................................................................... 8-19
RIS
1.
OE
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 8-19
[8-1]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum Side)
OP
1.
E
Mechanism
UR
When the second print drum is used for printing, the second separation pump solenoid switches ON at the start of a print job and closes the pressure control valve to allow air to escape from the separator. The second separation fan also switches ON. The second separation pump solenoid and the second separation fan remain ON during printing, turning OFF when the print job is completed. The printed paper is separated from the print drum by the separator. Air is ejected from the separator directed from the separation fan through the duct and out from the nozzle.
Separator
OE
Pressure control valve
RIS
Second separation pump solenoid
Duct
[8-2]
0801
Second separation fan
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Separator Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum Side)
E
2.
OP
When paper is separated from the print drum, the separator is positioned close to the print drum. However, as the print drum rotates and the clamp plate base of the print drum approaches the separator, the cam on the back side of the drive gear pushes the separator lever assembly, turning the separation shaft and moving the separator away from the print drum. Pulling out the print drum causes the release arm attached to the slide rail to push the release lever, turning the separation shaft and moving the separator away from the print drum.
UR
Drive gear
Separator lever assembly
Separator lowers.
Separator rises.
OE
Separator
0803
0802
Print drum
RIS
Slide rail Release arm
Release lever Separator
[8-3]
Separation shaft
0804
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Paper Transport Mechanism
E
3.
Paper ejection sensor
OP
Paper separated from the print drum by the separator and the separation fan is transported to the paper receiving tray by the rotation of the transfer belts. The transfer belts rotate when the paper ejection motor switches ON. The suction fan located under the transfer belts helps the paper adhere to the transfer belts. The paper ejection sensor confirms proper paper transport. The paper ejection motor FG sensor and the encoder sensor disc check the paper ejection motor speed to ensure that the transfer belt speed exceeds the peripheral speed of the print drum at each drum rotation speed. This ensures smooth ejection of paper from the print drum.
Copy paper transport direction
OE
UR
Separator
RIS
Transfer belt
Suction fan
Separation fan
[8-4]
Paper ejection motor
Encoder sensor disc
0805
Paper ejection motor FG sensor
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism
E
4.
S wing
S wing
M wing
OE
M wing
UR
OP
The paper ejection wings on the left and right sides of the paper ejection unit are set to the positions appropriate for the type of copy paper used. The paper ejection wing position settings are set by the rotation of the MW cam and SW cam driven by the paper ejection wind pulse motor. The MW cam moves the connection plate (M) along the vertical axis, lifting or lowering the M wings on the left and right sides. The SW cam moves the connection plate (S) along the vertical axis, lifting or lowering the S wings on the left and right sides. The paper ejection wing home position sensor checks the home positions of the paper ejection wings. There are four paper ejection wing positions ((1) to (4)). The correct position is set according to paper size (paper width only) and the paper feed pressure lever (normal/card) setting. The position setting is not affected by the custom paper setting or other settings.
RIS
MW cam
Connection plate (M)
SW cam
0806 Paper ejection wing pulse-motor
Connection plate (S)
[8-5]
Paper ejection wing home position sensor
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Paper ejection wing position setting
M wing
0807
UR
Belt roller
OP
E
(1) The M wings and the belt roller are in their raised positions, while the S wings are in their lowered positions. This position setting is for normal paper with paper widths of B4 or larger. The paper feed pressure lever is at the position, and the paper width potentiometer detects a width of B4 or larger (equivalent to 1434 pulses).
OE
(2) The M wings and the belt roller are in their lowered positions, while the S wings are in their raised positions. This position setting is for normal paper with paper widths of B4 or smaller. The paper feed pressure lever is at the position, and the paper width potentiometer detects paper widths of B4 or smaller (equivalent to 717 pulses).
0808
S wing
RIS
(3) The M wings, the belt roller, and the S wings are in their lowered positions. This position setting is suitable for card stock of all paper sizes. The paper feed pressure lever is at the position. The paper width potentiometer detection has no effect (home position: equivalent to 0 pulse).
0809
(4) Test Mode No. 780 (Paper Ejection Wing Target Position) is used by a service engineer to set the position for custom paper. If the setting is changed from the default value, the operation panel displays . This position can be selected by users.
[8-6]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
1.
Removing the Paper Receiving Tray
E
Disassembly
OP
(1) Open the paper receiving tray to an angle of 45°, then lift from that position to remove.
RIS
OE
UR
Paper receiving tray
[8-7]
0810
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the Suction Unit
E
2.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the paper receiving tray. (2) Remove the paper ejection cover. (bind, M4 x 8, 4 pcs) (3) Unplug the connectors (2 locations), remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and lift the suction unit and pull forward to remove it.
0811
Paper ejection cover
Connector
RIS
Suction unit
Connector
0812
[8-8]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the Second Separation Fans
E
3.
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the following parts: • Paper receiving tray • Paper ejection cover • Suction unit (2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 40, 3 pcs each), unplug the connector, and remove the two second separation fans. * Remove the rear-side separation fan together with the fan cover.
RIS
OE
UR
Connector
0813
0814
Second separation fan
Second separation fan Fan cover
> • When installing the separation fans, insert the air outlet for each separation fan into the opening of the duct assembly before fastening the fan.
[8-9]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Paper Ejection Motor FG Sensor
E
4.
Paper ejection motor
Timing belt
OE
UR
Paper ejection motor FG sensor
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the following parts: • Paper receiving tray • Paper ejection cover • Suction unit (2) Unplug the connectors (2 locations). (3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), detach the timing belt, and dismount the paper ejection motor assembly.
Connector
RIS
Connector
0815
0816 >
[8-10]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
E
(4) Remove the E-ring and detach the spur gear. (5) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 2 pcs)and dismount the paper ejection motor. (6) Remove the paper ejection motor FG sensor from the sheet metal.
OP
Paper ejection motor
Spur gear
UR
E-ring
0817
OE
>
Paper ejection motor FG sensor
>
RIS
• When installing the paper ejection motor assembly, install and loosely tighten the mounting screws first, then move the paper ejection motor assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow until appropriate tension is applied to the timing belt. Only then should you firmly tighten the mounting screws to secure the paper ejection motor assembly in position.
0818
[8-11]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Home Position Sensor
E
5.
0819
OE
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the following parts: • Paper receiving tray • Paper ejection cover • Suction unit (2) Cut the cable tie, unplug the connector, and remove the paper ejection wing home position sensor.
RIS
Cable tie
Connector
0820 Paper ejection wing home position sensor
>
• Bundle the wires with a cable tie during the installation.
[8-12]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor
E
6.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the following parts: • Paper receiving tray • Paper ejection cover • Suction unit (2) Remove the connection plate (M) and connection plate (S). (P tight, 3 x 8, 2 pcs each) (3) Remove one mounting screw (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8) from the paper ejection wing pulse motor side. (4) Detach the E-ring from the sensor side of the W cam shaft and remove by sliding toward the sensor side along the shaft. (5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and dismount the paper ejection wing pulse motor.
RIS
Connection plate M
0821 Connection plate S
W cam shaft
E-ring
0822 Paper ejection wing pulse motor
Connector
[8-13]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the Paper Ejection Sensor and Transfer Belts
E
7.
0823 Suction plate (paper ejection)
RIS
OE
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the following parts: • Paper receiving tray • Paper ejection cover • Suction unit (2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and detach the suction plate (paper ejection). (3) Disengage and remove the driven shaft assembly from the hook section of the transport base.
0824
Driven shaft assembly
[8-14]
Transport base
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Transfer belt
UR
OP
Suction plate
E
(4) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs), then remove the suction plate by pulling it through the transfer belts.
0825
Removing the paper ejection sensor
OE
(5) Remove the mounting screw (bind, M3 x 6, 1 pc), unplug the connector, and dismount the paper ejection sensor.
Paper ejection sensor
RIS
Connector
0826
0827
[8-15]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the transfer belts
Bearing
Drive shaft assembly
Transfer belts
Transport base
Bearing
UR
E-ring
OP
E
(5) Remove the E-ring and bearing from the front side. (6) Slightly move the drive shaft assembly, detach the rear-side bearing from the transport base, and remove the transfer belts from the front side of the drive shaft assembly.
0828
0829
>
RIS
OE
• When installing the drive shaft assembly, confirm that the timing belt is installed correctly. • When installing the suction plate, confirm that the transfer belts are positioned correctly and that they are not caught by other parts. • Align the edge surface of the suction plate (paper ejection) with the longest stamped line on the transport plate on both front and rear sides.
Transport plate
Suction plate (paper ejection)
0830
[8-16]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
Removing the Second Separation Pump Assembly
E
8.
UR
OP
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/ system PCB bracket and the SH PCB bracket. (2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), and move the power band out of the way. Disconnect the air hose from the cylinder and dismount the second separation pump assembly.
OE
0831
Power band
Cylinder
Connector
RIS
Air hose
0832
[8-17]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
>
Separation pump gear
Phase alignment hole
Side plate
RIS
OE
Main cover
4-mm-diameter jig
Pump base
UR
Timing plate
Second print drum drive gear
OP
E
Be sure to align phases between the second print drum drive gear and the separation pump gear. (1) Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes in the main cover, second pressure cam, and side plate. (2) During installation, make sure that the hole in the timing plate with the mark is positioned at the location shown in the photo. Also confirm that the 4-mm-diameter jig can be inserted through the hole in the main cover into the phase alignment holes in the timing plate and pump base when engaging the gear teeth.
Phase alignment hole 8-mm-diameter jig
0833
* The second separation pump assembly and the first separation pump assembly are similar. For subsequent disassembly procedures, refer to the section on the center transport section.
[8-18]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
1.
E
Adjustment Adjusting the Suction Plate (Paper Ejection)
Checks and adjustment procedures
OP
> (1) Loosen the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) on the suction plate (paper ejection). (2) In accordance with the adjustment value of the roller adjusting plate, align the front side of the suction plate (paper ejection) with the line stamped on the front side of the transport plate toward the paper feed side. Also confirm that the rear side aligns with the longest stamped line. (3) Tighten the mounting screws. * Make sure that the pressure roller is parallel to the suction plate (paper ejection) during adjustment. * When the roller adjusting plate is moved one increment mark (1 mm) on the scale, also move the suction plate (paper ejection) one increment mark (1 mm).
RIS
OE
UR
> (1) Loosen the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) on the suction plate (paper ejection). (2) In accordance with the adjustment value of the roller adjusting plate, align the rear side of the suction plate (paper ejection) with the line stamped on the rear side of the transport plate toward the paper feed side. Also confirm that the front side aligns with the longest stamped line. (3) Tighten the mounting screws. * Make sure that the pressure roller is parallel to the suction plate (paper ejection) during adjustment. * When the roller adjusting plate is moved one increment mark (1 mm) on the scale, also move the suction plate (paper ejection) one increment mark (1 mm).
Transport plate
Suction plate (paper ejection)
0834
0835
[8-19]
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
[8-20]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 9-2 Mechanism for Detection of Master on Print Drum Before Printing ........................................... 9-2 Print Drum Check Mechanism .................................................................................................. 9-3 Print Drum Lock Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 9-4 Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Mechanism ................................................................................. 9-5 Print Drum Drive Lock Release Mechanism ............................................................................. 9-6 Print Drum Rotation Mechanism ............................................................................................... 9-7 Inking Mechanism ..................................................................................................................... 9-8
UR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Removing the Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Unit ...................................................................... 9-9 Removing the Screen Assembly ............................................................................................. 9-10 Removing the Clamp Plate Base Assembly ............................................................................ 9-12 Removing the Print Drum Body ............................................................................................... 9-13 Removing ink scraper plates F, R ........................................................................................... 9-16 Removing the Ink Pump Assembly ......................................................................................... 9-17 Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Assembly ......................................................................... 9-18 Removing the Ink Cartridge Lock Assembly and Circular Arc ANT ......................................... 9-19 Removing the Ink Sensor PCB ............................................................................................... 9-20 Removing the Print Drum PCB ............................................................................................... 9-21 Removing the Print Drum Joint ............................................................................................... 9-22 Removing Flange R ................................................................................................................ 9-23 Removing flange F .................................................................................................................. 9-24 Removing the Squeegee Roller .............................................................................................. 9-25
OE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 9-29 Squeegee Gap Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 9-29 Squeegee Pressure Adjustment ............................................................................................. 9-31 Master Position Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 9-33 Horizontal Print Position Adjustment ....................................................................................... 9-34
RIS
1. 2. 3. 4.
[9-1]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
1.
E
Mechanism Mechanism for Detection of Master on Print Drum Before Printing
Print drum angle 120°
UR
Print drum angle 140°
OP
At the beginning of a print job, the machine checks for the presence of a master on the print drum. Pressing the Start key begins print drum rotation. When the first print drum rotates to an angle of 140° and the second print drum rotates to an angle of 120°, the master loading sensors check for the presence of a master on the print drums. The information obtained by the master loading sensors is retained in memory until the print drums are pulled out or power to the machine is switched off. This allows printing to begin immediately for second and subsequent print jobs. During the master check at the beginning of a print job, if the master loading sensors do not detect any light (i.e., because no master is present), the machine determines that there is no master on the print drums.
0902
OE
0901
First master loading sensor
Second master loading sensor
Reflection preventing cloth
RIS
>
>
Master making unit
First master removal unit
120°
140°
First master loading sensor
Second master loading sensor
[9-2]
0903
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Print Drum Check Mechanism
E
2.
RIS
OE
UR
OP
The removal and insertion of each print drum is performed at position B. The drawer connectors, print drum safety switches, and print drum lock sensors determine the print drums are set in the machine. If the front cover safety switch and either the first print drum safety switch or second print drum safety switch are OFF, the safety mechanism will prevent the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second master compression motor, first horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal pulse motor, cutter motor, and master making unit transport pulse motor from switching ON. When the front cover safety switch is ON, if either the first print drum safety switch or second print drum safety switch is ON although the other is OFF, the machine will operate (to allow printing with a single print drum).
Print drum safety SW
0904
Print drum lock sensor
[9-3]
Drawer connector
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Print Drum Lock Mechanism
E
3.
UR
Print drum lever
OP
When the print drum is set in the main unit, the print drum lock plate presses the lock lever and hooks it on the movable plate of the horizontal sliding unit. Since the force of the return spring returns the lock lever to the lock position, the print drum lock plate will not descend, even if the print drum lever is pulled (print drum in locked condition). Opening the front cover and pressing the print drum pull-out button will move the machine to position B and unlock the drive mechanism (of either the first or second print drum).The print drum solenoid will then switch ON, and the lock lever will move to the lock release position. Pulling the print drum lever lowers the print drum lock plate to permit removal of the print drum (print drum in unlocked condition).
Print drum lock plate
Movable plate
OE
Lock lever
Print drum lock solenoid
RIS
0905
0906
[9-4]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Mechanism
E
4.
OE
UR
OP
The horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum to adjust the horizontal printing position. When the print drum is set in the main unit, it is fastened to the horizontal sliding assembly by the print drum lock mechanism. When the horizontal pulse motor of the horizontal sliding base assembly rotates, the horizontal sliding assembly moves, causing the print drum to move as well. The horizontal home position sensor checks the horizontal reference position.
RIS
Gray parts in the diagram on the right move.
0907
Horizontal pulse motor Horizontal home position sensor Drive lock release sensor
[9-5]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Print Drum Drive Lock Release Mechanism
E
5.
RIS
OE
UR
OP
Pressing the print drum pull-out button allows the first and second print drums to be pulled out. The first and second print drums are pulled out and inserted at position B. However, due to the phase difference between the first and second print drums, they are never positioned at position B at the same time. Pressing the print drum pull-out button causes the horizontal pulse motor of either the first or second print drum, whichever moves to position B first, to move the print drum located at position B all the way toward the front side (the position is checked by the drive lock release sensor). The drive joint of the main unit is then disengaged from the print drum drive joint, cutting off the transfer of rotation from the main unit to the print drum. The other print drum then moves to position B, allowing removal and insertion of the other print drum. If a print job is executed after the print drums are inserted, the machine will move the print drum whose drive lock was released to position B, after which the horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum body to the horizontal home position sensor position, where the drive joint of the main unit engages with the print drum drive joint. During print drum removal, the current position in the horizontal direction set on the main unit panel is saved to the main unit memory. At the start of a print job, the print drum returns to the horizontal position saved to the main unit memory.
Drive lock release sensor
Horizontal pulse motor
Horizontal home position sensor
0908 Print drum joint Drive joint
[9-6]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Print Drum Rotation Mechanism
E
6.
OP
When the main motor rotates, its drive force is transmitted to flange R via the print drum drive assembly of the main drive section and the print drum joint. The rotation is then transferred to the squeegee drive gear via the flange gear attached to flange R and the squeegee idle gear, turning the squeegee roller. When the squeegee roller rotates, the squeegee gear attached on the front side of the squeegee roller turns the ink drive gear, rotating the ink drive shaft. The squeegee drive gear is equipped with a one-way clutch to keep the squeegee roller from rotating when the print drum is rotated manually in reverse.
Flange R
UR
Drum joint
OE
0909
Flange R Flange gear
Drive joint
Doctor roller
RIS
Ink drive shaft
Squeegee idle gear Squeegee drive gear
Squeegee roller
Ink drive gear
0910
Squeegee gear
[9-7]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Inking Mechanism
E
7.
UR
OP
When the swirl of ink moves away from the ink sensor while the main motor is ON and the print drum is rotating, the ink motor will turn ON, pumping ink from the ink cartridge. The pumped ink will be applied to the squeegee roller from the holes on the ink distributor. When ink contacts the ink sensor, the ink motor switches OFF. The ink applied to the squeegee roller is swirled between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller (the ink drive shaft rotates to produce a smooth swirl of ink). A small gap is present between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller, through which ink passes and reaches the inside of the print drum. The overflow sensor checks and prevents overflow of the ink applied to the print drum.
Ink motor
OE
Ink sensor
RIS
Overflow sensor
0911
Doctor roller
Ink distributor
Squeegee roller Ink drive shaft
[9-8]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
1.
E
Disassembly Removing the Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Unit
OP
(1) Pull out the print drum, switch off power, and dismount the cover (front lower). (2) Remove the motor cover plate. (RS tight, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) (3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8, 4 pcs), unplug the connectors (5 locations), pull out the coaxial cable, and dismount the print drum horizontal sliding unit. (Turn the unit slightly clockwise when pulling out.)
RIS
OE
UR
Print drum horizontal sliding unit
0912
Cover plate
[9-9]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing the Screen Assembly
E
2.
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the end hanger mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs). (3) Remove the top hanger mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs) and dismount the screen assembly. * Be careful to avoid adding folding marks or creases to the screen during the removal or installation.
UR
Screen assembly
OE
0913
RIS
End hangers
0914
0915 Top hangers
[9-10]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
>
OP
E
(1) Fasten the top hangers, wrap the screen assembly around the print drum, and temporary fasten the end hangers. (2) Engage the hook on the spring side of the screen jig to the hole in the end hanger. Hook the other end of the jig to the flange projection. (3) Set the screen jigs on the front and rear sides to apply tension to the screen assembly, then tighten the end hanger mounting screws firmly. (4) Remove the screen jigs after securing the mounting screws
0916
Screen jig
OE
End hanger
UR
>
Top hanger
Screen assembly
0917
>
Screen jig
RIS
End hanger
Top hanger
Screen assembly
0918 >
[9-11]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing the Clamp Plate Base Assembly
E
3.
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs) and dismount the clamp plate base assembly.
0919
RIS
OE
UR
Clamp plate base assembly
0920
>
[9-12]
0921
0922
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing the Print Drum Body
E
4.
UR
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly (3) Loosen the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) in the keyhole-shaped holes (indicated by arrows in the photo) at the rear side on the print drum body. Remove the other mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 10 pcs). (4) While holding the joint to keep the print drum from expanding suddenly, remove the tape (the tape will be reused in reassembly). (5) Move the print drum body slightly to dislodge the mounting screws from the keyhole-shaped holes, then dismount the print drum body.
Print drum body
OE
Tape
Joint on print drum body
RIS
0923
0924 >
[9-13]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
>
UR
OP
E
(1) Each end of the print drum body on the rear side is stamped with an arrow ( ) and either an or an . Set the print drum body so that the side with the is on the front side and the side with the is on the rear. Hook the screws loosened for removal of flange F and flange R to the keyhole-shaped holes located on the rear end of the print drum body. (2) Loosely tighten the two screws at the section indicated by the arrow ( ) on both ends of the print drum body.
0925
0926
OE
(3) On both front and rear side, attach the screen jigs to the inner holes at the front end of the print drum body and the flange projections. (4) While pressing flange F and flange R against the print drum body, firmly tighten the two screws installed at the arrow ( ) in step (2). (5) Likewise, while pressing flange F and flange R against the print drum body, firmly tighten the two screws in the keyhole-shaped holes, then tighten the remaining eight screws in the direction of the front end of the print drum body. Print drum body
Screen jig
RIS
Screen jig
0927 Flange R
0928 Flange F
[9-14]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
UR
OP
E
(6) Install screws (bind, M3 x 6, use mounting screws of other parts) into the second holes (on both front and rear sides) from the front end of the print drum body.
0929
0930
OE
(7) Remove the screen jigs and attach the tape on the joint section of the print drum body. * Attach the tape so that the joint section on the print drum body does not rise. If the joint section of the print drum rises, wrinkling of the master during loading or noise may result. (8) Remove the two screws installed in step (6).
RIS
Tape
0931
[9-15]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing ink scraper plates F, R
E
5.
UR
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body (3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 8, 1 pc each) and dismount ink scraper plates F and R.
OE
0932
Ink scraper plate R
0933
RIS
0934
0935
>
Ink scraper plate F
>
• The installation positions of different cross beam sizes are marked. For the A3 machine, install the ink scraper plates at the locations marked . For the B4 machine, install at the locations marked .
[9-16]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing the Ink Pump Assembly
E
6.
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body (3) Unplug the connector for the ink motor FG sensor and the connector for the ink motor, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and dismount the ink pump assembly.
RIS
OE
UR
Connector for ink motor
Connector for ink motor FG sensor
0936 Ink pump assembly
[9-17]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Assembly
E
7.
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body • Ink pump assembly (3) Remove the inspection cap. (4) Unplug the connector for the Antenna and the connector for the ink cartridge set switch. Remove the two reusable bands. (5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 4 pcs), slide the ink cartridge guide assembly toward the inside, and lift up to remove.
OE
UR
Connector for Antenna
0937
Inspection cap
0938
RIS
Ink cartridge guide assembly
0940 Reusable bands Connector for ink cartridge set SW
0939
[9-18]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing the Ink Cartridge Lock Assembly and Antenna
Removing the ink cartridge lock assembly
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body • Ink pump assembly • Ink cartridge guide assembly
E
8.
(3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 8, 2 pcs) and dismount the ink cartridge lock assembly from the ink cartridge guide assembly. Ink cartridge lock assembly
OE
UR
Ink cartridge guide assembly
0941
Removing the Antenna
(3) Remove the upper ink cartridge guide from the lower ink cartridge guide by disengaging the latch. (4) Remove the Antenna from the Antenna holder by disengaging the latch.
RIS
Ink cartridge guide assembly Antenna
Antenna holder
Upper ink cartridge guide
0942
Lower ink cartridge guide
0944 0943
[9-19]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Removing the Ink Sensor PCB
E
9.
Ink sensor PCB
RIS
OE
UR
Connector
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body • Ink pump assembly • Ink cartridge guide assembly (3) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 2 pcs), and dismount the ink sensor PCB.
0945
0946 >
[9-20]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
E
10. Removing the Print Drum PCB
OP
(1) Pull out the print drum. Remove the front frame cover. (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs) (2) Unplug the connectors (6 locations), remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 2 pcs), and dismount the print drum PCB. * Before replacing the print drum PCB, read the precautions described in Chapter 18.
RIS
OE
UR
0947
Front frame cover
0948
Print drum PCB
[9-21]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Pull out the print drum. Remove the print drum side frames from both sides. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs each) Remove the rear frame assembly. Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and dismount the print drum joint.
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
E
11. Removing the Print Drum Joint
Print drum side frame
UR
Print drum side frame
Print drum side frame
Rear frame assembly
0949
OE
Print drum side frame
0950
>
RIS
>
0951
Print drum joint
0952
[9-22]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
OE
UR
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body • Print drum side frames (2 pcs) • Rear frame assembly • Print drum joint (3) Detach the C-ring and remove flange R.
E
12. Removing Flange R
0953
C-ring
RIS
Flange R
0954
[9-23]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
E
13. Removing flange F
UR
RIS
OE
Front frame assembly
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body • Print drum side frames (2 pcs) (3) Unplug the connectors (2 locations), detach the reusable band, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), and dismount the front frame assembly. (4) Remove the snap ring from the flange roller at the lower side and dismount one flange roller. (5) Remove flange F. * The remaining flange rollers can be removed after flange F is dismounted.
Snap ring
Flange roller
Position-B lock lever
0955
0956 Flange F
> • Before installing the front frame assembly, push the position-B lock lever so that the tip of the position-B lock lever lies at the periphery without entering the hole in flange F.
[9-24]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
E
14. Removing the Squeegee Roller
OE
Ink drive gear
UR
OP
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum. (2) Remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly • Print drum body • Front frame cover • Print drum side frames (2 pcs) • Rear frame assembly • Print drum joint • Flange R • Front frame assembly • Flange F (3) Remove the drive shaft lock plate. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 1 pc) (4) Remove the ink drive gear. (5) Remove the E-ring and dismount the squeegee gear.
0957
Squeegee gear Drive shaft lock plate
RIS
(6) Remove the E-ring and dismount the squeegee idle gear. (7) Remove the E-ring and dismount the squeegee drive gear.
0958 Squeegee idle gear
Squeegee drive gear
[9-25]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
UR
OP
E
(8) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and the shoulder screw from the front side.
0959
OE
Shoulder screw
RIS
(9) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) and the shoulder screw from the rear side.
0960
Shoulder screw
[9-26]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
E
(10) Disengage the squeegee side frames from the S gap cams on the front and rear sides and dismount the squeegee unit.
OP
S gap cam
>
OE
S gap cam
UR
Squeegee side frame F
0961
Squeegee side frame R
RIS
>
0962 Squeegee side frame R
Squeegee side frame F
0963 >
[9-27]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
E
(11) Pull out the ink drive shaft. * Be careful to avoid misplacing the bearing metal and O-ring, which are removed at the same time. (12) Remove squeegee side frame F and squeegee side frame R and dismount the squeegee roller. * Note that the doctor roller, ink block F, and ink block R are also removed while assembled as a unit.
OP
Squeegee size frame R
Ink block R
RIS
OE
Doctor roller
UR
0964
Squeegee roller
0965
Ink block F
Ink drive shaft
0966 Squeegee size frame F
[9-28]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
1.
E
Adjustment Squeegee Gap Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedures
UR
OP
(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following parts: • Screen assembly • Print drum body • Front frame cover • Print drum handle cover • Print drum lever (2) Clean out the ink from the squeegee unit. (3) Using a feeler gauge, check to confirm that the gap between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller conforms to the following specified value. * Specified value (same on front and rear sides): 0.08 mm ± 0.02 mm (4) If the measured gap deviates from the specified value, loosen the retaining screw on the doctor gap adjustment plate. (5) Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the groove on the doctor gap adjustment plate and move the plate to adjust the gap. (6) Tighten the retaining screw on the doctor gap adjustment plate.
Doctor gap adjustment plate
RIS
0967
OE
Gap narrows.
Gap widens.
0968
>
Doctor gap adjustment plate retaining screw
0970
[9-29]
0969
OP
E
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
UR
0971
>
OE
Flange R
Doctor gap adjustment plate retaining screw
Problems
0972
RIS
• If the gap between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller is too wide, too much ink will be applied to the print drum, potentially resulting in ink leakage. It may also cause the master to slip from the clamp plate or tear. • If the gap between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller is too narrow, the required amount of ink will not be applied to the print drum, causing irregularities in printed images, light sections on printed images, or partially missing printed images. An excessively narrow gap may also require numerous trial prints to obtain correctly printed images.
[9-30]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Squeegee Pressure Adjustment
E
2.
Checks and adjustment procedures
OP
(1) Create a master using Test Chart No. 14 and print. Check the left and right sides of the prints to confirm that the print density is equal on both sides. Also, push against the area on the print drum body immediately below the squeegee roller with a finger to confirm that the gap between the print drum body and the squeegee roller conforms to the following specified value on both the front and rear sides. (2) If the print density differs between the left and right sides of the prints or if the gap between the print drum body and the squeegee roller deviates from the specified value, make the adjustment described below. * Specified value (same on front and rear sides): 0.2 mm ± 0.05 mm for A3 size, 0.3 mm ± 0.05 mm for B4 and A4 sizes
UR
> (3) Pull out the print drum and remove the ink cartridge. Remove the following parts: • Front frame cover • Print drum handle cover • Print drum lever (4) Loosen the three retaining screws (indicated by the arrows in the photo) on the squeegee-side frame F assembly through the holes marked on the print drum front frame. (5) Insert a flat-head screwdriver through the hole in the print drum front frame and turn the S gap cam to adjust the gap between the print drum body and the squeegee roller to the specified value. (6) Tighten the three retaining screws on the squeegee-side frame F assembly.
RIS
0973
OE
S gap cam
Gap narrows.
0974 0975
Gap widens.
S gap cam
0976
[9-31]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
UR
OP
E
> (3) Pull out the print drum. (4) Position the holes in print drum rear frame, flange R and squeegee idle gear so that the two retaining screws (indicated by the arrows in the photo) on the squeegee-side frame R assembly can be seen through the holes, then loosen the screws. * Rotate the print drum if the holes in the squeegee idle gear are not aligned. (5) Insert a flat-head screwdriver through the holes in the print drum rear frame and flange R, then turn the S gap cam to adjust the gap between the print drum body and the squeegee roller to the specified value. (6) Tighten the two retaining screws on the squeegee-side frame R assembly.
0977
RIS
OE
>
S gap cam
0978
Precautions for adjustment
• If the S gap cam is turned without loosening all the retaining screws, the S gap cam may be damaged. Be sure to loosen all retaining screws before making the adjustment.
Problems
• If the squeegee pressure differs between the left and right sides, the print density will become uneven between the left and right sides of the prints. • If the squeegee pressure is excessive, too much ink will be applied to the print drum, causing potential ink leakage. It may also cause the master to slip from the clamp plate or tear. • If the squeegee pressure is too weak, the required amount of ink will not be applied to the print drum, causing potential irregularities in printed images, light sections on printed images, or partially missing printed images. Excessively low squeegee pressure may also require numerous trial prints to obtain correctly printed images.
[9-32]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Master Position Adjustment
E
3.
Before making adjustments, clean the pressure roller.
Checks and adjustment procedures
OP
> (1) Pull out the print drum and remove the print drum horizontal sliding unit. (2) To move the master toward the front side, loosen the retaining screw on the roller adjusting plate on the front side. (3) Adjust by aligning the increment mark on the left side of the roller adjusting plate to the left-side edge of the pressure roller bracket. * Moving the roller adjusting plate one increment mark to the left to move the master 1 mm toward the front side. The roller adjusting plate can be moved up to two increment marks, which is equal to 2 mm.
UR
> (1) Pull out the print drum. (2) To move the master toward the rear side, loosen the retaining screw on the roller adjusting plate on the rear side. (3) Adjust by aligning the increment mark on the left side of the roller adjusting plate to the left-side edge of the pressure roller bracket. * Moving the roller adjusting plate one increment mark to the left moves the master 1 mm toward the rear side. The roller adjusting plate can be moved up to two increment marks, which is equal to 2 mm. * After the above adjustment, adjust the suction plate (paper ejection). (See the section on adjustment of the paper ejection section in Chapter 8.)
OE
To adjust the rear side, loosen this screw and remove the pressure roller.
Loosen this screw and move the roller adjusting plate toward the left.
RIS
Roller adjusting plate
0979
Align this stepped section with the left-side edge of the pressure roller bracket. The adjustment can be made in three steps. Moving the roller adjusting plate one step to the left moves the master 1 mm.
[9-33]
The roller adjusting plate is pressed against this reset plate in the default position.
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
Horizontal Print Position Adjustment
E
4.
Checks and adjustment procedures
RIS
OE
UR
OP
(1) Run Test Mode No. 386 (Activates or deactivates center black dot setting), and make dual-color prints. (2) Confirm that the deviation between the vertical line printed by the first print drum and the vertical line printed by the second print drum is less than ±2 mm. (3) If the deviation exceeds the standard value, start Test Mode No. 973 (Horizontal HP Adjustment (Print Drum)), and adjust the horizontal image position of the second print drum in relation to the first print drum. * If the setting value is increased, the image moves to the rear side. * After entering a setting value, press the center lamp to register the value.
[9-34]
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 10 Clamp Unit
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 10-2 Clamp Initializing Operation .................................................................................................... 10-3 Clamp Plate Opening Operation (First Clamp Unit) ................................................................ 10-5 Master Ejection Plate Opening Operation (Second Clamp Unit) ............................................. 10-6 Clamp Plate Closing Operation (First Clamp Unit) .................................................................. 10-7
RIS
OE
UR
1. 2. 3. 4.
[10-1]
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
E
Mechanism
OE
UR
OP
The machine has two clamp units. The first clamp unit is mounted on the master making unit, while the second clamp unit is installed to the second master removal unit. The first clamp unit operates when either the first print drum or the second print drum operates for removal or loading of a master. The second clamp unit, however, operates only when the second print drum operates for removal of a master. When the clamp unit operates, the relevant print drum must be at the horizontal home position.
1001
Second master removal unit
Master making unit
RIS
1002
Second clamp unit
1003
First clamp unit
[10-2]
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
Clamp Initializing Operation
E
1.
OP
> When the power switch is turned on or when the all-reset operation is initiated, the first clamp unit performs the initializing operation. Whether the clamp transport cam (1) has returned to the home position (light path of first clamp sensor A blocked, and light received by first clamp sensor B) is checked. If it is not at the home position, the first clamp motor will turn ON and rotate in the forward or reverse direction depending on the statuses of the first clamp sensors A, B until the light path of the first clamp sensor A is blocked and the light is received by the first clamp sensor B. This motor operation rotates the clamp cam (1) and returns the clamp transport cam (1) to the home position.
UR
First clamp motor
OE
First clamp sensor A
RIS
First clamp sensor B
Clamp cam (1)
Clamp transport cam (1)
1004
[10-3]
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
UR
OP
E
> When the power switch is turned on or when the all-reset operation is initiated, the second clamp unit performs the initializing operation. When the light path of the second clamp sensor is blocked, the second clamp motor will turn ON and rotates in reverse. When light is received by the second clamp sensor, the second clamp motor starts rotating in the forward direction until the light path is blocked, in order to return the clamp transport cam (2) to the home position. If light is received by the second clamp sensor, the second clamp motor will turn ON and rotate in the forward direction until the light path is blocked in order to return the clamp transport cam (2) to the home position.
Clamp transport cam (2)
RIS
OE
Second clamp sensor
Second clamp motor
1005
[10-4]
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
Clamp Plate Opening Operation (First Clamp Unit)
E
2.
OP
When the Start key is pressed for Confidential or master-making operation, the print drum starts to rotate from position B. After the presence of a master on the print drum is checked and as the print drum returns to position B, the print drum stops and the clamp plate opening operation starts. The first clamp motor will turn ON and rotate the clamp cam (1) and lowers the clamp transport cam (1) until the light path of the first clamp sensor B is blocked. Then, the print drum starts rotating for master making operation. The clamp transport cam (1) at its lowered position opens the clamp plate first, then lifts the master ejection plate to remove the master from the clamp plate.
First clamp motor
UR
First clamp sensor A
Clamp cam (1)
Clamp transport cam (1)
RIS
OE
First clamp sensor B
[10-5]
1006
Print drum (at position B)
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
Master Ejection Plate Opening Operation (Second Clamp Unit)
E
3.
UR
OP
When the second print drum ejects the master, the second print drum rotates to an angle of 129° during the clamp plate opening operation. This action disengages the leading edge of the master from the clamp plate. After the first clamp unit returns to the home position, the second print drum rotates in reverse to an angle of 344°. At that position, the second clamp unit performs the master ejection plate opening operation. The second clamp motor will turn ON and rotate the clamp cam (2) and move the clamp transport cam (2) to the print drum side until light is received by the second clamp sensor. Then, the print drum starts rotating for master making operation. The clamp transport cam (2) at a position close to the print drum lifts the master ejection plate to further raise the leading edge of the master that has been disengaged from the clamp plate.
RIS
OE
Clamp transport cam (2)
[10-6]
Second clamp sensor
1007
Second clamp motor
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
Clamp Plate Closing Operation (First Clamp Unit)
E
4.
OP
When the print drum rotates one full turn and returns to position A while conducting the removed master vertical transport operation, the clamp plate opens because the clamp transport cam (1) is at its lowered position, and the print drum stops. In the master loading operation, when the load pulse motor feeds the master onto the print drum for a set length, the first clamp motor will turn ON and rotate the clamp cam (1) until the light path of the first clamp sensor A is blocked and light is received by the first clamp sensor B. This action closes the clamp and the master becomes clamped. In this process, the clamp transport cam (1) returns to the home position.
First clamp motor
UR
First clamp sensor A
Clamp cam (1)
Clamp transport cam (1)
RIS
OE
First clamp sensor B
[10-7]
1008
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
[10-8]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 11-2 Outline of the Master Removal Operation ............................................................................... 11-2 Operation for Checking Master on Print Drum Before Master Removal ................................. 11-4 Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation ....................................................................... 11-5 Disposed Master Compression Operation .............................................................................. 11-7 Remaining Master Volume Detection Mechanism .................................................................. 11-8 Master Disposal Box Safety Switch ........................................................................................ 11-9
UR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................. 11-10 Removing the Master Removal Unit ..................................................................................... 11-10 Removing the First Master Removal Unit .............................................................................. 11-11 Removing the Second Master Removal Unit ........................................................................ 11-14
RIS
OE
1. 2. 3.
[11-1]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
1.
Outline of the Master Removal Operation
E
Mechanism
OP
The master on the print drum is removed from the print drum and ejected in the following sequence.
>
OE
UR
(1) At the start of the master removal operation, the first master loading sensor checks whether there is a master on the first print drum to be removed. (2) After the clamp plate opening operation is completed, the first print drum rotates and opens the clamp plate to release the leading edge of the master, then lifts the master ejection plate to raise the leading edge of the master. (3) The removed master vertical transport operation is conducted to remove the master from the first print drum, and the master is sent to the first master disposal box. (4) The master compression operation is conducted to compress the master in the first master disposal box. * The above step (1) is conducted only when the presence of a master on the first print drum is unknown. * Even if there is no master on the first print drum, steps (2) through (4) are conducted. However, the first master disposal jam sensor does not perform detection during the removed master vertical transport operation. * The first master removal unit is mounted with master guiding plates. Since the master compression operation and the master loading operation start at the same time, the master guiding plates stay at their lowered position while the master is wrapped around the first print drum, thus preventing the tail end of the master from contacting the master removal roller and being contaminated with ink.
Compression plate
RIS
First master disposal box
Master guiding plate
1101
First master loading sensor
[11-2]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
>
UR
OP
E
(1) At the start of the master removal operation, the second master loading sensor checks whether there is a master on the second print drum to be removed. (2) After the clamp plate opening operation is completed, the second print drum rotates to a print drum angle of 129° and opens the clamp plate, then lifts the master ejection plate to raise the leading edge of the master. (3) The first clamp unit returns to the home position, and the second print drum rotates in reverse to a print drum angle of 344°. (4) After the master ejection plate opening operation is conducted, the second print drum rotates to lift the master ejection plate and raise the leading edge of the master. (5) The removed master vertical transport operation is conducted to remove the master from the second print drum, and the master is sent to the second master disposal box. (6) The master compression operation is conducted to compress the master in the second master disposal box. * The above step (1) is conducted only when the presence of a master on the second print drum is unknown. * Even if there is no master on the second print drum, steps (2) through (6) are conducted. However, the second master disposal jam sensor does not perform detection during the removed master vertical transport operation.
Compression plate
Second master disposal box
RIS
OE
Second master loading sensor
[11-3]
1102
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Operation for Checking Master on Print Drum Before Master Removal
E
2.
OP
At the beginning of making a master or executing Confidential operation, only if the presence of a master on the print drum is unknown, the print drum rotates one full turn from position B, and the master loading sensor checks whether there is a master on the print drum when the first print drum rotates to a print drum angle of 140° or when the second print drum rotates to a print drum angle of 120°. If it is known that there is a master on the print drum, the above checking operation is not conducted. When there is a master on the print drum, the master disposal jam sensor checks if the master is sent to the master disposal box during the following removed master vertical transport operation.
OE
UR
Print drum angle of 140°
First master loading sensor
Reflection preventing cloth
1103
Print drum angle of 120°
RIS
>
Second master loading sensor
1104 >
[11-4]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation
E
3.
OP
As soon as the clamp opening operation starts, the master disposal motor starts rotating. The clamp unit operation and the print drum rotation send the master whose leading edge is lifted by the master ejection plate to the master disposal box through the vertical transport rollers. When the print drum rotates one full turn and reaches position A, the main motor stops rotating, and the master disposal motor also stops rotating according to the set timing. In this step, the master disposal jam sensor checks proper transport of the master into the master disposal box when the print drum is at print drum angles of 120 and 180°, while the master disposal motor FG sensor checks the rotating speed of the master disposal motor. Test Mode No. 578 can be used to adjust the speed of the master disposal motor in relation to the print drum rotation speed in master removal operation. The master guiding plates of the first master removal unit are raised by the compression plate so that they do not affect the removed master vertical transport operation.
UR
>
Master removal roller (top)
Compression plate
First master disposal motor FG sensor
OE
First master disposal motor
1105 Master guiding plate
First master disposal jam sensor
RIS
Master guiding plate
Master removal roller (bottom)
[11-5]
Pulley shaft
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
UR
OP
E
>
Second master disposal jam sensor
RIS
OE
Second master disposal motor FG sensor
[11-6]
Second master disposal motor
1106
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Disposed Master Compression Operation
E
4.
Initialization • If the master compression sensor senses light, switching ON the power switch or initiating an allreset causes the master compression motor to rotate in reverse until the light path of the master compression sensor is blocked. If the light path of the master compression sensor is blocked when the power switch is turned on or when the all-reset is initiated, no initialization is performed. • At the start of master compression, if the master compression sensor senses light, the master compression motor rotates in reverse until the light path of the master compression sensor is blocked. If the light path of the master compression sensor is blocked at the beginning of master removal, no initialization is performed.
2)
Master compressing operation • If the number of removed masters in the master disposal box is small, no load is applied to the compression plate. The master compression motor rotates in the compressing direction, and counting of the pulses of the master compression motor FG sensor starts when the master compression sensor switches from ON to OFF. After reaching the number of pulses (default: 163 pulses) set in Test Mode No. 573 (Master compression-limit position (maximum end position)), the master compression motor halts. After the motor remains OFF for around three seconds, the master compression motor begins to rotate in reverse. When the master compression sensor switches ON, the master compression motor halts and ends compression. • If the number of removed masters increases, a load is applied to the compression plate to compress the masters. This means that the rotating speed of the master compression motor slows before reaching the compression end pulse count, extending the pulse width of the master compression FG sensor. When the pulse width exceeds the pulse width (default: 40 ms for the first print drum and 37 ms for the second print drum for an A3 machine) set in Test Mode No. 575 (Master compression duration adjustment), the master compression motor halts. After the motor remains OFF for around three seconds, the master compression motor begins to rotate in reverse. When the master compression sensor switches ON, the master compression motor halts and ends compression. • If the number of removed masters in the master disposal box continues to increase and the pulse width set in Test Mode No. 575 (Master compression duration adjustment) is reached before the number of pulses of the master compression motor FG sensor (after the master compression sensor switches from ON to OFF) reaches the number of pulses (default: 162) set in Test Mode No. 576 (Master disposal box full detection position adjustment), the machine determines that the master disposal box is full. In this case, when compression is complete, the Master Disposal Box Full indication is displayed on the panel. * If Test Mode No. 579 (Compacting Completion Position Default Adjustment Selection) is enabled (default), the pulse width at the compression completion position is calculated at the start of each master compression, based on the average pulse width (approximate pulse width when actual master compression motor is operating under no load) of the third to eighth pulses of the master compression motor FG pulse, the designed pulse width under no-load operation, and the pulse width set in Test Mode No. 575 (Master compression duration adjustment), and automatic adjustment is performed. The compression force remains stable even with variations in motor and mechanism operations.
RIS
OE
UR
OP
1)
[11-7]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Remaining Master Volume Detection Mechanism
E
5.
Value of X
OP
The following pulse widths are detected during the master compression operation. A: Pulse width set in Test Mode No. 573 (Master compression-limit position (maximum end position)) B: Pulse width set in Test Mode No. 575 (Master compression duration adjustment) (or automatically adjusted value in case the compression completion position default adjustment selection is enabled) C: Average pulse width of third to eighth pulses of master compression FG pulse (approximate pulse width when actual master compression motor is operating under no load) The value of X is given by the following equation: X = (A – C)/(B – C) x 100 The remaining master volume is indicated as shown in the table below in accordance with the value of X. Remaining master volume indication
2nd print drum in A3 machine
1st print drum in B4 machine
2nd print drum in B4 machine
12 or less
24 or less
22 or less
20 or less
100% to 50%
13 to 35
25 to 52
23 to 43
21 to 33
50% to 30%
36 to 65
53 to 70
44 to 69
34 to 54
30% to 10%
70 or more
55 or more
10 or less
66 or more
71 or more
UR
1st print drum in A3 machine
Conditions for master disposal box full are met.
Full
1107
OE
>
C:
FG pulse width is sampled immediately after compression starts (3rd to 8th pulses) to determine the speed of the motor operating under no load. Here, it is assumed that C = 15 msec.
RIS
The compression plate rotates to the compression end position and stops. Compression end position is 100° (163 pulses) from the home position. Note: Since the pulse count at FULL is 162, the compression plate in most cases rotates to the end position, except when the master disposal box is full.
1108
A:
FG pulse width is measured immediately before the compression plate stops at the compression end position. Once a sufficient number of masters has been reached, the compression load is applied to the motor, slowing the motor and widening the FG pulse width. Here, it is assumed that A = 30 msec. Note that the FG pulse width at the compression completion position (nearly FULL) is B = 38 msec (when the compression completion position default adjustment selection is disabled).
A - C = 15 msec: Indicates a decrease in motor speed due to compression of masters B - C = 23 msec: Indicates a decrease in motor speed due to compression of masters when the master disposal box is nearly full The remaining master volume is calculated by comparing the above two values. (In this example, the calculation results in a value of 65, and the indication shows .)
[11-8]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Master Disposal Box Safety Switch
E
6.
OE
UR
OP
The master disposal box safety switch checks whether the master disposal box is correctly set in the machine. If the master disposal box safety switch is OFF, the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second master compression motor, first horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal pulse motor, cutter motor, and master making unit transport pulse motor cannot be switched ON. If the master disposal box safety switch remains OFF (with master disposal box removed from the machine) for five seconds, the Master Disposal Box Full indication is reset.
RIS
Master disposal box safety SW
[11-9]
1109
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
1.
Removing the Master Removal Unit
Removing the first master removal unit
E
Disassembly
Mounting screws
OP
(1) Switch off power and remove the master disposal box. (2) Remove the master disposal cover (1) and the paper feed cover. (3) Unplug the three connectors, remove the one reusable band, remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and pull out the master removal unit toward the paper feed side.
UR
Master disposal cover (1)
Connectors
OE
1110
Removing the second master removal unit
RIS
(1) Switch off power and remove the master disposal box. (2) Remove the master disposal cover (2). (3) Disengage the lock located on the master making unit drawer cover using a steel measure, then open the master making unit drawer cover. (4) Disengage the lock and move the master making unit toward the first print drum side. (5) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8) at four locations. (Remove two from the paper ejection side; remove the other two from the top side.) (6) Unplug the three connectors, remove the two reusable bands, and pull out the master removal unit toward the paper ejection side.
Connectors
Mounting screws
1111
[11-10]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removing the First Master Removal Unit
E
2.
Removing the round belt
OP
(1) Press the release lever to lower the master removal roller (bottom) assembly. (2) Detach the snap ring from the front side and remove the pulley shaft. (3) Detach the snap ring from the rear side, detach the springs from both sides, and remove the master removal roller (top).
> Install the black spring to the rear side. Snap ring for pulley shaft
Snap ring for master removal roller (top)
OE
UR
Springs
1112
Detach the snap ring, move the bearing metal out of the way, disengage the gears, and slide the shaft toward the front side.
1113
Detach the snap ring and springs and slide the shaft toward the rear. Washer
RIS
Spring Black spring for rear side
Snap ring
1114
Pulley shaft Master disposal roller (top) Master disposal roller (bottom)
1115 >
>
[11-11]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removing the master removal roller (bottom)
E
Press the release lever to lower the master removal roller (bottom) assembly. Remove the master transport gear bracket. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs) Remove the two spur gears. Detach the E-rings from the master removal roller (bottom) from the front and rear sides, remove the bearing metal, and dismount the master removal roller (bottom).
UR
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Master removal roller (bottom)
Spur gears
OE
Master transport gear bracket
1116
Removing the compression plate (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Keep the master removal roller (bottom) assembly at the raised position. Remove the compression gear cover (1). (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) Remove the spur gear and lower the compression plate. Remove the compression plate block. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 1 pc) Detach the E-rings from the compression plate shaft from both sides, detach the bearing metal, and dismount the compression plate.
>
RIS
When installing the compression gear cover (1), keep the compression plate in the raised position.
Compression plate block
Compression gear cover (1)
Spur gear
1117
>
[11-12]
1118
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removing the master removal roller unit and the master guiding plates Press the release lever to lower the master removal roller (bottom) assembly. Unplug the connector. (Keep the connector section away from the side plate.) Remove the springs from the front and rear sides. Remove the mounting screws from the front and rear sides from the outside of the side plates. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs each) (5) Gently push aside the side plate and remove the master removal roller unit. (6) Remove the E-ring from the master guide fulcrum shaft. (7) Slide the master guide fulcrum shaft and remove the master guiding plates.
OP
E
(1) (2) (3) (4)
UR
Springs
1119
OE
Mounting screws
1120
Mounting screws
1121
RIS
Also remove this section of the connector from the side plate.
Master guiding plate
1122
Master guide fulcrum shaft
[11-13]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removing the Second Master Removal Unit
E
3.
Removing the round belt
Press the release lever to lower the master removal roller (bottom) assembly. Detach the roller springs from both the front and rear sides of the master removal roller (top). Detach the snap ring from the rear side and remove the boss to which the spring was attached. Remove the E-ring from the front side and dismount the slide shaft bearing. Remove the master removal roller (top).
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
UR
>
Master removal roller (top)
Master removal roller (bottom)
1123
Slide shaft bearing
OE
Snap ring
RIS
Roller springs
1124 E-ring
[11-14]
>
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removing the master removal roller (bottom)
E
Press the release lever to lower the master removal roller (bottom) assembly. Remove the master transport gear bracket. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs) Remove the three spur gears. Detach the E-rings from both sides of the master removal roller (bottom), remove the bearing metal, and dismount the master removal roller (bottom).
OE
Master removal roller (bottom)
UR
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
RIS
Spur gears
[11-15]
Master transport gear bracket
1125
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removing the compression plate
E
Keep the master removal roller (bottom) assembly at the raised position. Remove the compression gear cover (2). (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs) Remove the compression plate block and lower the compression plate. Remove the sector gear. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 1 pc) Detach the E-rings from both sides of the compression plate shaft, detach the bearing metal, and dismount the compression plate.
>
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
When installing the compression gear cover (2), keep the compression plate in the raised position.
Spur gear
OE
UR
Compression plate block
1126
RIS
Compression gear cover (2)
1127
>
[11-16]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
Removing the second clamp unit
RIS
OE
UR
Mounting screws
OP
E
(1) Unplug the connectors at two locations. (2) Remove the mounting screws and dismount the unit. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 4 pcs)
1128
1129 >
[11-17]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
MEMO
[11-18]
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
UR
OE
RIS E
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 13 AF Scanning Section
Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 13-2 1.
AF Original Set Mechanism ................................................................................... 13-2
2.
AF Original Size-Detection Mechanism ................................................................. 13-4
3.
AF Set Detection Mechanism ................................................................................ 13-4
4.
AF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Auto Base Control) ................................. 13-5
5.
AF Original Scanning Mechanism ......................................................................... 13-6
UR
Removal and Assembly ..................................................................................................... 13-8 Removing the Original Pickup Roller Frame ........................................................ 13-8
2.
Removing the Original Pickup Roller .................................................................. 13-10
3.
Removing the Original Stripper Roller .................................................................. 13-11
4.
Removing the Original Stripper Pad Assembly ................................................... 13-12
5.
Removing the Original IN Sensor ....................................................................... 13-13
6.
Removing the AF Read Pulse Motor .................................................................... 13-14
7.
Removing Other Rollers ...................................................................................... 13-15
8.
Removing the AF-Guide-Potentiometer Ass’y ..................................................... 13-22
OE
1.
Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 13-23 1. 2. 3. 4.
AF Horizontal-Scanning Position Adjustment ..................................................... 13-23
AF Read Pulse-Motor Speed Adjustment (Image Elongation and Shrinkage Adjustment) .......................................................................................................... 13-23 AF Original Guide Fence Potentiometer Adjustment .......................................... 13-24
AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ...................................................... 12-24
RIS
5.
AF Scan Start-Position Adjustment ...................................................................... 13-23
[ 13 - 1 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
Mechanism 1. AF Original Set Mechanism
Shading-compensation operation range
AF-ABC position
RIS
I
OE
UR
OP
When an original is set along the original guide fence [K] and pushed up against the original stopper gate [A], the AF original detection sensor [B] turns ON (receives light) and the Master/Print indication on the panel changes to “Ready to make master.” After a set length of time, the AF read pulse motor operates in the reverse direction, lowering the pickup roller [C] in the direction indicated by the arrow and withdrawing the original stopper gate [A] upward. (In this step, the one-way clutch incorporated between the registration-roller gear and registration-roller shaft prevents the registration roller [D] from rotating.) When the pickup roller [C] descends and presses against the original, the pickup roller [C] and original stripper roller [E] rotate in the original transport direction, and a single original is fed forward by the action of the original stripper roller [E] and the original stripper pad [F]. This activates the AF original registration sensor [G] (light blocked), and the edge of the original is stopped by the stationary registration roller [D]. When the AF original registration sensor [G] turns ON, after a preset length of time the AF read pulse motor starts rotating in the forward direction. This raises the pickup roller [C] and turns the registration roller [D], the two read rollers [H] [L], the white roller [I], and the original ejection roller [J], all of which are linked by the timing belt, in the feed direction. The original stops temporarily when it moves 90 mm from the original set position. Meanwhile, when the AF original detection sensor [B] turns ON, the lamp carriage in the scanner unit conducts a series of operations from lamp illumination to shading compensation, then moves to the AF read position and stops in the standby mode. If the Start key is not pressed within 60 seconds, the lamp turns off and the lamp carriage returns to the home position. Only when the Start key is pressed, the shading compensation operation is conducted (as well as the auto-base-control operation if the original scanning density is set to AUTO), and the scanning operation begins. When the Start key is pressed within 60 seconds, the scanning operation starts immediately if the original scanning density is not set to AUTO. If it is set to AUTO, the lamp carriage returns to the home position, and the shading-compensation and auto-base-control operations are performed before the scanning operation starts.
3 mm
1301
8 mm
AF read position
M
HP sensor position
[ 13 - 2 ]
J
G
D
H
I
C
A
B
OP
L
E
E
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
Original feed
F
1302
J
RIS
H
B
D
A: B: C: D: E: F: G:
C
OE
I
E
UR
G
Original stopper gate AF Original detection sensor Pickup roller Registration roller Original stripper roller Original stripper pad AF original registration sensor
A
1303
K
H: Read roller 1 I: White roller J: Original ejection roller K: Original guide fence L: Read roller 2 M: Original stopper (AF)
[ 13 - 3 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
AF Original Size-Detection Mechanism
E
2.
The width of the original is detected by the AF guide potentiometer [B] linked to original guide fences [A], which are aligned with the original. The length of the original is detected by AF original size sensor 1 [C] and AF original size sensor 2 [D]. D
B
OP
C
UR
A
1337
A: Original guide fences B: AF guide potentiometer C: AF original size sensor 1
3.
OE
D: AF original size sensor 2
1338
AF Set Detection Mechanism
Whether the AF is closed over the stage glass or not is checked by the AF cover set sensor [E].
RIS
The AF cover set sensor [E] is attached on the AF unit. E
E: AF cover set sensor
1340
[ 13 - 4 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
4. AF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Automatic Base Control)
RIS
OE
UR
OP
(This operation only occurs when the original scanning density is set to “Auto.”) Once the AF original set operation is complete, pressing the Start key moves the lamp carriage to the shading position. After performing the shading-compensation operation, the lamp carriage moves to the AF-ABC position. Meanwhile, the AF read pulse motor rotates in the forward direction, rotating the registration roller, the two read rollers, the white roller, and the original ejection roller in the feed direction. After the AF original IN sensor turns ON (light blocked), the paper is fed for a distance of 22.5 mm and stops. At this position (AF-ABC position), the image sensor scans the surface density of the original. Then, the flatbed read pulse motor moves the lamp carriage back by 3 mm in the return direction (to the AF read position). The AF read pulse motor immediately rotates in the forward direction and, at the same time, the print signal turns ON and the original scanning operation starts. When a preset length of time elapses after the AF original IN sensor turns OFF (receives light) due to the passing of the original, the print signal turns OFF. As soon as the scanning operation is complete, the AF read pulse motor starts operating at high speed. When the AF original ejection sensor turns OFF, the original is sent a preset distance and then the AF read pulse motor stops. The lamp carriage returns to the home position, and the AF read operation ends. The auto-base control function is inactive in the Photo, mixed Text/Photo, and Dot-screening modes.
[ 13 - 5 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
5. AF Original Scanning Mechanism
UR
OP
When the Start key is pressed after the AF original set operation is complete, the AF read pulse motor [A] rotates in the forward direction, turning the registration roller [B], the two read rollers [C] [H], the white roller [D], and the paper ejection roller [E] in the feed direction. When the AF original IN sensor [F] turns ON (light blocked), the original is sent a distance of 25.5 mm, and then the print signal turns ON and the original scanning operation starts. (The pickup roller returns to the standby position.) When a preset length of time has elapsed after the AF Original IN sensor [F] turns OFF (receives light) due to the passing of the original, the print signal turns OFF and, at the same time, the AF read pulse motor [A] starts operating at high speed. After the AF original ejection sensor [G] turns OFF, the original is sent a preset distance, and then the AF read pulse motor [A] stops. The lamp carriage returns to the home position, and the AF read operation ends.
E
OE
B
D
F
G
C
RIS
H
[ 13 - 6 ]
1304
B
OP
A
UR
G
OE
E
F
D
C
AF read pulse motor Registration roller Read roller 1 White roller Paper ejection roller AF original IN sensor AF original ejection sensor Read roller 2
RIS
A: B: C: D: E: F: G: H:
E
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
[ 13 - 7 ]
1305
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
Removal and Assembly 1. Removing the Original Pickup Asembly
OP
(1) Remove the top cover [A] by loosening the screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the front of the top cover and removing the screws (4 x 10: 2 pcs) from the rear. (2) Disconnect the two connectors and the reusable band [C], remove the screws (M3 x 4: 2 pcs), and detach the sensor-bracket assembly [B].
RIS
OE
UR
A
1306
1307
B
C
A: Top cover B: Sensor-bracket assembly C: Reusable band
[ 13 - 8 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
D
E
OP
D
UR
E
E
(3) Remove the resin clips [D] from both sides, pull the bearing metals [E] toward the inside, and remove the original pickup assembly [F] by passing the drive gear on the rear of the assembly through the hole on the side panel.
1308
1309
OE
F
RIS
Rear
Original pickup assembly
D: Resin clip E: Bearing metal F: Original pickup assembly
[ 13 - 9 ]
Front 1310
1311
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
2. Removing the Original Pickup Roller
A
C
B
OE
UR
B
OP
(1) Remove the original pickup assembly (refer to the removal instructions in this Chapter). (2) Remove the resin clip [A], open the end of the K holder [B], and remove the pickup roller [C]. (Note that the K holder C [D] and parallel pin [E] may fall during disassembly.)
E
RIS
D
1313
Original pickup assembly
A: B: C: D: E:
1312
Resin clip K holder Original pickup roller K holder C Parallel pin
[ 13 - 10 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
3. Removing the Original Stripper Roller
OP
(1) Remove the original pickup assembly (refer to the removal instructions in this Chapter). (2) Remove the K holder C, parallel pin, and pickup roller (refer to the removal instructions in this Chapter). (3) Remove the resin clip [B] from the rear of the original stripper roller [A], and move the original stripper roller in the direction indicated by the arrow. (4) Remove the E-ring [D], move the K holder F assembly [C] slightly in the direction indicated by the arrow, pull out the parallel pin holding the K holder F assembly [C] in place from the shaft, and remove the K holder F assembly [C]. (5) Remove the original stripper roller [A].
UR
[Precautions on Reassembly] • When installing the parallel pin to hold the K holder F assembly in place, be sure to insert it into the shallower groove on the K holder F assembly. • The original stripper roller must be installed with the correct orientation. Be sure to position the gear side on the front of the machine. A
C
OE
B
Rear
Front 1314
RIS
D
A: B: C: D: E:
C
E
Original stripper roller Resin clip K holder F assembly E-ring Parallel pin
1315
Installation of the K holder F assembly and parallel pin
[ 13 - 11 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
Removing the Original Stripper Pad Assembly
E
4.
(1) Remove the original pickup assembly (refer to the removal instructions in this Chapter).
(2) Detach original stopper bracket [A] by removing one screw (M3 x 4), and remove the original stopper [B].
OP
(3) Using the original release lever [C], elevate down the original stripper section.
(3) Being careful not to drop the spring under the original stripper pad assembly [D], slide back the assembly to disengage it out from the hooks and then take it out from the AF unit through the opening.
[Precautions on Reassembly]
• In putting the original stripper pad assembly [D] back into the AF unit, place an adhesive tape [E] on the assembly (ref: photograph), and elevate down the original stripper section by using the
UR
original release lever [C]. Push the assembly down into the opening under the stripper sheet [F] and attach the spring firmly onto the assembly. • Use the attached adhesive tape to pull the original stripper pad assembly [D] to hook it onto the AF unit.
OE
• Remove the adhesive tape once the original stripper pad assembly [D] is fixed in its position.
1341
A
C
RIS
B
1342
D
F
1343
1345
E
A: Original stopper bracket B: Original stopper
C: Original release lever
D: Original stripper pad assembly E: Adhesive tape F: Stripper sheet
1344
D
[ 13 - 12 ]
F
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
5. Removing the AF Original IN Sensor
OP
(1) Remove the top cover by loosening the screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the front of the top cover and removing the screws (M4 x 10: 2 pcs) from the rear. (2) Remove the screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc), disconnect the connector, and remove the AF original IN sensor [A]. [Precautions on Reassembly] • Following reassembly, adjust the AF original IN sensor by using Test Mode No. 752 (AF-ReadSensor Sensitivity Adjustment).
OE
UR
A
RIS
A: AF original IN sensor
[ 13 - 13 ]
1316
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
6. Removing the AF Read Pulse Motor
OP
(1) Remove the top cover by loosening the screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the front of the top cover and removing the screws (M4 x 10: 2 pcs) from the rear. (2) Remove the screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc), and move the harness-bracket assembly [A] to the side. (3) Remove the open lever [B] together with the open-lever spring [C]. (4) Detach the tension spring [D], remove the mounting screws (M3 x 6: 2 pcs), and then remove the AF read pulse motor [E] together with the motor tension bracket [F]. E
UR
B
OE
1317
A
RIS
D
A: B: C: D: E: F:
Harness-bracket assembly Open lever Open-lever spring Tension spring AF read pulse motor Motor tension bracket
1318
F
C
1319
E
[ 13 - 14 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
7. Removing Other Rollers
1320
RIS
OE
A
UR
OP
(1) Detach the AF unit from the machine. (2) Remove the top cover by loosening the screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the front of the top cover and removing the screws (M4 x 10: 2 pcs) from the rear. (3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the Control PCB [A] (M3 x 6: 2 pcs). (4) Cut the band indicated by the arrow in the photograph, remove the mounting screws (PM4 x 10: 7 pcs; M4 x 10 + Washer: 2 pcs on the front), and detach the AF mechanism unit.
A: B: C: D: E: F: G: H:
1321
AF mechanism unit
Control PCB AF cover set sensor connector AF read pulse motor connector Ground wire Reusable band Ground wire from the harness-bracket assembly Harness-bracket assembly Sensor actuator disc
[ 13 - 15 ]
I: Actuator disc spring J: Motor-bracket ass’y K: Idler ass’y L: Idler spring M: Resin clip N: Spur gear O: Gear ass’y P: Timing belt No.1
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
OP
E
(5) Disconnect the AF cover set switch connector [B] and AF read pulse motor connector [C], and detach the ground wire [D] by removing screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc). (6) Remove the reusable band [E], detach the harness from the three harness clamps, and move the harness to the side. (7) Detach the ground wire [F] from the harness-bracket assembly by removing screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc). (8) Detach the harness-bracket assembly [G] by removing screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc). (9) Remove the sensor actuator disc [H] together with the actuator disc spring [I]. (10) Detach the motor-bracket assembly [J] by removing screws (M4 x 6: 4 pcs). (11) Loosen the idler assembly [K] securing screws, and remove the idler spring [L]. (12) Remove the resin clip [M], spur gear [N], E-ring, gear assembly [O], and timing belt No. 1 [P], in that order.
UR
[Precautions on Reassembly] • The gear assembly has a built-in one-way clutch. Be sure to install the gear assembly with the stamped face toward the front.
F
E
C
OE
J
B
D
1322
G
I
L
K
RIS
H
M
N
P
O
1323
[ 13 - 16 ]
B
D
E
OE
UR
OP
C
E
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
Front
Registration roller Read roller No. 1 White roller Read roller No. 2 Original ejection roller
RIS
A: B: C: D: E:
< Layout of the rollers >
A
[ 13 - 17 ]
1324
Rear
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
Removing the registration roller
OP
(13) Remove the timing pulley [A] from the rear side of the roller. Also remove the parallel pin [B] at the same time. (14) Remove the E-ring, and detach the bearing metal. (15) Remove the resin clip [C] from the front side of the roller, and detach the bearing metal. (16) Remove the registration roller [D].
A
UR
D
D
C
1325
A
B
D
Timing pulley Parallel pin Resin clip Registration roller
RIS
A: B: C: D:
OE
Rear
[ 13 - 18 ]
1326
Front
1327
C
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
Removing the read roller No. 1
OP
* Before removing the read roller No. 1, detach the registration roller. (13) Remove the resin clip [A] from the rear side of the roller, and detach the timing pulley [B]. Also remove the parallel pin [C] at the same time. (14) Remove the E-ring, and detach the bearing metal. (15) Remove the E-ring from the front side of the roller, and detach the dial [D]. Also remove the parallel pin [C] at the same time. (16) Remove the timing-pulley assembly [E], remove the E-ring, and detach the bearing metal. (17) Remove the read roller No. 1 [F].
UR
[Precautions on Reassembly] • The timing-pulley assembly [E] has a built-in one-way clutch. Be sure to install the gear assembly with the stamped face toward the front.
B
F
D
OE
A
1328
1329
F
RIS
Rear
A
A: B: C: D: E: F:
B
C
Front
1330
F
Resin clip Timing pulley Parallel pin Dial Timing-pulley assembly Read roller No.1
[ 13 - 19 ]
E
C
D
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
Removing the read roller No. 2
B
OP
(13) Remove the resin clip [A] from the rear side of the roller, and detach the timing pulley [B]. Also remove the parallel pin [C] at the same time. (14) Remove the E-ring, and detach the bearing metal. (15) Remove the resin clip [A] from the front side of the roller, and detach the bearing metal. (16) Remove the read roller No. 2 [D].
D
UR
D
A
A
1331
B
C
D
RIS
A
OE
Rear
A: B: C: D:
Resin clip Timing pulley Parallel pin Read roller No. 2
[ 13 - 20 ]
1332
Front
1333
A
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
Removing the original ejection roller
D
UR
B
OP
(13) Remove the resin clip [A] from the rear side of the roller, and detach the timing pulley [B]. Also remove the parallel pin [C] at the same time. (14) Remove the E-ring, and detach the bearing metal. (15) Remove the resin clip [A] from the front side of the roller, and detach the bearing metal. (16) Remove the original ejection roller [D].
D
A
A
1335
1334
A
B
C
D
Resin clip Timing pulley Parallel pin Original ejection roller
RIS
A: B: C: D:
OE
Rear
[ 13 - 21 ]
Front
1336
A
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
8. Removing the AF Original Guide Fence Potentiometer Assembly Open the AF unit. Detach the stage-cover assembly [A] by removing screws (M3 x 10+Plastic washer: 2 pcs). Detach the bottom cover [B] by removing screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc). Unplug connector, and remove the AF originial guide fence potentiometer assembly [E] by removing screws (M3 x 10: 2 pcs). [Precautions on Reassembly] • Before putting back the potentiometer assembly, slide the original guide fences [C] to the innermost (closed) position, and rotate the gear [D] of the potentiometer assembly in the counterclockwise direction all the way. Then rotate it back one tooth and mount the potentiomenter assembly back on the AF unit.
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
UR
• After the assembly is back on the AF unit, activate test mode No. 3045 [AF-guide min.-width VR value] with the original guide fence closed all the way. Then activate test mode No. 3046 [AF-guide max.-width VR value] with the original guide fence opened wide all the way.
OE
A
C
D
A: B: C: D: E:
Stage cove assembly Bottom cover Original guide fence Gear Potentiometer assembly
CLOSE CLOSE
RIS
1346
1348
E
B
1347
1349
1. Close the original guides all the way in. 2. Rotate the potentiometer in the counterclockwise direction all the way. 3. Then return it in the clockwise direction for one tooth and join the gears, and screw it back on the AF unit.
[ 13 - 22 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
1.
AF Scan Start-Position Adjustment
Test chart No.11
OP
Checks and procedure
E
Adjustment
(1) Place A3 size printing paper on the paper feed tray. Make 1 to 1 size master using test chart No.11 on the AF unit, and make prints.
(2) Examine the prints to confirm that the scanning start position is at 5 mm ± 2 mm on the top vertical scale on the test chart No.11 printed image.
2.
UR
(3) If the scanning start position does not fall within above specification, make an adjustment using test mode No.3073 (AF Scan Start Position Adjustment).
AF Horizontal-Scan Position Adjustment Checks and procedure
1351
Test chart No.14
(1) Place A3 size printing paper on the paper feed tray. Make 1 to 1 size master using test chart No.14 on the AF unit.
OE
(2) Examine the master created on the print drum, and confirm that the “e” images on the left and right of the original is not missing on the created master. (3) If not all the “e” images are made on the master, make adjustment using test mode No.3072 (AF Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment).
AF Read Pulse-Motor Speed Adjustment (Elongation & Shrinkage)
RIS
3.
1352
Checks and procedure
(1) Place A3 size printing paper on the paper feed tray. Make 1 to 1 size master using test chart No.11 on the AF unit, and make prints.
Test chart No.11
(2) Lay the print on top of the original to confirm that the image elongation or shrinkage is within ±1.0% at the 350-mm line of the test chart image. (3) If the elongation and shrinkage does not fall within this specification, make an adjustment using test mode No.3074 (AF Scanning Speed Adjustment). * Prior to adjustment, adjust the image elongation and shrinkage by first adjusting the write pulse-motor speed (see chapter 14). 1350
[ 13 - 23 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
E
4. AF Original Guide Fence Potentiometer Adjustment
UR
OP
Adjustment (1) Slide the original guide fence to the innermost (closed) position, and run test mode No. 3045 [AFguide min.-width VR value]. (2) Then slide the original guide fence to the outermost (opened) position, and run test mode No. 3046 [AF-guide max.-width VR value].
5. AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
RIS
OE
Adjustment (1) Without an original, execute Test Mode No. 3044 [AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment]. This will automatically adjust the sensitivity of the sensor. * This adjustment must be made after replacing the sensor.
[ 13 - 24 ]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 14-2 Overview of Master Making Section ........................................................................................ 14-2 Master Making Unit Transport Mechanism .............................................................................. 14-4 Thermal Print Head Elevation Operation ................................................................................ 14-5 Master Setting Operation ........................................................................................................ 14-6 Master Cutting Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 14-7 Master-making Operation ....................................................................................................... 14-8
UR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................... 14-9 Removing the Master Making Unit .......................................................................................... 14-9 Removing the Master Making Unit Drawer Cover Safety Switch .......................................... 14-11 Removing the Thermal Print Head Assembly ........................................................................ 14-12 Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor ................................................................................ 14-13 Removing the Write Pulse Motor and Write Roller ................................................................ 14-14 Removing the Cutter Unit ...................................................................................................... 14-15 Removing the First Clamp Unit ............................................................................................. 14-17 Removing the Master Making Unit Transport Pulse Motor .................................................... 14-18 Removing the Master Detection Sensor and Master End Sensor (Light Emitter) ................. 14-19
OE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 14-20 Clamp Range Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 14-20 Write Start Position Adjustment ............................................................................................. 14-20 Master-making Image Elongation and Shrinkage Adjustment ............................................... 14-20 Horizontal Write Position Adjustment .................................................................................... 14-21 Thermal Print Head Heating Value Setting ............................................................................ 14-21 Master Making Unit Stop Position Adjustment ...................................................................... 14-21 Master Cut Length Adjustment (Master Cut Angle) ............................................................... 14-22 Master Making Length Adjustment ........................................................................................ 14-22 Master Positioning Sensor Adjustment ................................................................................. 14-22
RIS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
[14-1]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
1.
E
Mechanism Overview of Master Making Section
OP
Thermal print head
Master end sensor (light receiver)
Thermal pressure motor
UR
TPH pressure sensor
Load roller (top)
Master stocker fan
Load roller (bottom)
Master positioning sensor
Master stocker roller (bottom) Write roller
OE
Master loading roller
Master stocker roller (top)
Master making unit sensor
1401
RIS
Load pulse motor
Cutter motor
Master roll
Cutter
Write pulse motor
1)
2)
Master detection sensor & master end sensor (light emitter)
Master making unit setting detection mechanism The master making unit sensor checks the master making unit for appropriate settings. If the master making unit is set correctly, the master setting operation is initiated. Master end detection The end of the master roll is confirmed when the master end sensor detects the black end mark attached to the tail end of the mater material on the master roll. The master end sensor checks every 10 ms while the master is being transported, and the indication [C02-200] is displayed when the end mark is detected twice in succession.
[14-2]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section Master making unit drawer cover setting detection mechanism Since the flatbed section cannot be opened or closed, the master making unit can be pulled out to replace the master roll. To pull out the master making unit, press the master making unit release button, move the master making unit to the pull-out position, and open the master making unit drawer cover. If the master making unit is at a position other than the pull-out position, the master making unit drawer cover is locked by the hook stopper. Moving the master making unit to the pull-out position applies pressure to the hook stopper and unlocks the cover. The master making unit drawer cover safety switch checks whether the master making unit drawer cover is closed. When the master making unit drawer cover safety switch is OFF, the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second master compression motor, first horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal pulse motor, cutter motor, and master making unit transport pulse motor cannot be switched ON.
OE
UR
OP
E
3)
RIS
This section presses against the hook stopper.
Master making unit release button
1402
Master making unit drawer cover
Master making unit drawer cover safety SW
[14-3]
Hook stopper
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Master Making Unit Transport Mechanism
E
2.
First master making unit position sensor
UR
Master making unit transport pulse motor
OP
During master-making, the master making unit is moved to the print drum side where the master is to be made. If the master roll has been replaced, the master making unit moves to the master making unit pull-out position. The master making unit transport pulse motor moves the master making unit. The position of the master making unit is confirmed by the first master making unit position sensor, second master making unit position sensor, and master making unit pull-out position sensor. The master making unit is initially positioned on the first print drum side.
Second master making unit position sensor
RIS
OE
Master making unit pull-out position sensor
1403
[14-4]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Thermal Print Head Elevation Operation
E
3.
OP
When the machine is on standby or when it is loading the master onto the print drum after master-making, the print thermal head is raised and moved away from the write roller. During master-making and master transfer operation, the thermal print head is lowered so that it firmly contacts the write roller. The thermal print head is raised or lowered by the rotation of the eccentric pressure cam, which is turned by the thermal pressure motor. The eccentric pressure cam moves the TPH bracket up and down as it rotates. The stop position of the vertical movement of the motor is detected by the TPH pressure sensor, whose light path is blocked by the sensor disc. If power is ON or if an all-reset operation is initiated, initialization commences, and the thermal print head is set in a position (elevated position) from which it does not apply pressure. Sensor disc
TPH bracket
OE
UR
TPH pressure sensor
Eccentric pressure cam
Thermal print head
Thermal pressure motor
Write roller
1404
RIS
>
1405 >
[14-5]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Master Setting Operation
E
4.
UR
OP
The master setting operation described below occurs when the master making unit cover is opened or closed and the master making unit sensor switches ON. First, the thermal print head is set to the pressure-applying position, and the write pulse motor rotates to feed the master (the write pulse motor rotates the write roller and master stocker roller (bottom) to transport the master). When the master positioning sensor switches ON, the motor halts. Next, the thermal print head is elevated to release pressure, and the write pulse motor rotates again to feed the master. Once the master is transported 20 mm, the motor halts. (master feed skew adjustment) The thermal print head returns to the pressure-applying position, and the write pulse motor rotates in reverse. After the master positioning sensor switches from ON to OFF, the motor halts when the master is moved back 5 mm (master front end position adjustment: distance of return action set in Test Mode No. 540), and the thermal print head is elevated to release pressure. The following operation occurs after the master-cutting operation: The thermal print head moves to the pressure-applying position, and the write pulse motor rotates in the feed direction. When the master positioning sensor switches ON, the write pulse motor rotates in reverse. After the master positioning sensor switches from ON to OFF, the motor stops when the master is moved back 5 mm (master front end position adjustment), and the thermal print head is elevated to release pressure.
Thermal print head
OE
Cutter unit
RIS
Master positioning sensor
[14-6]
1406
Write roller
Master stocker roller (bottom)
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Master Cutting Mechanism
E
5.
OP
The master is cut by the rotating blade on the cutter unit operated by the cutter motor. The cutter motor rotates in only one direction. The cutter home position switch checks the position of the rotating blade. When the cutter is at the home position, the cutter home position switch cannot be pressed. After the cutter motor begins rotating, the cutter home position switch can be pressed. When the switch cannot be pressed, the cutter motor halts.
OE
UR
Cutter home position switch
1407
RIS
Rotating blade
1408 Cutter motor
[14-7]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Master-making Operation
E
6.
Described below is the series of operations from master-making to loading masters onto the print drum.
OP
(1) At the start of master-making, the thermal print head moves to the pressure-applying position, causing the thermal print head and the write roller to clamp the master. The write pulse motor rotates to feed the master to the master positioning sensor. (2) The write pulse motor rotates in reverse to move the master back by the set length from the master positioning sensor, and the machine waits for scanning preparations to complete. (3) When the master-making operation is ready to start, the load pulse motor and the write pulse motor rotate to feed the master to the master loading standby position, and writing begins immediately. (4) Slightly before the master reaches the master loading standby position, the master stocker fan will begin operating. When the master reaches the master loading standby position, the load pulse motor halts and the produced master is sent to the stocker room.
UR
(5) When the print drum is ready to clamp the master, the load pulse motor rotates to move the leading edge of the master to the clamp plate base, after which the master clamp operation takes place. (6) When writing is completed, the thermal print head lifts to release pressure, and the print drum rotates to wrap the master around the print drum.
OE
Thermal print head
Master positioning sensor
Master stocker fan
1409
RIS
Master loading roller
Master stocker roller (bottom)
Load roller
[14-8]
Write roller
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
1.
Removing the Master Making Unit
E
Disassembly
OP
(1) Pull out the master making unit, switch off power, and remove the covers. • Cover top (upper right) (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs; note that one screw secures the bottle cap holder) • Master making unit inner cover (front) (bind, M3 x 6, 3 pcs) • Master making unit inner cover (rear) (bind, M3 x 6, 3 pcs) (2) Unplug the four ribbon cable connectors from the MMR-PCB, open the cable band, remove the cable guide (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc), and move the ribbon cable out of the way toward the rear.
Cover (upper right)
OE
Master making unit inner cover (front)
UR
Cover (bottle cap holder)
Ribbon cables (4 pcs)
1410
Cable band
RIS
MMR-PCB
Master making unit inner cover (rear)
Cable guide
1411
[14-9]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
OP
E
(3) Remove the shoulder screw from the front side and the snap ring from the rear side, and dismount the master making unit from the paper receiving tray side.
1412
>
UR
1413
1414
OE
• Do not loosen the screws on either side of the master making unit at the locations indicated in the photo on the right. The mounting positions of these screws were correctly adjusted at the factory. (Master making unit skew adjustment) Do not loosen these screws.
1415
RIS
• When installing the master making unit, adjust the engagement of the gears (shown in the photo on the right) on the front and rear sides to ensure that the master making unit is not tilted. As shown in the photo below, make sure that the sheet metal on the main unit side and the sheet metal on the master making unit are parallel.
1416 With the unit inserted into the installation position, make sure that these two sheet metal pieces are parallel. If the gears are displaced by a single tooth, a deviation of 2 to 3 mm will result.
1417
[14-10]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Removing the Master Making Unit Drawer Cover Safety Switch
E
2.
OP
(1) Pull out the master making unit and switch off power. (2) Remove the cover front (right). (3) Unplug the connector, and dismount the switch. (with washer, M3 x 14, 2 pcs)
UR
Master making unit drawer cover safety SW
RIS
OE
1418
[14-11]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Removing the Thermal Print Head Assembly Pull out the master making unit and switch off power. Disconnect the ground wire by loosening the screw (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc). Open the master making unit (top) cover. Detach the master making unit (bottom) cover. (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs)
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4)
E
3.
Master making unit (top) cover
UR
Ground wire
1419
Master making unit (bottom) cover
OE
(5) Remove the connector cover (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc) and unplug the connectors at two locations. (6) Detach the snap ring and remove the return-prevention spring and bearing metal. (7) Remove the bearing metal at the back side from the TPH bracket and dismount the thermal print head assembly.
>
After replacing the thermal print head, adjust the thermal print head heating value.
RIS
Connectors
Thermal print head
1420
Snap ring
Connector cover Bearing metal Return-prevention spring
Bearing metal
1421
TPH bracket
1422
[14-12]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Pull out the master making unit and switch off power. Dismount the thermal print head assembly. Remove the thermal pressure gear cover. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 4 pcs) Detach the thermal pressure springs from both sides. Detach the E-rings and bearing metal pieces from both sides and remove the TPH fulcrum shaft. Unplug the connector of the motor and sensor, remove the screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), and dismount the thermal pressure motor assembly.
OP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
E
Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor
1423
OE
Thermal pressure gear cover
UR
4.
RIS
Thermal pressure springs
Thermal pressure motor
1424 TPH fulcrum shaft
[14-13]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Removing the Write Pulse Motor and Write Roller
E
5.
>
OP
(1) Pull out the master making unit and switch off power. (2) Unplug the connector, remove the reusable band and mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), and dismount the write pulse motor assembly. When installing the write pulse motor assembly, be sure to correctly adjust the belt tension. Reusable band
UR
Connector
OE
Write pulse motor
1425
(3) Remove the pulley from the write roller. (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc) (4) Remove the write bracket (front). (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) (5) Pull out the write roller through the hole in the side plate and remove.
RIS
Platen bracket (front)
Pulley
Write roller
1427
1426
[14-14]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Removing the Cutter Unit
E
6.
OP
(1) Dismount the master making unit. (2) Remove the following parts: • Write pulse motor assembly • Write roller • Pulley
Write pulse motor
1428
UR
Write roller
1429
Pulley
RIS
OE
(3) Unplug the connector for the PCB bracket, bundle the wires, and remove the cutter cover assembly.
Cutter cover assembly
1430
1431
>
[14-15]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
E
(4) Unplug the connector, bundle the wires, and remove the two shoulder screws. (5) Detach the reusable band and dismount the cutter unit.
>
OP
When installing the cutter unit, set the unit toward the hole on the master roll side.
UR
Shoulder screws
OE
Cutter unit
RIS
>
[14-16]
1433
1432
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Removing the First Clamp Unit
E
7.
OP
(1) Dismount the master making unit. (2) Remove first clamp sensor A together with the bracket. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc) (3) Remove the clamp base plate. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 5 pcs) Note that the spring is hooked to the clamp base plate. First clamp sensor A
UR
Clamp base plate
Mounting screws
OE
1434
(4) Pull out the clamp transport cam (1) and the clamp cam (1). (5) Remove the snap ring and pull out the pulley. (6) Dismount the first clamp motor. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc) Pulley
RIS
Snap ring
Clamp transport cam (1)
Clamp cam (1)
[14-17]
First clamp motor
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Removing the Master Making Unit Transport Pulse Motor
E
8.
OE
UR
OP
(1) Dismount the master making unit. (2) Remove the mounting screw from the black pulley and slide the pulley toward the gear side to move it out of the way. (3) Remove the white pulley. (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc) (4) Unplug the connector and dismount the motor. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs)
Remove this screw. Move the pulley toward the outside to move it out of the way.
RIS
Master making unit transport pulse motor
1436
[14-18]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Removing the Master Detection Sensor and Master End Sensor (Light Emitter)
E
9.
OP
(1) Dismount the master making unit. (2) Open the master making unit cover and remove the master roll. (3) Remove the transport shaft brackets from the front and rear sides. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs each) Transport shaft brackets
UR
1437
>
1438
>
RIS
OE
(4) Remove the screws on the front and rear sides of the shaft of the set guide plate (B). (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) (5) Remove the shaft together with the set guide plate (B). * Gently push aside the side plate and pull out the shaft. * The front side of the shaft has a D-shape cut. Check the shaft position when installing. Set guide plate (B)
Shaft
1439
(6) Unplug the connector and dismount the sensor. (bind, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
1440
[14-19]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
1.
E
Adjustment Clamp Range Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedure
2.
Write Start Position Adjustment
UR
Checks and adjustment procedure
OP
(1) On the master, mark the end face position at the center of the clamp plate. (2) Measure the length from the marked position to the leading edge of the master at the center of the master, confirming that the length measured is 18 mm ± 1 mm. (3) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 543 (Masterclamp-range adjustment) and make adjustments. * Increasing the set value increases the master clamp force. Setting increments: 1 (0.1 mm)
3.
OE
(1) Run Test Mode No. 80 (Test Print A (Checkered)). (2) Remove the master from the clamp plate and measure the distance from the leading edge of the master to the write start position at the center of the master, confirming that the length measured is 63 mm ± 0.5 mm. (3) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 541 (Write startposition adjustment) and make adjustments. * Increasing the set value will move up the write start position on the master. (The distance between the leading edge of the master and the write start position becomes shorter.) Setting range: 1 (0.1 mm) * When adjusting the write start position, make sure that the master clamp range is within the range of standard values.
Master-making Image Elongation and Shrinkage Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedure
RIS
(1) Run Test Mode No. 81 (Test Print B (Crossed Lines)). (2) Make two prints. Place them in such way that the vertical print position of the first print is positioned on the right side and the vertical print position of the second print is at the top. Align the right sides of the prints, confirming that image elongation or shrinkage is less than ±1%. (Example: If the length is 400 mm, image elongation or shrinkage should be less than ±4 mm.) (3) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 547 (Mastermaking speed adjustment) and make adjustments for the first print drum. * Reducing the set value also reduces image size. Increasing the set value increases image size.
[14-20]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Horizontal Write Position Adjustment
E
4.
Checks and adjustment procedure
5.
OP
(1) Run Test Mode No. 386 (Activates or deactivates center black dot setting). (2) Without turning off power, exit Test Mode and make a master without an original on the scanner stage glass. (3) Pull out the print drum, confirming that the black line on the master is within 186 mm ± 1 mm of the inside of the flange on the rear side. (4) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 1233 (TPH master-making horizontal position adjustment) and make adjustments. * Increasing the set value will move the horizontal write position on the master toward the rear, potentially resulting in the image having missing portions when printed.
Thermal Print Head Heating Value Setting
UR
After replacing the thermal print head, you must set the thermal print head heating value before mastermaking. (1) Start Test Mode. (2) Run Test Mode No. 1234 (TPH resistance input) and enter the resistance value indicated on the sticker affixed to the thermal print head. (3) Press the Reset key to return to normal mode.
6.
Master Making Unit Stop Position Adjustment
OE
Checks and adjustment procedure
RIS
(1) Remove the cover (front upper), the cover (front left), and the cover (front right). (2) Run Test Mode No. 483 (Master-making Unit Positioning), confirming that the center of the transport shaft is within ±0.5 mm of the line connecting the stamped mark on the transport shaft retaining plate A and the stamped mark on the side plate. (3) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 550 (Mastermaking Unit Adjustment) and make adjustments. * If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, incorrect clamping pressure, wrinkling of the master during loading, and incorrect master loading may result. * Increasing the value set will move the master making unit toward the first print drum side.
[14-21]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
Master Cut Length Adjustment (Master Cut Angle)
E
7.
Checks and adjustment procedure
8.
OP
(1) Measure the length of the tail-end margin (distance from the end of the opening to the tail edge of the master) on the master loaded on the print drum, confirming that length is 9 mm ± 1.5 mm. (2) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 544 (Master cut length adjustment) and make adjustments. * Increasing the value set will increase the total length of each master.
Master Making Length Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedure
9.
UR
(1) Run Test Mode No. 80 (Test Print A (Checkered)). (2) Peel the master from the print drum. Measure the length of the master-making area, confirming that this value is 413 mm. (3) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 542 (Mastermaking length adjustment) and make adjustments. * Increasing the value set increases the master-making area.
Master Positioning Sensor Adjustment
After replacing the master positioning sensor, perform the following adjustment:
Checks and adjustment procedure
RIS
OE
(1) Pull out the master making unit. Rewind the master if a master is set. (2) Remove the master making unit cover (front). (3) Connect a multimeter to pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative) of the connector (CN11) for the master making unit PCB. (4) Confirm that the voltage is 1.0 V ± 0.2 V. (5) If the measured voltage deviates from the range of standard values, turn VR1 and VR2 fully clockwise. (6) Turn the VR1 (coarse adjustment) counterclockwise until the voltage reaches approximately 2 V. (7) Turn the VR2 (fine adjustment) counterclockwise until the voltage is within the range of standard values (1.0 V ±0.2 V).
[14-22]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Operating Method ................................................................................................................... 15-2 1) Launching Test Mode ....................................................................................................... 15-2 2) Operation ......................................................................................................................... 15-2 3) Ending Test Mode ............................................................................................................ 15-2 2. Testing Methods ...................................................................................................................... 15-3 3. System Panel Test Mode ........................................................................................................ 15-4 4. Imaging/Scanning Test Mode .................................................................................................. 15-9 5. Master-making/Disposal Test Mode ...................................................................................... 15-12 6. Paper Feed/Eject Test Mode ................................................................................................. 15-16 7. Print Drum/Print Adjustment Test Mode ................................................................................ 15-20 8. Protected Area Test Mode ..................................................................................................... 15-26 9. Test Mode for Optional Unit (AF) ........................................................................................... 15-29 10. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Job Separator) ......................................................................... 15-31 11. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Storage Memory) ..................................................................... 15-32 12. Test Mode for Optional Unit (LBP) ........................................................................................ 15-33
RIS
OE
UR
1.
[15-1]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Operating Method 1)
E
1.
Launching Test Mode
2)
OP
To start Test Mode, switch on power while simultaneously pressing the < > and < > keys for first print drum position adjustment on the operation panel. This sets the machine in Test Mode standby status. Operation
A Test Mode No. can be entered (selected) via keys or by selecting from the menu.
b)
Selecting from the menu (1) When the machine is in the standby status, select a unit from the Test Mode menu that includes the test item to be executed. * Press with a finger on the name of a desired unit on the LCD screen. (This highlights the selected unit name.) * The screen displays the Test Mode sub-menu. (2) Select the test item to be executed from the Test Mode sub-menu. * Press with a finger on Test Mode operations on the LCD screen. (This highlights the selected test name.) (3) Press the Start key to start the Test Mode operations. (4) Press the Stop or Start key to exit Test Mode and set the machine in non-operating or standby status. * When parameters are being set, pressing the Start key after changing data registers the data and sets the machine in standby status. Pressing the Stop key cancels the setting and places the machine in standby.
OE
UR
Using keys (1) When the machine is in standby status, enter a desired Test Mode No. using the ten-key pad. To correct input, press the < C > key and press the desired key. (2) Press the Start key to start Test Mode operations. (3) Press the Stop or Start key to exit Test Mode operations and to set the machine in nonoperating or standby status. * When parameters are being set, pressing the Start key after changing data registers the input data and sets the machine in standby status. Pressing the Stop key cancels the setting and places the machine in standby.
Ending Test Mode
When the machine is in Test Mode standby status or in Test Mode non-operating status, depress the Reset key for 1 or more seconds to exit Test Mode.
RIS
3)
a)
[15-2]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Testing Methods 1)
E
2.
Sensor/switch check
2)
OP
The statuses of the sensors and switches are indicated by a buzzer. • Detecting condition: The buzzer beeps at intervals of 0.1 seconds (quick successive beeps) • Non-detecting condition: The buzzer beeps at intervals of 0.5 seconds (slightly-prolonged successive beeps) Motor/solenoid check
Pressing the Start key switches the motor/solenoid ON. Pressing the Start or Stop keys halts the motor/solenoid. * Note that since error checks are not performed during operations, the moving section may become locked at a limit position if one is set. 3)
Unit operation check
4)
Data clear
UR
(1) Press the Start key to operate the unit. In general, ordinary error checks will be performed. Some units will stop after completing a series of operations, while others continue operating until a key (Stop key or Start key) is pressed. (2) An error will result in a continuous buzzer sound. Press the Reset key to clear the error.
Press the Start key to start the operation. The screen will display . After a brief period during which this indication is displayed, the operation halts automatically, and the screen displays . Data check
OE
5)
Press the Start key to display settings and parameters. * Set values are displayed but cannot be changed during data check operation. (6) Data set
RIS
(1) Pressing the Start key to change the currently displayed settings and parameters. (2) Change the data using the ten-key pad. Use the < * > key to switch between +/- indications. (3) After changing a set value, press the Start key to register the data. The machine will enter standby status. Pressing the Stop key cancels the setting and places the machine in standby. * Entering a value outside the permissible range will return the setting to the default value. Entering a value incompatible with the setting unit will return the setting to the default value.
[15-3]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
No.
Sensor/switch
E
System Panel Test Mode Detecting condition
Print drum changeover
0001 Wakeup Key
The key pressed.
0002 Solenoid Counter Connection Signal
The solenoid counter is connected.
–
0003 24V A output signal
24V-A ON (there is a 24V output)
–
0004 24V B output signal
24V-B ON (there is a 24V output)
–
0005 Rear Cover Safety SW
Switch ON (main unit rear cover is installed)
No.
Motor/solenoid
0062 Wakeup LED
Unit check
0083 0084 0085
0087
0088 0094 0095
RIS
0097
UR
0082
Test Print A (Checkered) Creates a master with Test Pattern 1 (Checkered). Test Print B (Crossed Lines) Creates a master with Test Pattern 2 (Crossed Lines). Test Print C (Dot 1) Creates a master with Test Pattern 4 (Dot 1). Test Print D (Dot 2) Creates a master with Test Pattern 5 (Dot 2). Test Print E (Dot 1 + Crossed Lines) Creates a master with Test Pattern 6 (Dot 1 + Crossed Lines). Test Print F (Dot 2 + Crossed Lines) Creates a master with Test Pattern 7 (Dot 2 + Crossed Lines). Paper-Feed Test (continuous feeding) Prints continuously. * The Speed key is enabled. * If the rear cover safety switch is OFF, the operation begins when the rear cover safety switch is turned ON within 10 seconds after the START key is turned ON. Low-Speed Printing Operation Prints continuously at 15 rpm. Unit Initialization Returns mechanical moving units to their home positions. (scanner, thermal print head, compression plate, clamp units, vertical print position, printing pressure) System Configuration Data Output Creates a master for CI system data. System Parameter & Error Record Print Creates a master of the list of data setting changes and error history. * The master is created by the first print drum.
OE
0081
Remarks
The LED illuminates.
No. 0080
–
OP
3.
–
Print drum changeover –
Print drum changeover A A A A A A
A
A – B B
(Note) Meaning of symbols used in the column in the Test Mode chart. A : , , or can be selected. B : or can be selected. – : Irrelevant for print drum.
[15-4]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Unit check
E
No.
Machine Clock Activation Writes the time information set in Test No. 0171 to No. 0173 to the RTC and starts the time count. Pressing the Start key begins the operation and automatically stops it after 0.5 seconds. DSP Download (Main, Secondary) 0102 Pressing the Start key begins download of the DSP program for controlling the main motor and second paper feed. No.
Data clear
0110 Clearing Jam Status Data
0112
Clearing Normal Area Test-Mode Data Memory
0113 Maintenance Count Clear (master making)
0115 Maintenance Count Clear (print drum) 0116 Setup Wizard Initialize
No.
Normally, when a paper jam occurs, the error can be cleared only by following the jam reset procedure and removing the cause of the jam. However, this setting will force an error caused by jamming to be cleared. Note that errors involving consumables cannot be cleared. Clears data (memory function, programs, properties settings, etc.) in the user area (data returned to default values). * Be sure to record all data before executing this function. Returns all settings stored in the main unit FRAM and main unit EEPROM in the Test Mode to their default values. * Does not clear data in protected areas. * Be sure to record all data before executing this function. Resets the maintenance master counter in maintenance call message. Resets the maintenance copy counter in maintenance call message. Resets the maintenance print-drum print counter in maintenance call message. Initializes the user business type setting, basic screen setting, and mode transition system selection. (There is no need to reset the clock.) Returns all settings stored in the print drum EEPROM in the Test Mode to their default values. * Does not clear data in protected areas. * Be sure to record all the data before executing this function.
OE
0114 Maintenance Count Clear (printing)
0117
Details
UR
0111 Clearing User Memory
Clearing Normal Area Test-Mode Data Memory
Data check
RIS
0120 System Parameter Adjustment Record
0121 SW Action Record
0122 Error Record
0123 Maintenance Count
0126 Optional Configuration Check
–
–
OP
0101
Content of display
Displays a list of Test Mode Nos. and settings for non-default items in the values set. * Items with Nos. from 1200 to 1299 are not displayed. Displays the error codes (D**) for the switches causing operation shutdown. * Displays the eight most recent error codes. Displays a list of error codes for errors (error type: T, A, B) previously generated in normal mode. * Displays the 64 most recent error codes.
Displays the values for all maintenance counters. Displays a list of all connected peripherals or optional equipment (AF, ST sorter, NIC).
[15-5]
Print drum changeover
–
–
–
– – B –
B
Print drum changeover –
–
– – –
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Data check
Content of display
Print drum changeover
E
No.
OP
Paper size on feed tray is displayed by ID numbers.
UR
0135
Identifies and displays a paper ID determined based on information from the paper width potentiometer and paper size detection sensor. * Paper IDs and paper sizes 00: No paper 02: B4 01: A3 04: A4 landscape 03: A4 06: B5 landscape 05: B5 08: A5 landscape 07: A5 10: B6 landscape 09: B6 12: Postcard landscape 11: Postcard 14: Legal 13: Ledger 16: Letter landscape 15: Letter 17: Statement 18: Statement landscape 19: Foolscap 50: Paper size undefined 1 (paper size detection sensor: ON) 51: Paper size undefined 2 (paper size detection sensor: OFF)
Data setting
No.
–
Print drum changeover
Maintenance-Master Count Entry Description
Sets the number of masters at which the maintenance call message is displayed.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 9999 (x 100) sheets Setting unit: 1 (x 100) sheets Default: 0 sheet
0143
–
Maintenance-Copy Count Entry
Sets the number of prints at which the maintenance call message is displayed.
OE
Description 0144
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 9999 (x 1000) sheets Setting unit: 1 (x 1000) sheets Default: 0 sheet
–
Maintenance-Drum Meter Entry Description 0145
Setting
Sets the number of print-drum pressurizing times at which the maintenance call message is displayed (data stored in print drum PCB). Setting range: 0 to 9999 (x 1000) sheets Setting unit: 1 (x 1000) sheets Default: 0 sheet
B
Print Quantity Reset Setting 0150 Description
Sets whether the print count value is reset or not when continuous print is set to OFF.
–
Setting range: 0 (Reset disabled), 1 (Reset enabled) Default: 0 (Reset disabled) Print Speed After Short Interval
RIS
Setting
0151 Description
Enables/disables the gradual print speed acceleration operation.
–
Setting range: 0 (Disabled), 1 (Enabled) Default: 0 (Disabled) Master-making Speed Mode Selection
Setting
0153 Description
Switches between normal and high-speed master-making modes.
–
Setting range: 0 (Normal speed), 1 (High speed) Default: 0 (Normal speed) Minimum Print Quantity Control Setting
0154 Description Setting
Enables/disables the minimum print quantity setting in the properties setting. Setting range: 0 (Setting change disabled), 1 (Setting change enabled) Default: 0 (Setting change enabled)
[15-6]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Data setting
E
No. Counter Action Control
Enables/disables the counters (solenoid counter, software counter). This setting is effective until the power switch is turned OFF. Once the power switch is turned OFF, the setting returns to default (enabled). Setting range: 0 (Disabled), 1 (Enabled) Setting Default: 1 (Enabled) Display Control
OP
0155 Description
Enables/disables the display of warning (F02, F10, F43) at the start of master-making or printing. Setting range: 0 (Warning display disabled), 1 (Warning display enabled) Setting Default: 1 (Warning display enabled) Auto Print Repeat Setting
0159 Description
Sets whether the print repeat setting is turned OFF or automatically reset at the end of print repeat. Setting range: 0 (Off), 1 (Reset) Setting Default: 0 (Off) First Program Print Repeat Setting
UR
0160 Description
Enables/disables the reset of the program setting when the print repeat setting is turned OFF. Setting range: 0 (Reset disabled), 1 (Reset enabled) Setting Default: 0 (Reset disabled) RLP Mode Switch Timing Control
0161 Description
Description
Adjusts screen switching time in RLP automatic allocation.
Setting
Setting range: –5 to +5 (0 to 2.5 sec) Setting unit: 1 (0.25 sec) Default: 0 (1.25 sec)
0165
Max. Print Quantity Control
Setting
–
–
–
–
Enables/disables the maximum print quantity setting; sets maximum print quantity.
OE
Description 0166
–
Setting range: 0 to 9999 (0 to 9999 sheets) Setting unit: 1 (1 sheet) Default: 0 (0 sheet) Maximum quantity restriction not set
–
Paper ID Auto-Repeat Control Description 0167
Setting
Selects whether the paper size setting reverts to the default setting or the previous setting is maintained when the power is turned ON or the all-reset operation is initiated. Setting range: 0 (Paper size setting is maintained.) 1 (Paper size setting reverts to default value.) Default: 0 (Paper size setting is maintained.)
–
Fine Adjustment Button Display Control Description
Used to display or hide the fine adjustment button.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (Hidden) 1 (Display) Default: 0 (Hidden)
RIS
0168
–
Display Control Description
Used to display or hide the properties setting tab.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (Hidden) 1 (Display) Default: 1 (Display)
0169
–
Consumable Storage Indication Description
Used to display or hide consumable storage items in the properties display.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (Hidden) 1 (Display) Default: 1 (Display)
0170
–
[15-7]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Data setting
E
No. Machine Clock Setting (YEAR)
0171
Setting
Machine Clock Setting (MONTH & DATE)
0172
Setting
Sets the in the setting in the RTC. * Test Mode No. 0101 must be activated after values are entered in Test Mode No. 0171 through No. 0173. Executing Test No. 0101 registers the values set in Test Mode No. 0171 through No. 0173 into the RTC. Setting range: Two upper digits: 01 to 12 (January to December), two lower digits: 01 to 31 (1st day to 31st day) Setting unit: 1 Default: 0101 before RTC is set (before Test No. 0101 is executed) RTC measured value at the time of test activation after RTC is set (after Test No. 0101 is executed)
UR
Description
OP
Description
Sets the in the setting in the RTC. * Test Mode No. 0101 must be activated after values are entered in Test Mode No. 0171 through No. 0173. Executing Test No. 0101 registers the values set in Test Mode No. 0171 through No. 0173 into the RTC. Setting range: 2000 to 2199 (Year 2000 to 2199) Setting unit: 1 (1 year) Default: 2000 before RTC is set (before Test No. 0101 is executed) RTC measured value at the time of test activation after RTC is set (after Test No. 0101 is executed)
–
–
Machine Clock Setting (HOUR & MINUTE)
Description
Setting
OE
0173
Sets in the RTC. * Test Mode No. 0101 must be activated after values are entered in Test Mode No. 0171 through No. 0173. Executing Test No. 0101 registers the values set in Test Mode No. 0171 through No. 0173 into the RTC. Setting range: Two upper digits: 00 to 23 (0 to 23 o’clock), two lower digits: 00 to 59 (00 to 59 minutes) Setting unit: 1 Default: 0000 before RTC is set (before Test No. 0101 is executed) RTC measured value at the time of test activation after RTC is set (after Test No. 0101 is executed)
–
Software Option Enable Control Description 0199
RIS
Setting
The software option is enabled when the key code (8 digits) is entered and the Start key is pressed. Setting range: 00000000 to 99999999 Setting unit: 1 Default: 00000000
[15-8]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
E
Imaging/Scanning Test Mode Sensor/switch
No.
Detecting condition
Print drum changeover
0200 Carriage HP sensor
The scanner is at the home position.
–
0201 Flatbed Original Det. Sensor
Light received (original present)
–
0202 Flat Bed Original Size Detection Sensor 1
Light received (original present)
–
0203 Flat Bed Original Size Detection Sensor 2
Light received (original present)
–
0204 Flat Bed Original Size Detection Sensor 3
Light received (original present)
–
0205 Flat Bed Original Size Detection Sensor 4
Light received (original present)
–
0206 Flat Bed Original Size Detection Sensor 5
Light received (original present)
–
0209 Compression plate open/shut sensor
The original stage cover is closed.
OP
4.
Motor/solenoid
No.
Remarks
0260 Scanner lamp
Switches scanner lamp ON/OFF. Unit check
UR
No.
Carriage Home Action Returns the scanner to the home position. Scanner Cycle Continuous Action 0284 Repeats the scanner operation (A3 scanning, ABC enabled). Scanner Lamp Replace Positioning 0287 Moves the scanner to the lamp replacement position. Scanner Positioning 0289 Moves the scanner to the machine transport position. 0281
Data setting
No.
–
Print drum changeover –
Print drum changeover – – – –
Print drum changeover
Line-Copy Slice Level Adjustment
Setting range: –16 to +16 Setting Setting unit: 1 Default: 0 Auto Base Control (ABC) Slice Level Adjustment Description
0341
* ( for reduced density)
–
* ( for reduced density)
–
Adjusts the slice level for text mode (auto scanning density).
Setting range: –16 to +16 Setting Setting unit: 1 Default: 0 Halftone Curve Selection (Photo) Description
Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves for photo mode.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 8 Setting unit: 1 Default: 4
RIS
0350
Adjusts the slice level for text mode (scanning density 3).
OE
Description 0340
–
Halftone Curve Selection (Dot Photo) Description
Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves in photo & dot mode.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 8 Setting unit: 1 Default: 4
0351
–
Halftone Curve Selection (Duo) Description
Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves in text/photo mode.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 8 Setting unit: 1 Default: 4
0352
–
Halftone Curve Selection (Dot Duo) Description
0353
Setting
Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves in text/photo & dot mode. Setting range: 0 to 8 Setting unit: 1 Default: 4
[15-9]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
E
Data setting
No. Trimming Slice Level Adjustment Description
Sets the slice level for the trimming.
Setting
Setting range: –16 to +16 Setting unit: 1 Default: –2
* ( for reduced density)
OP
0359
Inside-border Paint Range Setting Description
Sets the number of dots on the inside of the area designating border which are included in the area specifying border for deletion from the master data in specified area separation. * Actual change takes place in the unit of . Increasing this value increases the border area to be deleted.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (0 dot on the inside of border) 1 (1 dot on the inside of border) 2 (2 dots on the inside of border) 3 (3 dots on the inside of border) Default: 1 (1 dot on the inside of border)
0362
Outside-border Paint Range Setting
–
–
UR
Sets the number of dots on the outside of the area designating border which are included in the area specifying border for deletion from the master data in specified area separation. * Actual change takes place in the unit of . Increasing this value increases the border area to be deleted.
Description
Sets the number of dots on the outside of the area designating border which are used as a separation border (range) in traced color separation. * Actual change takes place in the unit of . Increasing this value broadens the border range (area to be separated).
0363
Setting range: 0 (0 dot on the outside of border) 1 (1 dot on the outside of border) 2 (2 dots on the outside of border) 3 (3 dots on the outside of border) Default: 1 (1 dot on the outside of border)
OE
Setting
–
FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjust Description 0380
Setting
Adjusts the original horizontal scan position on the flatbed. A separate setting is required for AF. Setting range: –30 to +30 (–3.0 mm to +3.0 mm) *( for adjustment left) Setting unit: 5 (0.5 mm) Default: 0 mm
–
FB Scan Start Position Adjust 0381
Description
Adjusts the original scanning start position (amount of scan skip) on the flatbed.
Setting
Setting range: –40 to +40 (–4.0 mm to +4.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 mm
*( for adjustment up)
–
*( to stretch)
–
FB Scanning Speed Adjustment
Adjusts the original scanning speed on the flatbed.
Setting
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 % to +5.0 %) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 %) Default: 0 %
RIS
Description
0382
Activates or deactivates center black dot setting
Description
0386
Setting
Adds a thin black line at the center of image data on the scanned image during printing in normal master-making and RLP output. * The thin center black line is added only when using image data scanned by the scanner. Setting range: 0 (Without thin center black line) 1 (With thin center black line) Default: 0 (Without thin center black line)
–
Hand-written Color Separation Pen Extraction Lower-limit Density
Description
0389
Setting
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for hand-written color separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 100 (Unspecified)
[15-10]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Hand-written Color Separation Pen Extraction Upper-limit Density 0390 Setting
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for hand-written color separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 220
OP
Description
E
Data setting
No.
–
Hand-written Color Separation (Ink) Pen Extraction Lower-limit Density Description 0391 Setting
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for hand-written color separation (ink). Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 90
–
Hand-written Color Separation (Ink) Pen Extraction Upper-limit Density 0392 Setting
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for hand-written color separation (ink). Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 180
UR
Description
–
Red-color Separation Pen Extraction Lower-limit Density Description 0393 Setting
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for red-color separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 100
–
Red-color Separation Pen Extraction Upper-limit Density Description 0394
OE
Setting
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for red-color separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 220
–
Specified Area Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Lower-limit Value) Description 0395
Setting
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for specified area separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 125
–
Specified Area Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Upper-limit Value) Description 0396
Setting
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for specified area separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 220
–
RIS
Traced Color Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Lower-limit Value) Description
0397
Setting
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for traced color separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 100
–
Traced Color Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Upper-limit Value) Description
0398
Setting
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for traced color separation. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 255
–
Edge Emphasis Threshold Offset Description
Sets the offset for the following Test Mode setting value.
Setting
Setting range: –128 to 127 Setting unit: 1 Default: 0
0399
–
[15-11]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
E
Master-making/Disposal Test Mode Sensor/switch
No.
Detecting condition
Print drum changeover
Light received (master detected)
–
0401 Master detection sensor
Light path blocked (master detected)
–
0402 Master end sensor
Light path blocked (master end mark detected)
–
0403 Cutter HP SW
Switch OFF (cutter at home position)
–
0406 TPH pressure sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0407 Master-making-unit set sensor
Light path blocked (master making unit cover closed)
–
0410 Master-making-unit releasing button
Switch ON (button depressed)
–
0411 Master-making Unit Position Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0412 Master-making Unit Pull-out Position Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0413
Master-making Unit Drawer Cover Safety Switch
0420 Master-disposal Jam Sensor
OP
0400 Master-positioning sensor
Switch ON (master making unit cover closed) * The rear cover safety SW must be ON during this procedure. Light received (master detected)
UR
5.
– B B
0423 Master-disposal BOX safety SW
Switch ON (master disposal box set in machine) * For inspections of the first print drum side, the rear cover safety switch and the master-making unit drawer cover safety switch must be ON during this procedure. * For inspections of the second print drum side, the rear cover safety switch, the master-making unit drawer cover safety switch, and the first master disposal box safety switch must be ON during this procedure.
B
0425 Master-compression motor FG sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0426 Master-removal motor FG sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
No.
OE
0421 Master-compression HP Sensor
Light path blocked (master compression plate at home position)
Motor/solenoid
Remarks
Print drum changeover
0460 Thermal-pressure motor (CW)
Rotates clockwise (CW).
–
0461 Thermal-pressure motor (CCW)
Rotates counterclockwise (CCW).
–
0462 Write pulse motor (CW)
Rotates clockwise (master feeding).
–
0463 Write pulse motor (CCW)
Rotates counterclockwise (master returning).
–
0464 Load pulse motor (CW)
Rotates clockwise (master feeding).
–
Rotates counterclockwise (master returning).
–
0465 Load Pulse Motor CCW (Reverse)
RIS
0466 Write pulse motor + Load pulse motor (CW) 0467 Master-making-unit release button LED
Rotate both write pulse motor and load pulse motor in master-feed direction. The LED of the master-making unit release button illuminates.
0468 Master Stocker Fan
0470 Master removal motor (CW) No.
0480 0481 0482 0483
0484 0490
– – –
Rotates to feed master into the master disposal box. Unit check
Cutter motor 1 cycle motion Cuts the master. Thermal pressure motor action (TPH down) Moves the TPH to the pressure application position. Thermal pressure motor action (TPH up) Moves the thermal print head to the pressure-releasing position (i.e., moves it out of the way). Master-making Unit Positioning Moves the master-making unit to the master-making position on the first or second print drum Master-making Unit Pull-Out Position Moves the master-making unit to the pull-out position. Master compression-plate home positioning Returns the compression plate to the home position.
[15-12]
B Print drum changeover – – – B – B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Unit check
E
No.
Master compression-plate continuous movement Repeats the removed master compacting operation. A cycle consisting of compacting cycle action -> 3-second standby is repeated. Cutter motor ON action (cut direction) 0494 Rotates the cutter motor in the cutting direction. (maximum time: 10 sec) Data check
No.
–
Print drum changeover
Content of display
0521 TPH thermistor temperature data 0522 Platen Temperature Sensor (A/D) 0523 Platen Temperature Sensor (°C)
Displays the temperature value converted from the A/D value of the TPH thermistor. Displays the A/D value for the temperature around the write roller. Displays the temperature value converted from the A/D value of the temperature around the write roller. Displays the voltage (x 100) applied to the thermal print head immediately after power is supplied to the thermal print head. Displays the master start date (year/month/date) stored in the master tag. * For example, is displayed by alternating indications of and .
UR
0524 TPH power voltage
0527 Master usage start date
B
OP
0493
– – –
–
Print drum changeover
Data setting
No.
–
Master Front-End Position Adjust Description 0540
OE
Setting
Adjusts the distance of the slight return movement activated after the master positioning sensor switches OFF to perform the incremental movement required following the master cutting operation during master setting. Setting range: 0 to 100 (0 mm to 10.0 mm) * ( for return direction) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 50 (5.0 mm)
–
Write start-position adjustment Description 0541
Setting
Adjusts the master-making start position. (Adjusts the master stop position immediately before write start operation by modifying the distance of the return movement from the master positioning sensor.) * ( for adjustment up) Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
–
Master-making length adjustment 0542
Description
Adjusts the master-making area (sub-scanning length).
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0 mm to +10.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
* ( to increase length)
–
* ( to increase)
B
Master-clamp-range adjustment
Adjusts the master clamp range during master-loading.
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0 mm to +10.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
RIS Description
0543
Master cut length adjustment Description
Adjusts the length of a single master (cutting timing). Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°)
0544
Setting
* (1°C = approx. 1.5 mm, for increased master length)
Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
[15-13]
B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
E
Data setting
No. Master-making speed adjustment 0547 Setting
Regulates the speed of the write pulse motor to adjust image stretching/shrinkage during master-making. Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0% to +10.0%) * ( to stretch) Setting unit: 1 (0.1%) Default: 0 (0%)
OP
Description
Write Roller Diameter Adjustment Description
Corrects differences in write roller diameters.
Setting
Setting range: 2305 to 2315 (23.05 mm to 23.15 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.01 mm) Default: 2310 (23.10 mm)
0548
Platen Temperature Adjustment Enable/Disable
0549 Setting
Enables/disables automatic adjustment of image stretching/shrinkage due to expansion/contraction caused by write roller temperature fluctuations. Setting range: 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) Default: 1 (Enabled)
UR
Description
B
–
–
Master-making Unit Adjustment Description
Adjusts the master-making unit stop position for master-making.
Setting
Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 mm to +2.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
0550
B
Master-making Unit Pull-Out Position Adjustment Description
Adjusts the master-making unit stop position for removal.
Setting
Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 mm to +2.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
OE
0551
–
Master compression-limit position (maximum end position) Description 0573
B
Setting range:
122 to 180 (122 to 180 pulses) (Compression plate angle from home position: 75° to 110°) Setting Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse) Default: 163 pulses (Compression plate angle from home position: 100°) Master compression duration adjustment Description
0575
Sets the pulse count for the compacting limit position.
RIS
Setting
Sets the time (time for single cycle of compacting FG) for the detection of compacting. * The compacting operation finishes when the one cycle time of the compacting FG exceeds the set time. Setting range: 500 to 5600 (5 msec to 56 msec) Setting unit: 25 (0.25 msec) Default: First print drum side in A3 machine: 4100 (41msec) Second print drum side in A3 machine: 3800 (38msec) First print drum and second print drum sides in B4 machine: 3700 (37msec)
B
Master disposal box full detection position adjustment
Description
Sets the pulse count for the full box compacting position. Setting range:
0576
Setting
73 to 163 (73 to 163 pulses) (Compression plate angle from home position: 45° to 100°) Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse) Default: 162 pulses (Compression plate angle from home position: 99°)
[15-14]
B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
E
Data setting
No. Master disposal motor speed selection
0578 Setting
Selects the master disposal motor speed table relative to master removal print drum speed. Setting range: 0 (0.8 times the speed) 1 (0.9 times the speed) 2 (1.0 times the speed) 3 (1.1 times the speed) 4 (1.2 times the speed) Default: 3 (1.1 times the speed)
OP
Description
B
Compacting Completion Position Default Adjustment Selection Description 0579 Setting
Enables/disables automatic adjustment to correct the default value of the compacting completion position. * The setting value applies to both first print drum and second print drum sides. Setting range: 0 (Disable) 1 (Enable) Default: 1 (Enable)
–
Description 0580
Sets the angle at which the print drum rotates in reverse and halts after the master is released by the first clamp to permit removal of the master by the second print drum. Setting range: –15 to +15 (–15° to +15°) Setting unit: 1 (1°) Default: 0 (0°) * Position rotated 16° in reverse from the B-position of the second print drum
RIS
OE
Setting
UR
Second Master Removal Print Drum Stop Angle Adjustment
[15-15]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
No.
E
Paper Feed/Eject Test Mode Sensor/switch
0600 Paper detection sensor
Detecting condition
Print drum changeover
Light received (paper detected)
–
0601 Paper-size detection sensor
Light received (paper detected)
–
0602 Elevator upper-limit sensor A
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0603 Elevator upper-limit sensor B
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0604 Elevator lower-limit sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0605 Paper sensor
Light path blocked (paper detected)
–
0606 Paper-ejection sensor
Light received (paper detected)
–
0607 Paper-feed-tray upper safety SW
–
0609 Paper-feed tray elevation button
Switch ON (button depressed) Switch ON (button depressed) * The paper feed tray upper safety SW must be ON during this procedure. Switch ON (button depressed)
–
0610 Remaining Paper Volume Sensor A
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0611 Remaining Paper Volume Sensor B
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0612 Paper-ejection FG sensor
UR
0608 Paper-feed-tray lower safety SW
OP
6.
–
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0614 Paper-feed pressure sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0615 Registration Sensor
Light path blocked (paper detected)
–
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0617 Central Transport Sensor
Light path blocked (paper detected)
–
0618 Paper Ejection Wing Home Position Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0619 Second Paper Feed Motor FG Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0620 Central Flap Home Position Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
No.
OE
0616 Guide Roller Release Home Position Sensor
Motor/solenoid
Remarks
Print drum changeover
0660 Paper ejection motor
–
0661 Suction fan
–
0662 Separation fan
–
0663 Second Paper Feed Motor
–
0664 Central Suction Fan
–
0665 First Separation Fan
–
0666 Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor (CW)
–
0667 Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor (CCW) 0668 Feed Tray Button LED
RIS
No.
0681 0682 0683 0684
0687
0688
0689
The LED illuminates.
Unit check
Paper feed tray maximum up positioning Raises the paper feed tray to the paper feed position when the Start key is pressed. Paper feed tray elevation up & down Repeats the paper feed tray raising and lowering operations. Paper feed tray maximum down positioning Lowers the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position when the Start key is pressed. Separation Pump Solenoid ON/OFF Action Turns the solenoid ON when the Start key is pressed. The solenoid automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds. Paper Feed Reverse-rotation Solenoid ON/OFF Action Turns the solenoid ON when the Start key is pressed. The solenoid automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds. Paper-feed clutch ON/OFF action Turns the clutch ON when the Start key is pressed. The clutch automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds. Scraper Clutch ON/OFF Action (Optional) Turns the clutch ON when the Start key is pressed. The clutch automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
[15-16]
– – Print drum changeover – – – B
–
–
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
0705
0706 0707 0708 0709
E
0704
Paper Ejection Wing Home Action Moves the paper ejection wings to the home positions. Paper Ejection Wing Target Shift Moves the wings to the positions set in Test Mode No. 780. Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment One sheet of thin RISO paper must be set at the multiple paper feed sensor position during this procedure. Central Flap Motor (Postcard) Repeats the flap movement between the postcard position and bottom position when the Start key is pressed. Central Flap Motor (Normal) Repeats the flat movement between the top and bottom positions when the Start key is pressed. Elevator motor ON action Rotates the elevator motor for raising operation (maximum time: 10 sec). Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment One sheet of thin RISO paper must be set at the registration sensor position during this procedure. Data check
No. 0721
–
– –
OP
0703
Guide Roller Release Motor Repeats nipping and releasing operations when the Start key is pressed.
Paper width potentiometer data
0722 Multiple Paper Feed Sensor
UR
0702
Print drum changeover
Unit check
No.
Content of display
Displays the paper width (mm) to the first decimal place after adjustment. Displays the A/D value of the multiple paper feed sensor (also serves as paper sensor). Data setting
No.
–
– – – –
Print drum changeover – – Print drum changeover
Elevator upper-limit position selection
0740
Selects the paper feed tray stop position (paper feed position). In the case of , the upper-limit position is linked to the paper feed pressure lever position. The position is fixed in settings through . Setting range: 0 (Auto. Linked to paper feed pressure lever position) 1 (Normal position) 2 (Card position) 3 (Custom position) Default: 0 (Auto. Linked to paper feed pressure lever position)
OE
Description
Setting
–
Paper-feed-clutch ON angle 0741
Description
Sets the activation angle for the paper feed clutch.
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
* ( for slower ON timing)
–
Paper-feed-clutch OFF angle
Sets the deactivation angle for the paper feed clutch when the paper type is normal.
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
RIS
Description
0742
* ( for slower OFF timing)
–
Paper feed retries after one paper feed action on 1st paper feed area. Description
0743
Setting
Sets the number of paper feed retry operations. Setting range: 1 (no-paper feed processing: 1 time. No paper feed retry) * When no-paper feed occurs once, the no-paper feed error is generated. 2 (no-paper feed processing: 2 times. One retry action) * When no-paper feed occurs twice, the no-paper feed error is generated. 3 (no-paper feed processing: 3 times. Two retry actions) * When no-paper feed occurs three times, the no-paper feed error is
–
Default: 1 (no-paper feed processing: 1 time. No paper feed retry)
Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle (card)
Description
Sets the deactivation angle for the paper feed clutch when the paper type is .
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
0744
[15-17]
* ( for slower OFF timing)
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
E
Data setting
No. Scraper Clutch ON Angle
Sets the activation angle for the scraper clutch.
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
Scraper Clutch OFF Angle Description
Sets the deactivation angle for the scraper clutch.
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
0748
* ( for slower ON timing)
OP
Description 0747
FP Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle
* ( for slower OFF timing)
Description
Sets the activation angle for the paper feed clutch for proof print.
Setting
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
0749
UR
Paper feed jam detection angle. (Paper IN)
* ( for slower ON timing)
Description
Sets the detection angle for paper feed jam (paper feed IN).
Setting
Setting range: –200 to +200 (–20.0° to +20.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
0751
* ( for slower detection timing)
–
–
–
–
Paper feed jam detection angle. (Paper OUT) Description
Sets the detection angle for paper feed jam (paper feed OUT).
Setting
Setting range: –200 to +200 (–20.0° to +20.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
0752
* ( for slower detection timing)
–
Paper receiving jam detection angle. (Paper IN)
Sets the detection angle for paper ejection jam (paper ejection IN).
OE
Description 0753
Setting
Setting range: –500 to +500 (–50.0° to +50.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
* ( for slower detection timing)
–
Paper receiving jam detection angle. (Paper OUT) 0754
Description
Sets the detection angle for paper ejection jam (paper ejection OUT).
Setting
Setting range: –500 to +500 (–50.0° to +50.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
* ( for slower detection timing)
–
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Proof-Print) Description
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for proof print.
Setting range:
0755
RIS
Setting
0 (3.0 times the circumferential speed), 1 (3.4 times the circumferential speed) 2 (3.7 times the circumferential speed), 3 (4.0 times the circumferential speed) 4 (4.5 times the circumferential speed) Default: 1 (3.4 times the circumferential speed)
–
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Print speed No.1)
Description
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for print speed No. 1.
Setting range:
0756
Setting
0 (1.5 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.7 times the circumferential speed) 2 (1.8 times the circumferential speed), 3 (1.9 times the circumferential speed) 4 (2.0 times the circumferential speed) Default: 1 (1.7 times the circumferential speed)
–
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Print speed No.2)
Description
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for print speed No. 2.
Setting range:
0757
Setting
0 (1.3 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.5 times the circumferential speed) 2 (1.6 times the circumferential speed), 3 (1.7 times the circumferential speed) 4 (1.8 times the circumferential speed) Default: 1 (1.5 times the circumferential speed)
[15-18]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Print speed No.3)
E
Data setting
No.
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for print speed No. 3.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (1.1 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.3 times the circumferential speed) 2 (1.4 times the circumferential speed), 3 (1.5 times the circumferential speed) 4 (1.6 times the circumferential speed) Default: 1 (1.3 times the circumferential speed)
0758
OP
Description
–
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Print speed No.4) Description
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for print speed No. 4.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (1.0 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.1 times the circumferential speed) 2 (1.2 times the circumferential speed), 3 (1.3 times the circumferential speed) 4 (1.4 times the circumferential speed) Default: 2 (1.2 times the circumferential speed)
0759
–
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Print speed No.5)
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for print speed No. 5.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (1.0 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.1 times the circumferential speed) 2 (1.2 times the circumferential speed), 3 (1.3 times the circumferential speed) 4 (1.4 times the circumferential speed) Default: 2 (1.2 times the circumferential speed)
0760
UR
Description
–
Paper-feed-clutch ON angle (Adjustment 1) Description
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for high-speed printing.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (1.0 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.1 times the circumferential speed) 2 (1.2 times the circumferential speed), 3 (1.3 times the circumferential speed) 4 (1.4 times the circumferential speed) Default: 1 (1.1 times the circumferential speed)
0761
–
0779
OE
Paper Ejection Wing Position Adjustment Description
Sets the adjustment value for the amount of paper ejection wing motion.
Setting
Setting range: –20 to +20 (–20 to +20 pulses) Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse) Default: 0 (0 pulse)
–
Paper Ejection Wing Target Position Description 0780
Setting
Sets the positions of the paper ejection wings when the custom paper ejection position is selected. This setting is reflected in the operation set in Test Mode No. 704. Setting range: 0 to 2150 (0 to 2150 pulses) Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse) Default: 1434 (1434 pulses)
–
Central Transport Jam Angle/IN Description
Adjusts the detection angle for paper input jams for the central transport sensor. Setting range: –200 to +200 (–20.0° to +20.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
RIS
0781
Setting
* ( for slower detection timing)
–
Central Transport Jam Angle/OUT Description
Adjusts the detection angle for paper output jams for the central transport sensor.
Setting
Setting range: –200 to +200 (–20.0° to +20.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
0782
* ( for slower detection timing)
–
Separation Fan Air Volume Adjustment Description
Adjusts the air flow from the separation fan.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (Airflow 55%) Power application time 25% 1 (Airflow 70%) Power application time 40% 2 (Airflow 86%) Power application time 65% Default: 0 (Airflow 55%)
0783
B
Central Transport Postcard Adjustment Description
Adjusts the postcard position in the center transport section.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to +50 Setting unit: 1 (0.1 sec) Default: 5 (0.5 sec)
0784
–
[15-19]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
No.
E
Print Drum/Print Adjustment Test Mode Sensor/switch
Detecting condition
Print drum changeover
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0802 Main-motor limit sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
0803 Clamp sensor A
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0804 Clamp sensor B
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
–
OP
0801 Position-B sensor
0805 Print Drum FG Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0806 Master loading sensor
Light received (master detected)
B
0807 Print-drum lock-position sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0808 Drive Lock Release Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0809 Ink sensor
In contact with ink
B
0810 Overflow sensor
In contact with ink
B
0811 Ink-cartridge set SW
Switch ON (button depressed)
B
0812 Ink pump FG sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
0816 Drum free rotation SW 0818 Print-drum release button
UR
7.
0819 Print-drum connection signal 0820 Print-drum safety switch 0821 Front Cover Safety SW 0830 Print-Pressure HP Sensor
0832 Horizontal Home Position Sensor No.
Switch ON (button depressed)
–
Switch ON (button depressed) The print drum is connected to the main unit drawer connector.
–
Switch ON (print drum set in machine)
B
Switch ON (front cover closed)
–
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
B
Motor/solenoid
Remarks
OE
0861 Main-motor action (30 rpm)
0863 Clamp-motor action (Normal direction)
B
Print drum changeover –
CCW (counterclockwise rotation)
B
0864 Clamp-motor action (Opposite direction)
CW (clockwise rotation)
B
0866 Print-drum release SW (button)
The LED illuminates.
–
No.
Unit check
Variable print-drum rotation Rotates the print drum when the Speed key is enabled. Position-A action of the print drum 0881 Stops the print drum at position A. Inking motor ON action 0882 Operates the inking motor (maximum time: 1 sec). Clamp home positioning action 0883 Returns the clamp unit to the home position.
RIS
0880
Clamp unit cycle action (3 step cycle) Pressing the Start key once performs a single cycle of the following operations: > Step 1: Clamp home position –> Clamp open 0884 Step 2: Clamp open ｮ Position A adjustment Step 3: Position A adjustment –> Clamp closed (clamp at home position) > Step 1: Clamp home position –> Clamp open Step 2: Clamp open –> Clamp closed (clamp at home position) 0885
Drum lock solenoid ON/OFF action Pressing the Start key turns the solenoid ON. The solenoid automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
[15-20]
Print drum changeover – B B B
B
B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Unit check
E
No.
Pressure solenoid ON/OFF action Pressing Start key turns the solenoid ON. The solenoid automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds. Print drum inking action Performs the following operations in the sequence indicated: 1) Ink is supplied while the print drum (until the inking sensor switches ON) rotates without applying pressure. 0887 2) Confidential operation is executed. 3) From the time the inking sensor switches ON, the print drum rotates 10 turns while pressure applied. 4) The print drum halts at position B.
OP
0886
Print drum ink-code copy Copies information on the color and category used for ink cartridge and print drum compatibility 0890 from the ink cartridge tag to the print drum EEPROM. * Wait at least two seconds after setting the ink cartridge. Machine Position-B stop (The position in which the print drum can be removed from the machine.) 0892 Stops the print drum at machine B position.
OE
UR
Print Drum Drive Lock Release Action The horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum to the drive lock release position. Print Drum Drive Connection Action 0894 The horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum from the drive lock release position to the connection position. Master Loading Step Action Performs the following operations in the sequence indicated: 1) Press the Start key. 2) The master-making unit moves to the master-loading position. (first and second masterloading positions) 3) The drive motor halts. 4) The clamp unit descends. 5) The print drum moves to the position A. 0895 6) The clamp unit position A adjustments are made. 7) Master making unit transfer-motor brake is released after one minute. 8) Press the Start key. 9) The clamp unit returns to the home position. 10) Master making unit transfer-motor brake is released. 11) The print drum moves to position B, and the master-making unit moves to the home position. 12) Pressing the Start key repeats steps 1) through 10).
0893
Vertical-centering action Simultaneously brings both the vertical print position motor and the second paper feed unit to the home positions, then returns the vertical print position to the center (home position). Vertical print position one cycle action 0901 Operates the vertical drive motor up and down for one cycle. Horizontal Home Action 0902 Returns the print drum horizontal position to the center (home position).
RIS
0900
0903
Horizontal Cycle Action Performs a single horizontal movement cycle.
[15-21]
B
A
B
B B B
B
– – B B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print-pressure home positioning Returns the pressure control unit to the home position.
E
0904
Print drum changeover
Unit check
No.
B
Print-pressure one cycle action Performs a single print pressure control cycle. Pressure Roller Maintenance Position Pressing the Start key raises the pressure roller. 0906 * This operation is activated only if the Start key is pressed with the print drum removed and the front cover closed. Pressure Roller Maintenance Position Cancel Pressing the Start key lowers the pressure roller. 0907 * This operation is activated only if the Start key is pressed with the print drum removed and the front cover closed. Print-pressure maintenance positioning 0908 Operates the pressure control pulse motor until the pressure spring removal position (-8130 pulses) is reached. Data check
0921 Print-drum angle display
Content of display
UR
No.
0923 Print-drum ink temperature display 0925 Ink remaining volume display 0926 Ink motor FG count
0928 Displays the Ink use starting date.
Displays the current print drum angle (x 10). Displays the temperature value (°C) converted from the A/D value of the ink thermistor. Displays the amount of ink left in the ink cartridge as a percent (%) value read from the ink cartridge tag. Displays the inking motor FG count value read from the ink cartridge tag. (1 count = 0.1 ml) Displays the ink use start date stored in the ink cartridge tag. * For example, is displayed by alternating indications of and .
B
–
B
Print drum changeover B B B B
B
Print drum changeover
Data setting
OE
No.
B
OP
0905
Master loading sensor detection timing adjustment 0940
Description
Adjusts the master-loading detection angle.
Setting
Setting range: –200 to +100 (–20.0° to +10.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
* ( for slower detection timing)
B
* ( for overrun)
B
* ( for overrun)
B
Print-drum Position-A adjustment 0941
Description
Adjusts the print drum position-A stop position.
Setting
Setting range: –40 to +40 (–4.0° to +4.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
Print-drum position-B adjustment
Adjusts the print drum position-B stop position.
Setting
Setting range: –40 to +40 (–4.0° to +4.0°) Setting unit: 5 (0.5°) Default: 0 (0°)
RIS
Description
0942
Inking time adjustment (when over X% of ink is consumed from the ink tube.)
Description
0943
Setting
Sets the continuous ink sensor OFF detection time that prompts the inkless detection signal if the amount of ink consumed exceeds a set percent value (value set in Test Mode No. 948) (data stored in print drum PCB). Setting range: 5 to 60 (5 to 60 sec) Setting unit: 1 (1 sec) Default: 10 (10 sec)
[15-22]
B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Inking time adjustment (right after the ink tube is replaced)
0944 Setting
Sets the continuous ink sensor OFF detection time that prompts the inkless detection signal after ink cartridge replacement (data stored in print drum PCB). * This information is recorded in the print drum EEPROM. Setting range: 5 to 60 (5 to 60 sec) Setting unit: 1 (1 sec) Default: 30 (30 sec)
OP
Description
Ink overflow detection frequency adjustment Description 0945 Setting
E
Data setting
No.
Sets how frequently overflow sensor detection operations are performed to determine ink overflows. * This information is recorded in the print drum EEPROM. Setting range: 1 to 200 (1 to 200 times) Setting unit: 1 (Once) Default: 50 (50 times)
B
B
Inking time adjustment (when under X% of ink is consumed from the ink tube.)
Setting
UR
Description 0946
Sets the continuous ink sensor OFF detection time that prompts the inkless detection signal when the consumed ink volume is less than the set percentage (value set in Test Mode No. 948) (data stored in print drum PCB). * This information is recorded in the print drum EEPROM. Setting range: 1 to 60 (1 to 60 sec) Setting unit: 1 (1 sec) Default: 15 (15 sec)
B
Inking drum rotation quantity (while inking) after ink tube is pulled out and put back. Description 0947 Setting
Specifies the number of print drum rotations to be performed after ink cartridge removal/installation. Setting range: 0 to 10 (0 to 10 times) Setting unit: 1 (Once) Default: 1 (Once)
B
OE
Selection of X% for test modes No. 0943 and 0946. Description 0948
Setting
Determines the inkless detection timing switching condition (ink consumption) based on remaining ink volume. Setting range: 1 to 100 (1% to 100%) Setting unit: 1 (1%) Default: 80 (80%)
B
Print pressure setting for Proof-read printing (black ink) Description 0949
Setting
Selects the print pressure table for determining the density of the first print (using black ink). Setting range: 0 (very low density), 1 (low density), 2 (normal), 3 (high density), 4 (very high density) Default: 2 (normal)
–
Print pressure setting for Proof-read printing (color ink)
Selects the print pressure table for determining the density of the first print (using color ink). Setting range: 0 (very low density), 1 (low density), 2 (normal), 3 (high density), 4 (very high density) Default: 2 (normal)
RIS
Description
0950
Setting
–
Ink Color Code
Description
Sets the color of ink to be set in the print drum (data stored in print drum PCB). Setting range:
0951
Setting
0 (Not specified) 64 (Black) 67 (Blue3) 70 (Red2) 73 (Green) 76 (Yellow) 79 (Brown2) 82 (Gray) 85 (Light gray2) 88 (Gold) 91 (Silver2) 94 (Special color) Default: 0 (Not specified)
65 (Blue) 68 (Blue4) 71 (Red3) 74 (Green2) 77 (Yellow2) 80 (Purple) 83 (Gray2) 86 (Orange) 89 (Gold2) 92 (Pink)
[15-23]
66 (Blue2) 69 (Red) 72 (Red4) 75 (Green3) 78 (Brown) 81 (Purple2) 84 (Light gray) 87 (Orange2) 90 (Silver) 93 (Pink2)
B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
E
Data setting
No. Print Drum Insertion Angle Fine Adjustment
Setting
0956
B
Setting range: –40 to +40 (–4.0° to +4.0°) Setting unit: 1 (0.1°) Default: 0 (0°)
Automatic Print Position Reset Condition Setting
Description
OP
Description 0955
This adjustment is performed if the print drum cannot be inserted even after making the adjustment in Test Mode No. 942 (Print-drum Position-B adjustment) (data stored in print drum PCB). * The position-B positioning operation is based on a value equal to the sum of the values in Test Mode No. 942 and No. 955. This value is between –40 and +40. The same value also applies when the print drum does engage.
Selects the condition for automatic print position reset after master-making or renewal. * After automatic reset, a proof copy is output and the TC count is incremented. * In dual-color printing, an automatic reset is performed after master-making by both print drums, and a proof copy is output. Setting range:
–
Vertical Print HP Position Adj
UR
0 (No automatic reset) * Remains at center after master-making/renewal 1 (Automatic reset only after master renewal) 2 (Automatic reset after master-making and renewal) Default: 0 (No automatic reset)
Description
Sets the home position offset value for the vertical print position phase difference.
Setting
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 to +5.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
0969
* ( for adjustment up)
–
Vertical HP Paper Feed Timing Adj
Sets the home position offset value for the vertical print position (second paper feed timing). Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 to +5.0 mm) * ( for adjustment up) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
OE
Description 0971
Setting
B
Printing pressure HP adjustment
Description 0972
Sets the offset value for the print pressure position (data stored in print drum PCB). * This setting should be made only when required by the print drum. * Printing pressure HP adjustment is based on a value equal to the sum of the values in Test Mode No. 972 and No. 975. This value is between –500 and +500. Setting range: –500 to +500 (–5000 to +5000 pulses)
Setting
B
* ( for increased print pressure)
Setting unit: 1 (10 pulses) Default: 0 (0 pulse) Horizontal HP Adjustment (Print Drum)
RIS
Sets the offset value for the horizontal print home position (data stored in print drum PCB). * This setting should be made only when required by the print drum. * Horizontal print HP adjustments are made based on a value equal to the sum of the values in Test Mode No. 973 and No. 974. This value is between –20 and +20. Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 to +2.0 mm) * ( for adjustment left) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
Description
0973
Setting
B
Horizontal HP Adjustment (Machine)
Description
0974
Setting
Sets the offset value for the horizontal print home position. * This setting should be made only when required by the machine. * Horizontal print HP adjustments are made based on a value equal to the sum of the values in Test Mode No. 973 and No. 974. This value is between –20 and +20. Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 to +2.0 mm) * ( for adjustment left) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
[15-24]
B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
E
Data setting
No.
Printing Pressure HP Position Adjustment (Machine)
0975
Setting unit: 1 (10 pulses) Default: 0 (0 pulse) Print Drum Inside Adjustment Selection
0976 Setting
Selects the area for storing adjustment values specific to each print drum. Set a unique number if two or more machines are used. Each print drum can recognize up to three machines. Setting range: 0 to 2 Setting unit: 1 Default: 0
0977
Selects whether the motion increment is set to 0.1 mm or 0.5 mm if the fine adjustment button is not displayed. Setting range: 0 (0.5 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0.5 mm)
RIS
OE
Setting
UR
Vertical and Horizontal Motion Distance Switching Description
B
* ( for increased print pressure)
Setting
Description
OP
Description
Sets the offset value for the print pressure position. * This setting should be made only when required by the machine. * The printing pressure HP adjustments are made based on a value equal to the sum of the values in Test Mode No. 972 and No. 975. This value is between –500 and +500. Setting range: –500 to +500 (–5000 to +5000 pulses)
[15-25]
B
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Protected Area Test Mode
>
E
8.
With the machine on standby in normal Test Mode, enter using the ten-key pad, then press the Start key.
OP
1102
Print drum changeover
Unit check
No.
Paper size VR adjustment Sets the VR value for 105 mm (A6 paper width).
Paper size VR adjustment Sets the VR value for 297 mm (A3 paper width). LCD Base Point Compensation Make adjustments as described below. 1. Touch two points located at diagonally opposite points on the panel. 1104 2. Display the confirmation screen, touch three points, and confirm that the compensation is performed properly. Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode Sets the main motor control parameters for stable motor control in the DSP, including machine and 1105 motor variations (operation time: approx. 15 sec). * Both print drum drives must be connected during this operation. Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode Sets the second paper feed motor control parameters for stable motor control in the DSP, 1106 including machine and motor variations. (operation time: approx. 20 sec) * The guide roller must be in its lowered position during this operation. Data clear
No. 1198 Initialize Memory
UR
1103
Details
Initializes the mechanical unit PCB memory.
Data setting
OE
No.
– –
–
–
–
Print drum changeover – Print drum changeover
Drum Code Entry
Sets print drum information and size information in the print drum EEPROM (data stored in print drum PCB). Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting Default: 0 Drum Serial Code Entry 1
1210 Description
1211
Description
Inputs the initial 4 digits of the print drum serial code (data stored in print drum PCB).
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 9999 Setting unit: 1 Default: 0
B
B
Drum Serial Code Entry 2 Description
Inputs the last 4 digits of the print drum serial code (data stored in print drum PCB). Setting range: 0 to 9999 Setting unit: 1 Default: 0
RIS
1212
Setting
[15-26]
B
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
E
Data setting
No. Drum Color Code Entry
Setting
0 (Not specified) 2 (Blue) 4 (Red) 6 (Riso Federal Blue) 8 (Riso Marine Red) 10 (Green) 12 (Brown) 14 (Light Gray) 16 (Fluorescence Pink) 17 (Fluorescence Orange) 18 (Orange) 20 (Hunter Green) 30 (Custom color) 32 (Order: paper not specified)
1 (Black) 3 (Medium Blue) 5 (Bright Red) 7 (Purple) 9 (Burgundy) 11 (Teal) 13 (Yellow) 15 (Gray) 19 (Flat Gold) 21 (Crimson) 31 (Order: paper specified) 63 (Any color)
OP
1214
Sets the print drum color information in the print drum EEPROM (data stored in print drum PCB). Setting range:
UR
Description
B
Default: 0 (Not specified)
Drum Ink Category Entry (First/Second) Description
1215
OE
Setting
Sets the ink category code (3 bits) stored in the print drum EEPROM (data stored in print drum PCB). Setting range: 0 (Not specified) 1 (normal) 2 (HD) 3 (Auxiliary 1) 4 (Auxiliary 2) 5 (Auxiliary 3) 6 (Auxiliary 4) 7 (Auxiliary 5) 0 (Not specified)
B
Default: 0 (Not specified)
Scanner Adjustment (1) Sub-Scanning 1220
Description
Sets the value indicated on the sticker affixed to the scanner unit.
Setting
Setting range: 89 to 167 Setting unit: 1 Default: 128
–
Scanner Adjustment (2) Main-Scanning Description
Sets the value indicated on the sticker affixed to the scanner unit.
Setting
Setting range: 81 to 175 Setting unit: 1 Default: 128
RIS
1221
–
Scanner Adjustment (3) Sub-Scanning Ratio Description
Sets the value indicated on the sticker affixed to the scanner unit.
Setting
Setting range: 46 to 54 Setting unit: 1 Default: 50
1222
–
Scanner Adjustment (4) Offset Description
Sets the value indicated on the sticker affixed to the scanner unit.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 255 * The setting value varies automatically after offset adjustment, and the most recent setting value is used for the next offset adjustment. However, the value displayed in Test Mode does not change until the machine is restarted.
1223
[15-27]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Data setting
E
No. Scanner Adjustment (5) Gain
Sets the value indicated on the sticker affixed to the scanner unit.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting unit: 1 Default: 0 * The setting value varies automatically after gain adjustment, and the most recent setting value is used for the next gain adjustment. However, the value displayed in Test Mode does not change until the machine is restarted.
1224
OP
Description
RLP Mode Enable Control 1229 Description
Enables/disables RLP function.
–
–
Setting range: 0 (Disabled), 1 (Enabled) Setting Default: 0 (Disabled) LCD Contrast Adjustment Adjusts panel contrast.
Setting
Setting range: –120 to +120 Setting unit: 1 Default: 0
LCD Backlight Adjustment
UR
Description 1231
Description
Adjusts panel backlighting.
Setting
Setting range: 50 to 115 Setting unit: 1 Default: 85
1232
–
–
TPH master-making horizontal position adjustment Description
Adjusts the horizontal print position of the thermal print head.
Setting
Setting range: –30 to +30 (–3.0 mm to +3.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
1233
Description
Sets thermal print head resistance.
Setting
Setting range: 1200 to 2300 (1200 ohm to 2300 ohm) Setting unit: 1 (1 ohm) Default: 1200 ohm
RIS
1234
OE
TPH resistance input
[15-28]
* ( for adjustment left)
B
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Sensor/switch
No.
E
Test Mode for Optional Unit (AF) Detecting condition
Print drum changeover
3000 AF-unit joint signal check
An AF is connected.
3001 AF Original registration sensor
Light path blocked (original detected)
–
3002 AF Original IN sensor
Light path blocked (original detected)
–
3003 AF Original OUT sensor
Light path blocked (original detected)
–
3004 AF original detection sensor
Original is detected.
–
3005 AF Cover Set SW
Switch ON (AF closed)
–
3006 AF Original Size Sensor 1
Light received (original detected)
–
3007 AF Original Size Sensor 2
Light received (original detected)
Motor/solenoid
No.
3030 AF read pulse-motor CW
3045 3046 No.
UR
3044
Rotates the AF read pulse motor in feed direction.
AF one cycle action with no Auto Base Control Performs a single AF scanning cycle. Picks up original -> Scanner unit returns to home position -> Shading -> Scanner unit moves to scanning position -> Scans and ejects original -> Scanner unit returns to home position AF original feed action Performs AF original feed operation. Picks up original -> Scans original (original transport) AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Adjusts the sensitivity of the original IN sensor. AF Original Guide Minimum Width Sets the VR value when the paper guides are brought to the minimum-width position. AF Original Guide Maximum Width Sets the VR value when the paper guides are brought to the maximum-width position.
OE
3042
Remarks
Unit check
No.
3041
–
OP
9.
Data check
Content of display
–
Print drum changeover –
Print drum changeover –
– – – – Print drum changeover
Displays the A/D value of the AF original width.
–
3061 AF Original Size Code
00: None 01: A3 03: A4 05: B5 07: A5 09: B6 13: Ledger 15: Letter 17: Statement 18: Statement Landscape 19: foolscap 33: Irregular size
–
RIS
3060 AF Original Width (A/D)
No.
02: B4 04: A4 Landscape 06: B5 Landscape 08: A5 Landscape 11: Postcard 14: Legal 16: Letter Landscape
Print drum changeover
Data setting
Scanner unit scanning position adjustment (AF scanning)
Description
Adjusts mirror (carriage) stop position in AF scanning operation.
Setting
Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 mm to +2.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
3070
* ( for adjustment up)
–
* ( for adjustment up)
–
Mirror carriage position adjustment for Auto-Base-Control (AF scanning)
Description
Adjusts AF Auto-Base-Control mirror stop position.
Setting
Setting range: 0 to 30 (0 mm to 3.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
3071
[15-29]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Print drum changeover
Scanning horizontal centering position adjustment (AF scanning) 3072 Setting
Adjusts horizontal position for scanning of original by the AF. Separate setting for the flatbed. * ( for adjustment left) Setting range: –30 to +30 (–3.0 mm to +3.0 mm) Setting unit: 5 (0.5 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
Scanning start-position adjustment. (AF scanning)
OP
Description
E
Data setting
No.
Description
Adjusts original scanning start position (amount of scan skip) for the AF.
Setting
Setting range: –60 to +60 (–6.0 mm to +6.0 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
3073
* ( for adjustment up)
–
–
Scanning-speed adjustment to control Elongation & Shrinkage in scanning. (AF scanning) Description
Adjusts original scanning speed for the AF. (Adjusts AF read pulse motor speed.)
Setting
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0% to +5.0%) Setting unit: 1 (0.1%) Default: 0 (0%)
* ( to stretch)
–
* ( for adjustment down)
–
UR
3074
AF Original END Signal Timing Description
Adjusts original scanning end position.
Setting
Setting range: –63 to +63 (–6.3 mm to +6.3 mm) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
RIS
OE
3076
[15-30]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
E
10. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Job Separator) Sensor/switch
No.
Detecting condition
Print drum changeover
Turns ON when tape is jammed.
–
3101 Job separator tape detection sensor
Turns ON where tape is detected.
–
3102 Job separator power switch
Switch ON
–
3103 Job separator connection signal
A job separator is connected.
–
Unit check
No. 3140
OP
3100 Job separator tape jam sensor
Tape output Outputs one tape.
Data setting
No. Stamping quantity
Sets the number of stamping operations during Test Mode No. 3140 (Tape Output).
Setting
Setting range: 0 (No stamping) 1 (1 stamping) 2 (2 stamping) Default: 0 (No stamping)
3170
UR
Description
Print drum changeover –
Print drum changeover
–
Tape jammed message Description
Displays/hides the tape jam error in tape output.
Setting
Setting range: 0 (Disable) 1 (Enable) Default: 1 (Enable)
RIS
OE
3171
[15-31]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Unit check
No.
E
11. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Storage Memory) Print drum changeover
No.
Details
Data clear
3356 Storage Memory Initialize (128M)
Data check
Content of display
Displays the PC card type. * Indicates the type of card inserted in the card slot. If a card for downloading is inserted in the slot, downloading begins when power is switched on. This means the card must be inserted after power is switched on. >
OE
3360 PC Card Information
Initializes the storage device to delete data from the 32M storage device or when an error related to storage device prevents data restoration. * Only one storage device can be set in the slot for initialization. Initializes the storage device to delete data from the 128M storage device or when an error related to storage device prevents data restoration. * Only one storage device can be set in the slot for initialization.
UR
3355 Storage Memory Initialize (32M)
No.
OP
Storage Memory Configuration Change Processing for changing the card used by the RP to a configuration compatible with the current machine. 3340 * Reconfigured card cannot be used by the RP. * Only one storage device should be set in the slot to permit configuration adjustments. (Two cards cannot be processed simultaneously.)
–
Print drum changeover
–
–
Print drum changeover
–
0: No card 1: Card for SH-PCB download 2: Card for mechanical control PCB download 3: Card for function upgrade 4: Storage memory (ATA card) 255: Other card
Displays the volume label, capacity, area used, and available storage area. * Only one storage device can be set in the slot.
RIS
3361 Storage Memory Information
[15-32]
–
Chapter 15 Test Mode
Data setting
No. RLP Print Position Adjustment (Main) 3570 Setting
Adjusts RLP print position (main scanning direction). * If multiple RLP units are installed, this setting will affect all units. Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) * ( for adjustment left) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
RLP Print Position Adjustment (Sub) Description 3571 Setting
Adjusts RLP print position (sub scanning direction). * If multiple RLP units are installed, this setting will affect all units. Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) * ( for adjustment up) Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm) Default: 0 (0 mm)
Zero Print Master-making Warning
3572 Setting
If auto-link is turned ON, master-making is performed when the print quantity is 0 in PtoP mode. This setting determines whether the warning (F60) is displayed during this operation. Setting range: 0: (Without warning) 1: (With warning) Default: 0: (Without warning)
UR
Description
Print drum changeover
OP
Description
E
12. Test Mode for Optional Unit (LBP)
–
–
–
RLP Hold Output Enable Control Description 3573 Setting
Sets whether the output is held temporarily when the output is made by the RLP sorter, optional sorter, or electronic sorter using the AF. Setting range: 0: (Disable) 1: (Enable) Default: 1: (Enable)
–
OE
RLP Duplex Print Auto-Repeat Description 3579
RIS
Setting
Sets whether the screen setting is turned OFF or reset automatically after duplex printing is completed. Setting range: 0: (Off) 1: (Reset) Default: 1: (Reset)
[15-33]
–
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Chapter 15 Test Mode
[15-34]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Explanation of Panel Messages ................................................................................................. 16-2
UR
RIS
2. 3.
Error Code Display .................................................................................................................. 16-2 1. Error type ................................................................................................................. 16-2 2. Error point ................................................................................................................ 16-2 1) List of panel messages .................................................................................................... 16-3 2) Details of error codes ....................................................................................................... 16-6 1. Service engineer call errors (T**) ............................................................................. 16-6 2-1 Jam errors (A**) ..................................................................................................... 16-23 2-2 Jam errors (A**: Indicates the detail of J-type error) .............................................. 16-26 3. Option errors (B**) ................................................................................................. 16-28 4. Consumables error (C**) ....................................................................................... 16-31 5. Set check errors (D**) ............................................................................................ 16-33 6. Warnings (E**: Service engineer call) .................................................................... 16-39 7. Warnings (F**: Others) ........................................................................................... 16-40 8. Parameter Errors (H**) ........................................................................................... 16-49 J-type Error Display .............................................................................................................. 16-50 Errors Saved in Memory ....................................................................................................... 16-50
OE
1.
[16-1]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
1.
E
Explanation of Panel Messages Error Code Display
Example: 1.
T99-123
T99: Error type 123: Error point
Error type The order of error priority is shown below.
T
Service engineer call errors
A
Jam errors
B
Option errors
C
Consumables errors
D
Set check errors
E
Warnings (service engineer call)
F
Warnings (other)
H
Parameter errors
J
Paper jam errors
Error point The error point classification is shown below.
OE
2.
Description
UR
Error type
OP
• If an error occurs, an error message is displayed with an icon and an error code indicating the specifics of the generated error. • Each error code consists of an indicating the type of error and an describing the error generating section.
Error type
Description
0**
System, panel
1**
Scanning section, image processing section
2**
Master-making section
Master disposal section
4**
Paper feed/ejection section
5**
Print drum section
6**
Printing adjustment section
7**
Optional equipment
RIS
3**
[16-2]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type
Description
Error type
E
1) List of panel messages Description
T01
Main motor lock
T95
FRAM error
T02
Elevator motor lock
T96
Data not input
T03
Clamp motor lock
T97
T04
Ink overflow
T05
Print positioning pulse motor lock
T06
Horizontal pulse motor lock Print pressure control pulse motor lock
T12
Master disposal section motor lock
OP
T11
PC card access error
T98
Hardware error
T99
Software error
Error type A01
Description
Master feed error
T13
Cutter motor lock
T14
Flatbed error
T15
AF error
T17
Solenoid counter not connected
T18
Print drum lock solenoid lock
A07
Paper feed error
T19
Thermal pressure motor lock
A08
Paper jam on first print drum
T20
Paper ejection section motor lock
A09
Paper ejection error
T24
Inking motor lock
A10
T25
No-battery error
AF original feed error Awaiting removal of master from first print drum side
T27
Master-making unit motor lock
A17
A17 [Cutter error]
T28
Second paper feed motor lock
A25
Central transport error
T29
Guide release motor lock
A34
T31
Central flap motor lock
A42
Awaiting master reset Master loading error on second print drum side Master removal error on second print drum side Master present in master removal section on second print drum side
T43 T44 T45 T46 T51 T52 T58 T64
A05
A16
Main motor lock
A44
Clamp motor lock
A45
Overflow
A48
Print-positioning pulse motor lock
A56
Horizontal pulse motor lock
Print pressure control pulse motor lock Master disposal section motor lock
Print drum lock solenoid lock Inking motor lock
Master-making unit motor lock
T91
Panel EEPROM error
T92
Print drum EEPROM write error
T93
NET-D hardware error
T94
Call service error: TPH
Paper feed tray check
UR
A06
RIS
T67
Master loading error on first print drum side
Master removal error on first print drum side Master present in master removal section on first print drum side
OE
T41
A02
A04
[16-3]
Paper jam on second print drum Awaiting removal of master from second print drum side
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type
Description
Error type
Description
Card counter: No card
D01
First print drum not installed
B21
Storage memory: Read/write error
D02
First print drum incompatibility
B22
Job separator: Power OFF
D03
First ink cartridge not installed
B23
Job separator: No-tape error
D04
First ink cartridge incompatibility
B24
Job separator: Jam error
D05
Master not installed
B31
Network cable not connected
B32
NIC: External communication error
B33
ID address setup error
B34
RLP: No-toner error
B35
RLP: Service error Description
OP
Error type
E
B01
D07
First master disposal box not installed
D08
Master-making unit not installed
D09
Master-making unit not set into position
D11
Front cover not set into position
D13
Main unit rear cover not set into position
D17
Master incompatibility
D18
First print drum pull-out possible
D19
Master-making unit pull-out possible Master-making unit drawer cover not in position Master-making unit drawer cover may now be opened
C01
First ink cartridge replacement
C02
Master roll replacement
C03
First master disposal box full
D21
C04
No-paper error
D22
C05
Both master disposal boxes full
D28
C41
Second ink cartridge replacement
D30
Front cover setting demand
C43
Second master disposal box full
D41
Second print drum not installed
D42
Second print drum incompatibility
D43
Second ink cartridge not installed
D44
Second ink cartridge incompatibility
D47
Second master disposal box not installed
OE
UR
D20
D58
Second print drum pull-out possible
D62
Second print drum pull-out command DtoP cancellation due to missing second print drum
D68
RIS
Error type
[16-4]
First print drum pull-out command DtoP cancellation due to missing first print drum
Description
E01
Battery replacement
E02
Maintenance call
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Description
Error type
Description Specified area/traced color separation: Image processing time-out error
No master on first print drum
F70
F02
Paper/master-making size incompatibility 1
F71
F03
Multi-up: Paper size error
F72
F05
Minimum print quantity setting error
F73
F10
Paper/master-making size incompatibility 2 Auto size reproduction disabled (falls outside range of possible size reproduction)
F24 F30
Multiple feed check
F32
Storage memory: No space available
F37
Combined use of book mode and AF not possible
F44 F45 F46 F47
F74
F75
F76
F77
DtoP original/paper incompatibility Auto size reproduction disabled (exceeds original size detection range)
Turbo not possible due to low temperature Combined use of specified area separation and AF not possible Second print drum color not matching with DtoP job color Print drum color not matching with DtoP job color
F78
Digitizer: Stage cover open
F79
Digitizer: No original during rescanning
UR
F43
No master on second print drum Hand-written/red-color separation: Image processing time-out error Auto tray selection not possible, RLP tray designation disabled
OP
F01
E
Error type
F80
Presence of original unknown/no original
F81
Inconsistency of first print drum color between DtoP job and specified color Combined use of AF and postcard size reproduction not possible
F82
Paper not compatible with dual-color printing
Dual-color printing: Ink-saving setting only for one print drum Paper not compatible with printing by second print drum
F83
Use of second print drum mode not possible
F48
Multi-up: Outside original size detection range
F85
Scanning not possible: External CI not connected
F49
Multi-up: No original when Start key pressed
F90
Supply stock management (ink)
F91
Supply stock management (master)
F58 F60 F61 F62 F63 F64 F65
Error type
RLP paper/original size incompatibility
H01
RLP auto-link/RLP error RLP auto tray selection/nonstandard-size original
H04 H07
Specified function disabled, at job reception Scan mode auto-saving size selection/nonstandard-size original RLP saddle stitching not possible
RIS
F66
Use of RLP mode not possible (RLP information not acquired) Use of RLP mode not possible (NET-D initialization in process) RLP auto-link/master-making continuation confirmation (when printing quantity is 0)
OE
F52
F67 F68 F69
RLP rotation sorting not possible Specified area/traced color separation: Excess number of specified areas Specified area/traced color separation: Distance of border for specified area longer than master-making size
[16-5]
Description General supply parameter input (first print drum) General supply parameter input (master) General supply parameter input (second print drum)
Chapter 16 Panel Message
2) Details of error codes
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 520
T01 [Main motor lock] T01-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Press the Reset key.
OP
Error type
E
Service engineer call errors (T**)
Error detecting condition Main motor lock detected. The main motor FG sensor does not switch on within 10 msec after the main motor switches ON.
521
The position B sensor does not change status within 2910 pulses while the main motor is ON.
524
The clamp unit is not at the home position while the print drum operates (except during master disposal).
537
The print drum fails to stop at position B.
538
The print drum is not locked during operations.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
400 401 404 405 406 407 408
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
Error detecting condition The elevator upper-limit position detection and the elevator lower-limit detection are switches ON simultaneously. Elevator motor overload detected. The elevator motor overcurrent port was activated 20 consecutive times (polling at 10-msec intervals). The elevator lower-limit sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the elevator motor applies a lifting force from the elevator lower-limit position. The elevator upper-limit sensor does not switch ON within 12 seconds after the elevator motor applies a lifting force. The elevator upper-limit sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the elevator motor applies a lowering force from the elevator upper-limit position. The elevator lower-limit sensor does not switch ON within 12 seconds after the elevator motor applies a lowering force. The elevator upper-limit sensor remained OFF for more than 2 seconds during elevator servo action. Printing began with the elevator upper-limit sensor in the OFF state in custom paper feed mode.
RIS
436
T02 [Elevator motor lock]
T02-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OE
Error point
UR
1.
[16-6]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display
Error reset method
T03 [Clamp motor lock] T03-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
E
Error type
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition
OP
Error point 500
The clamp sensor A is OFF at the end of the home positioning action during clamp unit initialization. The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor operates in the forward direction. The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor operates in the reverse direction.
501 502
The clamp sensor A does not switch ON within 3 seconds during clamp unit initialization. The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp releasing operation. The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the print drum position-A compensation operation. The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp unit home positioning operation.
504 505 506
UR
503
507
The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the clamp releasing operation.
508
The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the print drum position-A compensation operation.
514
The print drum is not at the horizontal home position while the clamp unit operates.
545
The clamp unit is not at the specified position at the start of print drum rotation.
546
The clamp unit is not at the home position at the start of print drum horizontal movement.
547
The clamp unit is not at the home position when the master-making unit begins its motion.
Error type
Error reset method Error point 513
T04-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OE
Panel display
T04 [Ink overflow]
Error type
Panel display
Error detecting condition The overflow sensor switches ON successively for the set number of times during the 10-ms-interval overflow sensor check.
T05 [Print positioning pulse motor lock] T05-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
RIS
Error reset method
Press the Reset key with the overflow sensor switched OFF.
Error point 610
612
616
Error detecting condition
Time-out error generated during vertical print positioning. The 1-step Vertical Print Positioning key was pressed with position information undefined. (This error may occur after a recovery operation.)
Step movement was invoked with vertical print positioning system information undefined.
[16-7]
Error type
T06 [Horizontal pulse motor lock]
Panel display
T06-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Error reset method
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
Error detecting condition The horizontal home position sensor detects no light within xx seconds after the horizontal home positioning operation initiates movement toward the right during drive releasing operation. The light path of the horizontal home position sensor is not blocked within xx seconds after the horizontal home positioning initiates movement toward the left during drive connecting operation. Although the horizontal pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
OP
Error point
E
Chapter 16 Panel Message
607 608 609
Time-out error generated during horizontal movement.
617
Step movement was invoked with horizontal system information undefined.
618
The clamp unit is not at the home position during horizontal movement. The light path of the drive release home position sensor is not blocked during drive connecting operation.
627 628
The drive release home position sensor detects no light during drive releasing operation.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
601 602
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
Error detecting condition The print pressure control sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 3.9 seconds after the print pressure control motor activates to increase pressure during home positioning. The print pressure control sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 4.6 seconds after the print pressure control motor activates to reduce pressure during home positioning. Although the print pressure control pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control). Time-out occurred during print pressure relative movement (movement based on pulse count only, without sensor check).
RIS
626
T11 [Print pressure control pulse motor lock] T11-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OE
Error point 600
UR
611
[16-8]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display
Error reset method
301 305 306 307 309
316
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
205
T13-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The cutter home position switch does not change from ON to OFF within 100 ms after the cutter unit moves from the home position.
The cutter home position switch does not switch ON within 300 ms after the cutter begins operating. The master positioning sensor is ON even when the print drum rotates to the specified angle after cutting the master. The cutter home position switch does not switch ON within 450 ms after the cutter returns to the home position.
RIS
222
T13 [Cutter motor lock]
OE
Error point
204
Error detecting condition Overload current detected in master disposal motor. The master disposal motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals). Master compression motor lock detected. The RMGA compression detection switches ON while lifting the compression plate. The master compression sensor does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression motor initiates reciprocal motion. The master compression sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the master compression motor applies a force to begin compression. The compression detection does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression motor applies a force to begin compression. The FG count value does not change when the master compression motor applies a force to begin compression, moving away from the home position sensor. (The master compression motor FG sensor does not change status.) Master disposal motor lock detected. The master disposal motor FG sensor does not change status within 10 msec after the master disposal motor switches ON.
UR
300
203
Press the Reset key.
OP
Error point
T12 [Master disposal section motor lock] T12-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
E
Error type
[16-9]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
Press the Reset key.
Error point 112
E
Panel display
T14 [Flatbed error] T14-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Error detecting condition
OP
Error type
The home position sensor does not switch OFF within the set time.
113
The home position sensor does not switch ON within the set time.
114
Faulty machine parameters.
115
The scanner operation fails to complete within the set time. Time-out error generated during black shading (Black compensation fails to complete within the set time.) Time-out error generated during white shading (White compensation fails to complete within the set time.)
117 118 123
The command to the Gate Array scanner was given before the scanner returned to the home position. Time-out error generated during offset adjustment (Offset adjustment fails to complete within the set time.)
UR
116
124
Time-out error generated during gain adjustment (Gain adjustment fails to complete within the set time.)
125
Offset adjustment processing not completed (Process fails to complete within the set times.)
126
Gain adjustment processing not completed (Process fails to complete within the set times.)
135
Device malfunction during offset adjustment.
136
Device malfunction during gain adjustment.
137
Device malfunction during black shading.
138
Device malfunction during white shading.
140
Scanner unit communication error (NAK generated twice, undefined command, etc.) Scanner unit communication time-out error (time-out error generated during reception)
142
The scanner unit detected a sequence error in the main printer unit.
150 151 152 153 154 159
Time-out error for scanner command reception occurred in the main printer unit.
The main printer unit received an undefined command from the scanner. The main printer unit detected a communication sequence error in the scanner unit. Scanner communication error in the main printer unit (ACK, NAK, or reception channel error occurred.) The main printer unit could not complete transmission to the scanner within the set time.
Scanner not connected.
Although the read pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
RIS
170
OE
141
[16-10]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display
Error reset method
T15 [AF error] T15-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
E
Error type
Switch power OFF, then ON.
004
Error detecting condition
OP
Error point Communication error with the AF-CPU.
100
Original IN sensor adjustment error in the AF.
101
AF-EEPROM error.
Time-out error generated at the ABC standby position. This error is issued if the original stops at the ABC standby position after the start of AF scanning operation (with ABC), and the original remains electrically charged for the set time. * Issued by AF. The main unit transmitted an operation request command with AF in the 24V OFF state. * Issued by AF.
110
111
AF unit communication time-out error (time-out error generated during reception).
122
The AF unit detected a sequence error in the main printer unit.
130
AF command reception time-out error generated in the main printer unit. After a command is sent from the printer to the AF, if no response is transmitted within the set time, the same command is retransmitted. This error is generated if no response is made to this retransmitted command within the set time.
UR
121
131
The main printer unit received an undefined command from the AF. The main printer unit detected a communication sequence error in the AF unit. * Issued by AF.
132
AF communication error in the main printer unit (ACK or NAK error).
134
The main printer unit did not transmit a signal to the AF within the set time. After a command is sent from the AF to the printer, if no response is transmitted within the set time, the same command is retransmitted. This error is generated if no response is made to this retransmitted command within the set time.
143 145 146 160 161
OE
133
Error type
Panel display
AF operation fails to complete within the set time.
AF unit communication error (NAK generated twice, undefined command, etc.) The AF unit detection signal switched OFF while the AF unit was in operation. AF unit not connected.
T17 [Solenoid counter not connected] T17-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Solenoid counter connection signal: ON
RIS
Error reset method
Original width VR value error in the AF.
Error point 020
Error detecting condition
The solenoid counter is not connected.
[16-11]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error point 207 208 216 217
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 414 415
424 437 442
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The TPH pressure sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 2 seconds pressure motor operates to reduce pressure (or during home positioning). The TPH pressure sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 2 seconds pressure motor operates to reduce pressure. The TPH pressure sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 2 seconds pressure motor applies a force to begin compression. The TPH pressure sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 2 seconds pressure motor applies a force to begin compression.
Error type
T20-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Error reset method Error point 539
after the thermal after the thermal after the thermal
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The paper ejection wing home position sensor does not change status within the set time after the paper ejection wing pulse motor starts operation. The paper ejection wing home position sensor does not switch OFF within the set time after the paper ejection wing pulse motor operates when the paper ejection wings are at the home position (home position sensor ON). Paper ejection motor overload current detected. The motor overcurrent port switches ON 20 consecutive times after the paper ejection motor switches ON (polling at 10-msec intervals). The paper ejection motor FG sensor detected 20 pulses or less within 100 ms. Paper ejection motor lock detected. The paper ejection motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals). Although the paper ejection wing pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
T24 [Inking motor lock]
T24-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
RIS
Panel display
after the thermal
T20 [Paper ejection section motor lock]
OE
416
E
Error reset method
OP
Panel display
T19 [Thermal pressure motor lock] T19-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
UR
Error type
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON. Error detecting condition Inking motor lock detected. The inking motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals).
[16-12]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error point 026
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 249
251
252 248 250
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 438 439
Error detecting condition No battery power. * Readjust the machine clock after resetting the error.
T27 [Master-making unit motor lock] T27-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The light path of the master-making unit pull-out position sensor was not blocked within the set time when the master-making unit moved to the pull-out position. Although the master-making unit transport pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value. Or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control). The pressure plate of the master-making unit opens at a location other than the master-making unit pullout position. The master-making unit position sensor does not change status as specified within the set time after the master-making unit begins moving to the standby position. The master-making unit position sensor does not change status as specified within the set time after the master-making unit begins moving to the master-making position.
T29 [Guide release motor lock]
T29-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The guide roller release home position sensor detects no light within 3.8 seconds after the guide roller begins operating. The light path of the guide roller release home position sensor is not blocked within 3.8 seconds after the guide roller begins operating. Overload current detected in the guide release motor. The guide release motor overcurrent port switches ON 20 consecutive times (polling at 10-msec intervals).
RIS
450
Replace the battery.
OE
Error type
E
Error reset method
OP
Panel display
T25 [No-battery error] T25-*** !!Low Battery!! Call Service
UR
Error type
[16-13]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error point 445 446 451
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 521
E
Error reset method
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The central flap home position sensor detects no light within the set time after the central flap motor begins operating. The light path of the central flap home position sensor is not blocked within the set time after the central flap motor begins operating. Overload current detected in the central flap motor. The central flap motor overcurrent port switches ON 20 consecutive times (polling at 10-msec intervals).
T41 [Main motor lock] T41-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OP
Panel display
T31 [Central flap motor lock] T31-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
UR
Error type
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition
The position-B sensor does not change status within 2910 pulses while the main motor is ON. The clamp unit is not at the home position when the print drum operates (except in master disposal operation).
524 537
The position-B stop operation failed.
538
The print drum is not locked during print drum operation.
T43 [Clamp motor lock]
OE
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
T43-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Press the Reset key.
Error point
Error detecting condition
500
The clamp sensor A is OFF after the clamp unit initializes and completes home position operation. The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor begins rotating in the forward direction. The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor begins rotating in the reverse direction.
501 502 503
RIS
504
The clamp sensor A does not switch ON within 3 seconds during clamp unit initialization. The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp releasing operation. The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the position-A compensation operation. The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp unit home positioning operation.
505 506
507
The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the clamp releasing operation.
508
The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the position-A compensation operation.
514
The print drum is not at the horizontal home position while the clamp unit is operating.
545
The clamp unit is not at the specified position when the print drum begins rotating.
546
The clamp unit is not at the home position when the print drum initiates horizontal movement.
547
The clamp unit is not at the home position when the master-making unit begins its motion.
[16-14]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method Error point 513
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
With the overflow sensor switched OFF, press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The overflow sensor switches ON successively for the set number of times during the 10-ms-interval check.
T45 [Print-positioning pulse motor lock] T45-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
Error point
Error detecting condition
Time-out error generated during vertical print positioning operation. The 1-step Vertical Print Positioning key was pressed with position information undefined. (This error may occur after a recovery operation.)
612 616
UR
610
Step movement was invoked with vertical print positioning system information undefined.
Error type
T46 [Horizontal pulse motor lock]
Panel display
T46-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Error reset method
608
609 611 617 618
Error detecting condition The horizontal home position sensor detects no light within xx seconds after the horizontal home positioning operation initiates movement toward the right during drive releasing operation. The light path of the horizontal home position sensor is not blocked within xx seconds after the horizontal home positioning operation initiates movement toward the left during drive connecting operation. Although the horizontal pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
Time-out error generated during horizontal movement. Step movement was invoked with horizontal system information undefined.
The clamp unit is not at the home position during horizontal movement. The light path of the drive release home position sensor is not blocked during drive connecting operation.
RIS
627
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
OE
Error point 607
E
Panel display
T44 [Overflow] T44-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OP
Error type
628
The drive release home position sensor detects no light during drive releasing operation.
[16-15]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error point 600 601 602 626
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 300 301
306 307 309
Error detecting condition The print pressure control sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 3.9 seconds after the print pressure control pulse motor activates to increase pressure during home positioning. The print pressure control sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 4.6 seconds after the print pressure control pulse motor activates to reduce pressure during home positioning. Although the print pressure control pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control). Time-out error generated in print pressure relative movement (movement based on pulse count only, without sensor check).
T52 [Master disposal section motor lock] T52-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition Overload current detected in master disposal motor. The master disposal motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals). Master compression motor lock detected. The RMGA compression detection switches ON while lifting the compression plate. The master compression sensor does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression motor initiates reciprocal motion. The master compression sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the master compression motor applies a force to begin compression. The compression detection does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression motor applies a force to begin compression. The FG count value does not change when the master compression motor applies a force to begin compression, moving away from the home position. (The master compression motor FG sensor does not change status.)
OE
305
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
Error type
Panel display
T64 [Inking motor lock]
T64-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
RIS
Error reset method Error point 539
E
Error reset method
OP
Panel display
T51 [Print pressure control pulse motor lock] T51-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
UR
Error type
Error detecting condition Inking motor lock detected. The inking motor FG sensor does not change status within 20 ms after the inking motor switches ON.
[16-16]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display
Error reset method
248
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The master-making unit position sensor does not change status as specified within the set time after the master-making unit begins moving to the standby position. The master-making unit position sensor does not change status as specified within the set time after the master-making unit begins moving to the master-making position.
RIS
OE
UR
250
T67-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OP
Error point
T67 [Master-making unit motor lock]
E
Error type
[16-17]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display
Error reset method
T91 [Panel EEPROM error] T91-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
E
Error type
Press the Reset key.
968
Error detecting condition
OP
Error point
Read error generated in the panel EEPROM.
969
Write error generated in the panel EEPROM.
976
Checksum error generated in the panel EEPROM.
977
Verification error generated in the panel EEPROM.
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 570
Panel display
Error reset method
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition
T93 [NET-D hardware error]
T93-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Switch power OFF, then ON.
Error detecting condition
OE
Error point
933
T92-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
The print drum EEPROM is being accessed while the print drum is performing a releasing action.
Error type
932
T92 [Print drum EEPROM write error]
UR
Error type
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
No response from the NIC when NIC is accessed. No response for 90 seconds during NET-D initialization.
T94 [Call service error: TPH]
T94-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Switch power OFF, then ON.
Error point
Error detecting condition
RIS
The TPH code does not correspond to the machine model code when the power is switched ON (only when the master-making unit is in the operating position) or when the master-making unit is inserted in the operating position.
225
[16-18]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error point 036 059
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point
E
Error reset method
Switch power OFF, then ON.
Error detecting condition The size of the stored/acquired information does not correspond to the NVRAM-specified size for that information (mechanical unit). The machine serial number information sent from the SH-PCB does not correspond to the machine serial number information in the mechanical control PCB.
T96 [Data not input] T96-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Enter parameters in Test Mode.
OP
Panel display
T95 [FRAM error] T95-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
UR
Error type
Error detecting condition
171
TPH resistance not set.
172
Scanner adjustment not completed.
433
Paper width potentiometer (VR) not set.
569
Print drum color or ink category not set.
613
Print pressure compensation not set.
972
REv data storage area not initialized.
T97 [PC card access error]
T97-*** !!System Error!! Press Reset Key If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OE
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Press the Reset key.
Error point 939 940 941 942 943 944
PC card access error: Device information multiple-ID error (PCMCIA card information error). PC card access error: Device error (incompatible CF card error). PC card access error: File creation failed (File with the same name already exists).
PC card access error: Unformatted.
PC card access error: Media ID error.
PC card access error: Media error (CF card cannot be accessed). PC card access error: Insufficient disc capacity (Not enough space available on the CF card to write data).
RIS
945
Error detecting condition
PC card access error: PC card not set.
946
990
PC card access error: Specified file not found on the selected drive.
991
PC card access error: The file accessed is not currently open.
992
PC card access error: File information storage folder already in use.
993
PC card access error: Incorrect read address setting for data transfer to mechanical unit.
994
PC card access error: File deletion failed.
[16-19]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display
Error reset method
T98 [Hardware error] T98-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
E
Error type
Switch power OFF, then ON.
Error detecting condition
002
No response from the SH4F PCB. Although SH4F PCB signal is detected at power ON, if no response is received from the SH4F PCB and an T98-069 error is detected, the detected error is rewritten to this error code.
OP
Error point
005
Hardware error (Machine model code error).
006
FRAM checksum error.
025
Faulty tag RF PCB (initial communication with the tag RF PCB failed).
Unable to write data to the main unit EEPROM (EEPROM cannot be accessed).
035
CRC error generated in the main unit EEPROM (EEPROM data error).
038
The machine model information for the PCB and the EEPROM fail to match.
039
Incorrect EEPROM.
051
Communication error with touch-panel controller.
053
Unsuccessful attempt to read memory parameters (program, mode, user paper).
054
Unsuccessful attempt to write memory parameters (program, mode, user paper). The machine model code sent from the SH-PCB does not correspond to the machine model information in the mechanical control PCB.
064 065 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074
RIS
075
Communication between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB: Undefined command was issued. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (01) (on mechanical control PCB side): Incorrect number of bytes in received command. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (03) (on mechanical control PCB side): RNK received. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (04) (on mechanical control PCB side): NAK received 3 times. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (05) (on mechanical control PCB side): No ACK response. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (06) (on mechanical control PCB side): Transmission prevented by SH PCB. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (07) (on mechanical control PCB side): Command received while awaiting response. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (08) (on mechanical control PCB side): FB command received in mode other than download mode. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (09) (on mechanical control PCB side): FC/FD command received in mode other than download mode. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (10) (on SH PCB side): FE command received (No mechanical control PCB program). Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (11) (on SH PCB side): Incorrect number of bytes in received command. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (12) (on SH PCB side): Received ACK not specified in sequence. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (13) (on SH PCB side): RNK received. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (14) (on SH PCB side): NAK received 3 times. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (15) (on SH PCB side): No ACK response. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (16) (on SH PCB side): Transmission prevented by the mechanical control PCB (CTS = 1).
OE
055
UR
034
076 077 078 079 080
[16-20]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
T98 [Hardware error]
Error type
Error reset method
Switch power OFF, then ON. Error detecting condition
OP
Error point
E
Panel display
T98-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
086
Unsuccessful attempt to write user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values).
087
No values set for memory parameters (program, mode, user paper).
088
No values set for user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values).
089
The DIP-SW 1 on the SH4F PCB is switched ON (PCB check setting is switched ON).
090
The machine model code in memory parameters (program, mode, user paper) does not match.
091
The checksum for memory parameters (program, mode, user paper) does not match.
083 084
092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 119
120
129
The checksum for user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values) does not match during standby. The checksum for memory parameters (program, mode, user paper) does not match during standby. The Test Mode adjustment value set in the print drum memory lies outside the adjustment range. The machine serial number information in the main unit EEPROM does not correspond to the machine serial number information in the FRAM. SH4F PCB: Undefined interrupt processing was generated.
Faulty image PCB (Memory check of the image processing IC failed). (Image processing IC check timing: during initialization) Time-out error generated while awaiting scanner serial communication interrupt command (The CPU failed to receive interrupt command from FORCE device within 100 ms). Scanner serial communication timing: Transmission of data to AK8412 (A/D converter). Transmission of data to scanner gate array. Reading of data from scanner gate array Faulty scanner gate array PCB (Error generated in the memory check of the scanner gate array). Time-out error (action other than sensor standard) for the write pulse motor during master transport in master-making operation. Time-out error (action other than sensor standard) for the load pulse motor during master transport in master-making operation. The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the upper-limit value during automatic multiple paper feed adjustment in Test Mode No. 705.
RIS
245
The machine model code in user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values) does not match. The checksum for user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values) does not match. Communication sequence error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB.
OE
082
UR
085
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (17) (on SH PCB side): Mechanical control download mode was transmitted in error. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (18) (on SH PCB side): Mechanical CTS remained at for 2 seconds. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (19) (on SH PCB side): FA command received at time other than startup. Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (20) (on SH PCB side): command not received within 10 seconds after power ON. Unsuccessful attempt to read user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values).
081
246 422
[16-21]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method Error point 423 448 449
E
Panel display
T98 [Hardware error] T98-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Switch power OFF, then ON.
Error detecting condition The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the lower-limit value during automatic multiple paper feed sensor adjustment in Test Mode No. 705. The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the upper-limit value during automatic registration sensor adjustment in Test Mode No. 709. The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the lower-limit value during automatic registration sensor adjustment in Test Mode No. 709.
OP
Error type
922
SH4F PCB system lock (image communication error).
934
Communication error between mechanical control PCB and tag RF PCB (detection on tag RF PCB side). Communication error between mechanical control PCB and tag RF PCB (detection on mechanical control PCB side).
935
Serial number not set.
938
Old FRAM version.
947
24V-A does not switch ON (possibility of blown 24V-A fuse).
948
24V-B does not switch ON (possibility of blown 24V-B fuse).
949
24V-A does not switch OFF.
950
24V-B does not switch OFF.
952
Checksum error in SH4F PCB flash memory.
953
Error generated during attempt to write data to SH4F PCB flash memory.
960
Error generated during attempt to read data from SH4F PCB flash memory.
961
SH4F PCB flash memory not in use. Illegal power ON command received from the mechanical control PCB at a time other than boot up or wake-up.
979 986 987 988
OE
978
UR
937
Communication error between DSP and mechanical control PCB.
The second paper feed motor parameter and the main motor parameter are . Main motor parameter acquisition mode and second paper feed motor parameter acquisition mode in Test Mode have not been executed.
T99 [Software error]
T99-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
RIS
Error type
Abnormal setting value in SH4F PCB flash memory properties. The software for the mechanical control PCB does not match the DSP (main, second) software. Download the DSP software version suitable for the software for the mechanical control PCB.
Panel display
Error reset method
Switch power OFF, then ON.
Error point 900
Error detecting condition
Heart-beat lock error.
[16-22]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 201 202 206
A01 [Master feed error]
A01-*** Master Mis-Feed Pull Out Master Making Unit and Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master in Place.
OP
Error type
E
2-1 Jam errors (A**)
Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON and Master positioning sensor: OFF > (Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
Error detecting condition During master settings, cutting, or making, the master positioning sensor does not switch ON, even after the master is sent. During master setting or at the start of the master-making operation, the master positioning sensor does not switch OFF, even when the master is rewound for the set time. Time-out error generated during master-making operation. The master positioning sensor is ON during standby.
214
The master positioning sensor is ON at the start of the master-making operation.
215
Although the write pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
509
A02 [Master loading error on first print drum side] A02-*** Master Loading Error Pull Out Print Cylinder 1 and Discard Master
First print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and first print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > * If the print drum is at position B when this error occurs, the print drum lock is automatically released. Error detecting condition
OE
Error point
UR
211
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
The master loading sensor was OFF when the presence of master was checked at the specified angle during master-loading operation.
A04 [Master removal error on first print drum side]
A04-*** Master Disposal Error Pull Out Print Cylinder 1 and Discard Master
First print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and first print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > * If the print drum is at position B when this error occurs, the print drum lock is automatically released. Error detecting condition
RIS
Error point 303
Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the print drum check.
[16-23]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
A05-*** Master Jammed in Disposal Unit Pull Out Master Disposal Box 1 and Remove Jammed Master
E
Panel display
A05 [Master present in master removal section on first print drum side]
First master disposal box safety SW: OFF and first master disposal jam sensor: OFF > (Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
OP
Error type
Error point
Error detecting condition
304
Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the master disposal box check.
312
The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the start of the master-making operation.
315
The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the completion of the recovery operation.
Panel display Error reset method Error point
A06 [Paper feed tray check]
A06-*** Safety SW on Standard Feed Tray is Activated Reset paper on Standard Feed Tray Paper feed tray upper safety SW: ON or Paper feed tray lower safety SW: ON (Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
UR
Error type
Error detecting condition
403
The paper feed tray safety switch is OFF.
435
The paper feed tray interlock switch is OFF during operations.
Error type
A16-*** Master Remains on Print Cylinder 1 Pull Out Print Cylinder 1 and Remove Master
First print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and first print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > * If the print drum is at position B when this error occurs, the print drum lock is automatically released.
OE
Panel display
A16 [Awaiting removal of master from first print drum side]
Error reset method Error point 525
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Error detecting condition
Waiting for master to be removed.
A17 [Cutter error]
A17-*** System Error in Master Making Unit Take Out Master and then Close Master Making Unit Cover Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON and Master detection sensor: OFF > Error detecting condition
RIS
Error point 209
The cutter home position switch is OFF when the machine enters standby, at the start of the mastermaking operation, or when the master material is set.
[16-24]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
A34 [Awaiting master reset] A34-*** Master Not Set in Place Insert Lead Edge of Master into Master Entrance and Close Master Making Unit Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON and Master positioning sensor: OFF >
E
Error type
218
Error detecting condition
OP
Error point
Requesting the reset of master material.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
A42 [Master loading error on second print drum side] A42-*** Master Loading Error Pull Out Print Cylinder 2 and Discard Master
Second print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and second print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > * If the print drum is at position B when this error occurs, the print drum lock is automatically released. The master loading sensor was OFF when the presence of master was checked at the specified angle during master-loading operation.
509
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
A44 [Master removal error on second print drum side] A44-*** Master Disposal Error Pull Out Print Cylinder 2 and Discard Master
Second print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and second print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > * If the print drum is at position B when this error occurs, the print drum lock is automatically released. Error detecting condition
OE
Error point 303
Error detecting condition
UR
Error point
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the print drum check.
A45 [Master present in master removal section on second print drum side] A45-*** Master Jammed in Disposal Unit Pull Out Master Disposal Box 2 and Remove Jammed Master
Second master disposal box safety SW: OFF and second master disposal jam sensor: OFF > (Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
Error point
Error detecting condition
Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the master disposal box check.
RIS
304 312
The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the start of the master-making operation.
315
The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the completion of the recovery operation.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
A56 [Awaiting removal of master from second print drum side] A56-*** Master Remains on Print Cylinder 2 Pull Out Print Cylinder 2 and Remove Master Second print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and second print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > * If the print drum is at position B when this error occurs, the print drum lock is automatically released.
Error point 525
Error detecting condition
Wait for the master to be removed.
[16-25]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
E
2-2 Jam errors (A**: Indicates the detail of J-type error) A07 [Paper feed error]
Error point
Error detecting condition The central transport sensor was OFF when the paper reached the central transport sensor, and the paper feed sensor was ON when the operation stopped (paper feed error). The paper feed sensor switched OFF consecutively for n number of times at the time of the initial paper feed jam detection (no-paper feed error).
409 412
OP
Error type
413
The paper feed sensor was ON when the paper left the paper feed sensor (extra-long paper error).
418
The paper feed sensor was ON at the start of the operation.
429
Paper feed error (for recovery).
432
The paper feed sensor was already ON at the time of paper feed retry after no-paper feed.
443
The registration sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the registration sensor.
444
The registration sensor was ON although there was no paper.
Error point
421 430
Paper jam on print drum (for recovery).
Error type Error point
Error detecting condition
The paper ejection sensor was ON when the paper left the paper ejection sensor. The paper ejection sensor was ON at the start of the operation. Paper ejection error (for recovery).
RIS
431
A09 [Paper ejection error]
OE
417
Error detecting condition
The central transport (paper ejection) sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the central transport (paper ejection) sensor, and the paper feed (central transport) sensor was OFF when the operation stopped (paper jam on print drum). The paper feed sensor was ON when extra-long paper left the paper feed sensor in the extra-long paper mode (paper length longer than 555 mm).
410
411
A08 [Paper jam on first print drum]
UR
Error type
[16-26]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type
A10 [AF original feed error] Original jam error resulting from pulled-out original. • The original IN sensor switched OFF while the original registration sensor and the original IN sensor were ON during scanning. • The paper ejection sensor switched OFF before completion of scanning (prior to SIG_C output). • The original registration sensor switched OFF from the time of completion of leading edge insertion operation to the time of scanning start. * Issued by AF.
OP
102
103
105
Original jam at the AF registration sensor (extra-long paper error). The original registration sensor fails to switch OFF after the original IN sensor switched ON (max: movement of 486 mm). * Issued by AF. Original jam at the original IN sensor The original IN sensor fails to switch OFF after the original registration sensor switched OFF (max: movement of 84 mm). * Issued by AF. Original jam at the original OUT sensor The original OUT sensor fails to switch OFF after the original IN sensor switched OFF (max: movement of 86 mm). * Issued by AF. Original registration sensor non-arrival jam Paper fails to reach the original registration sensor after the feed operation started (max.: movement of 103 mm). * Issued by AF. Original IN sensor non-arrival jam Paper fails to reach the original IN sensor after the scanning operation started (max.: movement of 42 mm). * Issued by AF. Original OUT sensor non-arrival jam Paper fails to reach the original OUT sensor after the original IN sensor switched ON (max.: movement of 86 mm). * Issued by AF.
UR
106
107
108
OE
109
169
Error detecting condition
E
Error point
Error type
The AF opens and triggers an error while a master is in the AF.
A25 [Central transport error]
Error point 419 440
The central transport sensor was ON at the start of the operation. The central transport sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the central transport sensor (central transport error). The central transport sensor was ON at the time the paper left the central transport sensor (central transport error). The central transport sensor was ON when the paper reached the central transport sensor, and the central transport sensor was OFF when the operation stopped (central transport error).
RIS
441
Error detecting condition
447
Error type Error point 410
A48 [Paper jam on second print drum] Error detecting condition
The central transport (paper ejection) sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the central transport (paper ejection) sensor, and the paper feed (central transport) sensor was OFF when the operation stopped (paper jam on print drum).
[16-27]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type Panel display Error reset method
E
Option errors (B**) B01 [Card counter: No card] B01-*** Insert Card in Key/Card Counter Insert the card.
Error point 730
Error detecting condition
Card counter: No card
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
B21 [Storage memory: Read/write error] B21-*** !!System Error!! Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Switch power OFF, then ON.
Error point Storage memory access error.
Error type Panel display Error reset method Error point 721
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point
Press the Reset key. (Confirm that the job separator is switched ON.) Error detecting condition With the tape separation setting switched ON, the job separator is in a Power OFF state when the Start key is pressed. The BUSY signal remains at (powe is switches OFF during job separator tape output) for more than 7 seconds after the cluster-A signal switches ON.
B23 [Job separator: No-tape error]
B23-*** No Paper Tape in Job Separator Replace Tape Roll
Press the Reset key. (Confirm that the job separator is switched ON.) Error detecting condition With the BUSY signal at (Power ON) and the tape separation setting switched ON, the tape detection signal is at (no tape) when the Start key is pressed. The tape detection signal is at (no tape) after the tape output command is issued, and the BUSY signal changed from to (after completion of operation).
RIS
723
B22 [Job separator: Power OFF] B22-*** !! Job Separator is OFF !! Turn On Power Switch of it
OE
727
722
Error detecting condition
UR
715
OP
3.
[16-28]
Error type
B24 [Job separator: Jam error]
Panel display
B24-*** Paper Tape Jam in Job Separator Remove Paper Tape
724 725 726
Error type Panel display Error reset method Error point
Press the Reset key. (Confirm that the job separator jam is reset.)
Error detecting condition With the BUSY signal at (Power ON) and the tape separation setting switched ON, the tape detection signal is at (tape remaining) when the Start key is pressed. The tape jam detection signal remains at for more than 1.2 seconds after cluster-A signal switched ON (tape transport error). The tape jam detection signal was at when the BUSY signal changed from to or it remains at for more than 7 seconds after the cluster-A signal switched ON (tape ejection error).
OP
Error point
B31 [Network cable not connected]
B31-*** !! No Linked Printer Detected !! Check Cable Connection and Power Supply for Linked Printer Press the Reset key.
UR
Error reset method
E
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error detecting condition
916
The network cable was not connected when the machine starts up.
920
Error detected by NET-D (NAK received). * No response from communication destination, interruption by communication destination, TCP/IP not operating in the NET-D, unauthorized interrupt received from the main unit, etc.
Error type Panel display
Press the Reset key. >
OE
Error reset method
B32 [NIC: External communication error]
B32-*** !! No Linked Printer Detected !! Check Cable Connection and Power Supply for Linked Printer
Error point
914
915 917
Error type
MIB information request error. * Transmission not possible after waiting 3 seconds (WAK), no response from communication destination, interruption by communication destination, TCP/IP not operating in the NET-D, unauthorized interrupt received from the main unit, etc. No MIB information returned. * No response from the NET-D (communication destination) for 50 seconds (error detected in main unit).
Network communication error.
B33 [ID address setup error]
B33-*** No IP Address Assigned to This Printer Contact Your Network Administrator
RIS
Panel display
Error detecting condition
Error reset method Error point 931
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition
The DHCP is ON, but the DHCP server cannot be found.
[16-29]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
B34 [RLP: No-toner error] B34-*** No Toner in Linked Printer Press the Reset key.
Error point
Error detecting condition No toner in the Prioa (linked printer).
Error type
B35 [RLP: Service error]
Panel display
B35-*** Linked Printer in Error
Error reset method
Press the Reset key.
Error point
Error detecting condition
Service error in Prioa (linked printer).
RIS
OE
UR
970
OP
919
E
Error type
[16-30]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type Panel display
Error reset method
E
Consumables error (C**) C01 [First ink cartridge replacement] C01-*** No Ink in Print Cylinder 1 Replace Ink Cartridge
First ink cartridge set SW: OFF -> ON > Or first print drum safety SW: OFF, first print drum connection signal: OFF, and first print drum lock sensor: OFF >
OP
4.
Error point
Error detecting condition
512
The ink sensor does not switch ON when the inking operation is conducted for the set time (inkless).
563
The remaining volume information in the ink tag reached the default value.
574
Inkless error was generated 5 times for the same ink cartridge.
Panel display Error reset method
C02 [Master roll replacement]
C02-*** No Master Replace Master Roll Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON >
UR
Error type
Error point
Error detecting condition
200
The 10-ms-interval master end check detected 2 consecutive times during the master transport.
240
The remaining volume information in the master tag reached the maximum value.
253
No-master error was generated twice for the same master.
Error type
Error reset method Error point 308
C03-*** Master Disposal Box 1 is Full Empty Master Disposal Box
OE
Panel display
C03 [First master disposal box full]
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Switch OFF the first master disposal box sensor OFF, then turn ON after waiting at least 5 seconds.
Error detecting condition After the master compression motor activates in the compressing direction, the compression detection switches ON before the FG count exceeds the specified volume.
C04 [No-paper error]
C04-*** Add Paper
The paper detection sensor is ON.
Error point
Error detecting condition
The paper detection sensor is OFF.
RIS
402
[16-31]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
C05-*** Master Disposal Box 1 and 2 are Full Empty Both Master Disposal Boxes
E
Panel display
C05 [Both master disposal boxes full]
Switch OFF the first master disposal box sensor, then switch it back ON after waiting at least 5 seconds. Switch OFF the second master disposal box sensor, then switch ON after waiting at least 5 seconds.
Error point
OP
Error type
Error detecting condition
After the master compression motor on the first print drum side or second print drum side begins to apply a compression force, the compression detection activates and the other disposal box exceeds 90% capacity before the FG count exceeds the specified volume (Expected disposal box full).
Error type Panel display
Error reset method Error point
C41 [Second ink cartridge replacement] C41-*** No Ink in Print Cylinder 2 Replace Ink Cartridge
Second ink cartridge set SW: OFF -> ON > Or second print drum safety SW: OFF, second print drum connection signal: OFF, and second print drum lock sensor: OFF >
UR
317
Error detecting condition
512
The ink sensor does not turn ON when inking is performed for the set time (inkless).
563
The remaining volume information in the ink tag reached the specified value.
574
An inkless error was generated 5 consecutive times for the same ink cartridge.
Error type Panel display
Error point
Error detecting condition After the master compression motor begins to apply a compressive force, the compression detection switched ON before the FG count exceeds the specified volume.
RIS
308
C43-*** Master Disposal Box 2 is Full Empty Master Disposal Box Switch OFF the second master disposal box sensor, then switch back ON after waiting at least 5 seconds.
OE
Error reset method
C43 [Second master disposal box full]
[16-32]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type Panel display Error reset method
E
Set check errors (D**) D01 [First print drum not installed]
D01-*** Set Print Cylinder in Place First print drum safety SW: ON, first print drum connection signal: ON, and first print drum lock sensor: ON >
OP
5.
Error point
Error detecting condition
526
The print drum is removed. (The connection signal, safety SW, and lock sensor are OFF.)
527
The print drum connection signal is OFF after the print drum is installed.
528
The print drum safety switch is OFF after the print drum is installed.
529
The print drum lock sensor is OFF after the print drum is installed (time-out during insertion: 5 sec). The print drum connection signal does not switch OFF within 5 seconds after the print drum safety switch switches OFF when the print drum is removed.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 532
D02 [First print drum incompatibility] D02-*** Wrong-Type Print Cylinder Installed in Cylinder Position 1 Replace with Correct Type
UR
530
Replace with the correct print drum. (The print drum code must match the machine model.) Error detecting condition
The print drum is incompatible.
Error type
OE
Panel display
D03 [First ink cartridge not installed] D03-*** Install Ink Cartridge in Print Cylinder 1
Error reset method
First ink cartridge set SW: ON
Error point 533
Error type
Error detecting condition
The ink cartridge set switch is OFF.
D04 [First ink cartridge incompatibility]
Panel display
D04-*** Wrong-type Ink Cartridge Installed in Cylinder 1 or Cannot Read Ink Info Replace Ink Cartridge or Contact Dealer/Riso Office
Error reset method
Replace with a correct ink cartridge.
Error detecting condition
RIS
Error point 534
The ink cartridge is incompatible.
560
Error due to missing ink cartridge tag.
561
Ink tag communication error (tag communication error due to noise). Abnormal ink tag information. Checksum error, verification error, storage of master information, etc.
562 564 575
Serial number mismatch detected during the periodic ink tag serial number check. Software error involving ink tag. Antenna CH selection error, erroneous writing of data to write-protected area.
[16-33]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
D05 [Master not installed] D05-*** Set Master in Place
E
Error type
Master-making unit sensor: OFF >
Error point
Error detecting condition The master detection sensor is OFF.
Error type Panel display Error reset method
D07 [First master disposal box not installed] D07-*** Set Master Disposal Box 1 in Place
First master disposal box safety SW: ON >
Error point
Error detecting condition
The master disposal box safety switch is OFF.
Error type Panel display Error reset method Error point
D08 [Master-making unit not installed]
D08-*** Set Master Making Unit in Place With the master-making unit removed, the second master-loading sensor or the master-making unit pullout position sensor is ON, and the cover safety SW is OFF. >
UR
310
OP
210
Error detecting condition
224
The master-making unit is in the pulled-out condition (safety switch, lock sensor OFF).
226
The master-making unit safety switch is OFF after the master-making unit is installed. The master-making unit lock sensor is OFF after the master-making unit is installed (time-out during insertion: 5 sec). The master-making unit lock sensor is ON after the master-making unit is removed (master-making unit safety switch is OFF).
227
OE
228
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
D09 [Master-making unit not set into position] D09-*** Close Master Making Unit Cover
Master-making unit sensor: ON >
Error point 212
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Error detecting condition
The master-making unit sensor is OFF.
D11 [Front cover not set into position] D11-*** Close Front Cover
Front cover safety SW: ON
RIS
Error point 535
Error detecting condition
The front cover safety switch is OFF.
[16-34]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
D13 [Main unit rear cover not set into position] D13-*** Rear Cover of Main Body is Off Call Service Rear cover safety SW: ON
Error point
Error detecting condition
The rear cover of the main unit is not set into position. (The rear cover safety switch is OFF.)
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
D17 [Master incompatibility] D17-*** Wrong-type Master Installed or Cannot Read Master Info Replace Master Roll or Contact dealer/Riso office
Master-making unit safety SW: ON -> OFF and Master-making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF >
Error point
Error detecting condition
The master is incompatible.
UR
236
OP
009
E
Error type
237
Error due to missing master tag.
238
Master tag communication error (tag communication error due to noise). Abnormal master tag information. Checksum error, verification error, storage of ink information, etc.
239 241
Serial number mismatch detected during the periodic master tag serial number check. Software error involving master tag. Antenna CH selection error, erroneous writing of data to write-protected area.
256
Error type
D18-*** Print Cylinder 1 has been Unlocked First print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and first print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > Or Front cover set SW: ON > Or master-making unit release button: ON >
OE
Panel display
D18 [First print drum pull-out possible]
Error reset method
Error point 522
Error type
Panel display
The print drum is in the pull-out position. (The print drum lock solenoid is ON.)
D19 [Master-making unit pull-out possible]
D19-*** Master Making Unit has been Unlocked Second master-loading sensor: OFF; Master-making unit pull-out position sensor: OFF; and Cover safety SW: OFF Or master-making unit drawer cover safety SW: OFF -> ON
RIS
Error reset method
Error detecting condition
Error point 223
Error detecting condition
The master-making unit is in the pull-out position (solenoid ON).
[16-35]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
D20 [Master-making unit drawer cover not in position] D20-*** Close Master Making Unit Access Cover Master-making unit drawer cover safety SW: OFF -> ON
Error point
Error detecting condition
Error type Panel display Error reset method
OP
The master-making unit drawer cover is not in position. (Master-making unit removed (second master-loading position sensor: ON or master-making unit pullout position sensor: ON) and cover safety SW: OFF)
254
D21 [Master-making unit drawer cover may now be opened] D21-*** Ready to Open Master Making Unit Access Cover Master-making unit drawer cover safety SW: ON -> OFF Or Pull-out position sensor: ON -> OFF
Error point
Panel display
Error reset method
542 577
D22 [First print drum pull-out command] D22-*** Print Cylinder 1 is not Set in Place Press Cylinder Release Button and Pull Out Print Cylinder Once after Button Lights
First print drum safety SW: OFF; first print drum connection signal: OFF; and first print drum lock sensor: OFF Error detecting condition The print drum lock sensor is ON when the print drum lock solenoid is ON. (The check is performed 100 ms after the print drum lock solenoid switches ON.) Data cannot be written to or read from the EEPROM inside the print drum. (EEPROM cannot be accessed.)
OE
Error point
UR
Error type
540
Error detecting condition
The master-making unit drawer cover may now be opened. (Master-making unit pull-out position sensor: ON and Cover safety SW: ON)
255
531
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
CRC error in the EEPROM inside the print drum (data error in the EEPROM). The print drum is not set into position correctly (print drum radius difference).
D28 [DtoP cancellation due to missing first print drum]
D28-*** Dual-color Job Data Received Set Print Cylinder 1 in Place Color: 1 (Color name) Print drum detection.
Error detecting condition
RIS
Error point 573
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 576
E
Error type
The print drum required for DtoP is not installed.
D30 [Front cover setting demand] D30-*** Starting Recovery Action Close Front Cover
Front cover SW: ON
Error detecting condition The front cover is not in position when a single print drum is set into place in position and the print drum removal button is pressed without the print drum at position B.
[16-36]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
D41 [Second print drum not installed] D41-*** Set Print Cylinder 2 in Place Second print drum safety SW: ON, second print drum connection signal: ON, and second print drum lock sensor: ON >
E
Error type
Error point
Error detecting condition
The print drum has been pulled out. (The connection signal, safety SW, and lock sensor are OFF.)
527
The print drum connection signal is OFF after the print drum is installed.
528
The print drum safety switch is OFF after the print drum is installed.
529
The print drum lock sensor is OFF after the print drum is installed (time-out during insertion: 5 sec). The print drum connection signal does not switch OFF within 5 seconds after the print drum safety switch switched OFF when the print drum is removed.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 532
D42-*** Wrong-Type Print Cylinder Installed in Cylinder Position 2 Replace with Correct Type
Replace with the correct print drum. (The print drum code must match the machine model.) Error detecting condition
The print drum is incompatible.
Error type Panel display Error reset method
D43 [Second ink cartridge not installed] D43-*** Install Ink Cartridge in Print Cylinder 2
Second ink cartridge set SW: ON
Error detecting condition
OE
Error point 533
D42 [Second print drum incompatibility]
UR
530
OP
526
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
The ink cartridge set switch is OFF.
D44 [Second ink cartridge incompatibility] D44-*** Wrong-type Ink Cartridge Installed in Cylinder 2 or Cannot Read Ink Info Replace Ink Cartridge or Contact Dealer/Riso Office
Replace with the correct ink cartridge.
Error point 534
Error due to missing ink cartridge tag.
RIS
560
Error detecting condition
The ink cartridge is incompatible.
561
562 564
575
Ink tag communication error (tag communication error due to noise). Abnormal ink tag information. Checksum error, verification error, storage of master information, etc. Serial number mismatch detected during periodic ink tag serial number check. Software error involving ink tag. Antenna CH selection error, erroneous writing of data to write-protected area.
[16-37]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
D47 [Second master disposal box not installed] D47-*** Set Master Disposal Box 2 in Place
Second master disposal box safety SW: ON >
Error point
Error detecting condition The master disposal box safety switch is OFF.
Error type
D58 [Second print drum pull-out possible]
Error reset method
OP
310
Panel display
D58-*** Print Cylinder 2 has been Unlocked Second print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and second print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF > Or front cover SW: ON > Or master-making unit release button: ON >
Error point
The print drum is in the pull-out position. (The print drum lock solenoid is ON.)
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
540 542 577
D62 [Second print drum pull-out command] D62-*** Print Cylinder 2 is not Set in Place Press Cylinder Release Button and Pull Out Print Cylinder Once after Button Lights
Second print drum safety SW: OFF; second print drum connection signal: OFF; and second print drum lock sensor: OFF Error detecting condition The print drum lock sensor is ON when the print drum lock solenoid is ON. (The check is performed 100 ms after the print drum lock solenoid switches ON.) Data cannot be written to or read from the EEPROM inside the print drum. (EEPROM cannot be accessed.)
OE
Error point 531
Error detecting condition
UR
522
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
CRC error in the EEPROM inside the print drum (data error in the EEPROM). The print drum is not set into position correctly (print drum radius difference).
D68 [DtoP cancellation due to missing second print drum] D68-*** Dual-color Job Data Received Set Print Cylinder 2 in Place Color: 2 (Color name) Print drum detection.
RIS
Error point 573
E
Error type
Error detecting condition
The print drum required for DtoP is not installed.
[16-38]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type Panel display Error reset method
E01 [Battery replacement] E01-*** !!Battery Replacement!! Call Service Press the Reset key.
Error point
Panel display Error reset method Error point
E02 [Maintenance call] E02-*** !!Maintenance!! Call Service
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The master count reached the value set in the Test Mode at power ON, reset, or operation completion (maintenance call). The copy count reached the value set in the Test Mode at power ON, reset, or operation completion (maintenance call). The maintenance count in the print drum reached the value set in the Test Mode at power ON, reset, or operation completion (maintenance call).
RIS
OE
022
UR
Error type
012
Error detecting condition
Battery voltage is below 2.1 V when power is switched ON (replacement of battery required). * Since the battery voltage detected by the software is 0.5 V below the actual battery voltage, error detection activates when the value set in the RTC is below 1.6 V. * Precautions for battery replacement Switch ON main power before replacing the battery. If the battery is replaced with the main unit OFF, the following two problems may occur: The internal clock data will be incorrect. -> Reset the clock. The error will be issued once again when power is switched ON after battery replacement. -> Switch power OFF, then ON again, and confirm that no error is issued.
010
011
E
Warnings (E**: Service engineer call)
OP
6.
[16-39]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
F01 [No master on first print drum] F01-*** No Master on Print Cylinder 1 Make a New Master
Press the Reset key. Set an original and execute the master-making operation.
Error point
Error detecting condition
There is no master on the print drum at the start of printing.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 018
F02 [Paper/master-making size incompatibility 1] F02-*** Page Format is Larger than Paper Size !! Possible Ink Smudges on Prints !!
UR
015
Press the Continue button or Stop button (Check print paper size). Error detecting condition
Paper and master-making sizes (master size on print drum) do not match at the start of printing.
Error type
Panel display
F03 [Multi-up: Paper size error] F03-*** !! Multi-Up is Not Available with This Paper Size !! Replace with Proper Paper of Standard Size
Press the Close button. Set standard-size paper on the paper feed tray.
OE
Error reset method Error point 016
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point
Error detecting condition
The multi-up operation was executed with nonstandard paper.
F05 [Minimum print quantity setting error] F05-*** Enter Print Quantity Over [%02d], Programmed Minimum Value
Reset the print quantity.
Error detecting condition In print or master-making modes with Auto-Print switched ON, the set number of prints failed to meet the minimum print quantity when the Start key was pressed.
RIS
019
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 021
E
Warnings (F**: Others)
OP
7.
F10 [Paper/master-making size incompatibility 2] F10-*** Page Format is Larger than Paper Size !! Possible Ink Smudges on Prints !! (Continue->PROOF Key)
Press the Continue button or Stop button. (Check print paper size.) Error detecting condition
Paper and master-making sizes (master size on print drum) do not match at the start of proof printing.
[16-40]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
F24-*** !! Images may not fit in Frame of Paper with This Reproduction Size !! Re-perform the size setting
Press the Reset key. (Manually enter the size reproduction setting.)
Error point
Error detecting condition
Size reproduction setting falls outside the permissible range when the operation started based on the auto size reproduction setting.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 420
F30 [Multiple feed check] F30-*** !! Possible Multiple Paper Feed !! Check Printed Copies
Press the Multiple Feed Detection OFF button or Reset key.
Error detecting condition
UR
037
Multiple feed detected during operation (when no paper jam error is generated). Multiple feed occurred in the operation in which reference data was obtained in the sensor light emission level check.
425 426
Multiple feed occurred in the most recent operation in the sensor light emission level check.
Error type
Panel display
F32 [Storage memory: No space available] F32-*** !! The Data Storage Area has Become Full !! Clear Old Storage Data
Press the Reset key. (Check the available capacity.)
OE
Error reset method Error point 713
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Error detecting condition
Inadequate storage memory during data write.
F37 [Combined use of book mode and AF not possible] F37-*** !! Book Shadow Editor is Not Available with ADF !! Place Original on Stage Glass
Press the Close button.
Error detecting condition
RIS
Error point 050
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 902
E
Panel display
F24 [Auto size reproduction disabled (falls outside range of possible size reproduction)]
OP
Error type
With book mode set, an original was found on the AF at the start of the master-making operation.
F43 [DtoP original/paper incompatibility]
F43-*** !! Unmatched Size-Current Page and Printing Paper !! Check Paper Size
Press the Continue button or Stop button. (Check print paper size.) Error detecting condition
Paper and original sizes do not correspond at the start of DtoP master-making.
[16-41]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
F44-*** !! No Auto Reproduction with This Original and Printing Paper !! Select Size Manually
Press the Reset key. (Manually enter the size reproduction setting.)
Error point
Error type Panel display Error reset method Error point 954 959
F45 [Presence of original unknown/no original] F45-*** Original Undetected Reset Original
Reset the original. Press the Continue button or Stop button.
Error detecting condition Master-making operation or RLP output was executed with the auto tray or auto size reproduction setting set to ON, and the presence of an original could not be detected. Master-making operation or RLP output was executed without an original. When the Next button was clicked on the multi-up count entry screen of Multi-up Wizard, no original was detected.
981
Error type
F46 [Inconsistency of first print drum color between DtoP job and specified color] F46-*** !! Unmatched Color -Data Color and Cylinder Color 1 !! Change Print Cylinder Color: (Color name)
OE
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 903
Error detecting condition
The original size detection failed. (The original did not conform to the detection specification.)
UR
901
Error type
Panel display
Press the Reset key or the Continue button. (Replace the print drum.) Error detecting condition The color of the print drum fails to match between the color specified for DtoP job and the color set for the specified print mode.
F47 [Combined use of AF and postcard size reproduction not possible] F47-*** [A4->Card] Reproduction is Not Available in combination with ADF Place Original on Stage Glass
Remove the original from the AF and press the Close button.
RIS
Error reset method Error point 904
Error type
Error detecting condition Master-making operation or RLP output was performed with Postcard> size reproduction selected and original set on the AF.
F48 [Multi-up: Outside original size detection range]
Panel display
F48-*** Original Size Exceeds Limitation of Multi-Up Specify Original Size
Error reset method
Press the Reset key.
Error point 955
E
Panel display
F44 [Auto size reproduction disabled (exceeds original size detection range)]
OP
Error type
Error detecting condition
If multi-up is set, the size of the original is nonstandard or falls outside the permissible range.
[16-42]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Panel display Error reset method
F49 [Multi-up: No original when Start key pressed] F49-*** Original Undetected Reset Original
E
Error type
Press the Stop button.
Error detecting condition
989
No original is detected when the Enter key is pressed for the single original/multi-original multi-up setting.
Error type
OP
Error point
F52 [Use of RLP mode not possible (RLP information not acquired)]
Panel display
F52-*** Acquiring Linked Printer Configuration Data Please Wait a Moment
Error reset method
Press the Close button.
Error point
Error detecting condition
RLP mode cannot be used. (RLP information has not been acquired.)
Error type Panel display Error reset method Error point 927
UR
912
F58 [Use of RLP mode not possible (NET-D initialization in process)] F58-*** Starting Up RISORINC-NET Please Wait a Moment Press the Close button.
Error detecting condition
RLP mode cannot be used. (The NET-D is being initialized.)
F60 [RLP auto-link/master-making continuation confirmation (when printing quantity is 0)] F60-*** !! Number of Copies is set to "0"!! Printing Operation will Start on this Printer (Continue -> START key)
OE
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Press the Start key or Stop button.
Error point 929
Error type
F61 [RLP paper/original size incompatibility]
F61-*** Set Proper Paper Size in the Linked Printer
RIS
Panel display
Error detecting condition
Confirmation of auto-link operation/master-making continuation (when printing quantity is 0).
Error reset method
Select paper using Manual Feed or Paper Selection.
Error point 930
Error detecting condition
RLP paper/original size is incompatible.
[16-43]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
F62-*** !!Auto-Link Operation is Not Available!! Specified Linked Printer may be in Error or Turned OFF Press the Stop button
Error point
Error generated on the RLP side during RLP auto-link operation.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 971
F63 [RLP auto tray selection/nonstandard-size original] F63-*** !! No Auto Paper Size Selection with Irregular Size Original !! Select Paper Size and then Restart
Press the Reset key. (Manually select paper.)
Error detecting condition
RLP output was performed with a nonstandard-size original and auto paper size selection.
Error type
F64 [Specified function disabled, at job reception] F64-*** Processing Print Data from PC This Function is Not Available while Processing Current Data
OE
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 964
Error detecting condition
UR
956
E
Panel display
F62 [RLP auto-link/RLP error]
OP
Error type
Error type
Panel display
Error detecting condition An instruction involving an exclusive function (scan mode, overlay, name insertion, digitizer, hold, simplified separation) was issued for DtoP job reception, development, or awaiting-output status.
F65 [Scan mode auto-saving size selection/nonstandard-size original] F65-*** Auto Page Size Selection is Not Available for Irregular-Size Original Select Format Size to Store and then Restart
Press the Reset key. (Manually select storage size.)
RIS
Error reset method
Press the Close button.
Error point 965
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 962
Error detecting condition The size selected in auto size (storage data) selection at the start of scanning operation was nonstandard.
F66 [RLP saddle stitching not possible] F66-*** Saddle Stitching is Not Available with This Paper Size
Press the Close button.
Error detecting condition The paper in the specified paper feed tray was not A3, B4, or A4 (landscape) at the time of RLP output with saddle stitching function switched ON.
[16-44]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
F67-*** !! Improper Paper for Rotation Sorting !! Set Same Sized Paper in 2 Trays, One in Horizontal and Other in Vertical Direction Press the Close button.
Error point
Error detecting condition
No paper of the size specified by the RLP Paper Tray is set in either portrait or landscape orientation at the time of RLP output with rotation sorting function switched ON.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 173
F68 [Specified area/traced color separation: Excess number of specified areas] F68-*** !! Exceeding Number of Editing Areas Selected !! Deselect Some Areas and Redo Color Separation
UR
963
Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition
The number of specified areas for specified area/traced color separation exceeded the maximum value.
Error type
Panel display
F69 [Specified area/traced color separation: Distance of border for specified area longer than master-making size] F69-*** Cannot Read Selection Area Reset Original Correctly Press the Reset key.
OE
Error reset method Error point 174
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Error detecting condition The distance of the border of the specified area for specified area/traced color separation exceeds the value corresponding to the master being made.
F70 [Specified area/traced color separation: Image processing time-out error] F70-*** !! Complicated Area Form !! Re-circle Editing Areas and Redo Color Separation
Press the Reset key.
Error point
Error detecting condition
Image processing time-out error during specified area/traced color separation.
RIS
175
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 015
E
Panel display
F67 [RLP rotation sorting not possible]
OP
Error type
F71 [No master on second print drum] F71-*** No Master on Print Cylinder 2 Make a New Master
Press the Reset key. Set an original and execute the master-making operation. Error detecting condition
No master is found on the print drum at the start of printing.
[16-45]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
F72-*** !! Complicated Area Form !! Re-circle Editing Areas and Redo Color Separation Press the Reset key.
Error point
Error detecting condition
Image processing time-out error during hand-written/hand-written (ink)/red-color separation.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 975
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point
F73-*** Paper Size cannot be Defined by Specified Reproduction Size Select Paper Size Manually
Select paper using Manual Feed or Paper Selection. Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition The specified fixed size reproduction and the detected original size do not match at the start of RLP. Or zoom/independent size reproduction was specified.
F74 [Turbo not possible due to low temperature] F74-*** Printer Temperature is Low is Not Available [Cancel] [Continue]
Press the Stop button or Continue button.
Error detecting condition
Turbo print was used at temperatures below 15°C while using the second print drum.
OE
980
F73 [Auto tray selection not possible, RLP tray designation disabled]
UR
176
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
F75 [Combined use of specified area separation and AF not possible] F75-*** Specified Area Separation is Not Available in Combination with ADF Place Original on Stage Glass
Press the Reset key.
Error point 982
Error detecting condition
With specified area separation set, an original was on the AF at the start of master-making.
F76 [Second print drum color not matching with DtoP job color]
RIS
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 903
E
Panel display
F72 [Hand-written/red-color separation: Image processing time-out error]
OP
Error type
F76-*** !! Unmatched Color -Data Color and Cylinder Color 2 !! Change Print Cylinder Color: (Color name)
Press the Reset key or Continue button. (Replace the print drum.) Error detecting condition
The color of the print drum to be used fails to match for the DtoP job and the specified print mode.
[16-46]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
F77-*** !! Unmatched Color -Data Color and Cylinder Colors !! Change Print Cylinders Color: (Color name) Color: (Color name)
E
Panel display
F77 [Print drum color not matching with DtoP job color]
Press the Reset key or Continue button. (Replace the print drum.)
Error point 903
Error detecting condition
The color of the print drum to be used fails to match for the DtoP job and the specified print mode.
Error type
F78 [Digitizer: Stage cover open] F78-*** Close Stage Cover
Error reset method Error point 731
If original moves you may not get desired result
UR
Panel display
Close the stage cover. Press the Close button.
Error detecting condition
The stage cover was opened during the digitizing operation.
Error type
F79 [Digitizer: No original during rescanning] F79-*** Set Original and Press Start Key Re-scanning will be Started to Add Image Processing
OE
Panel display
Error reset method
Press the Start key or Stop button.
Error point 732
Error type
Panel display
Error detecting condition
No original was detected at the start of digitizer rescanning.
F80 [Paper not compatible with dual-color printing] F80-*** Dual-Color Printing is Not Available for This Paper Size Load Paper Larger than B5（ Portrait）
Press the Reset key. (Use paper larger than the minimum size.)
RIS
Error reset method Error point 966
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 967
OP
Error type
Error detecting condition
The paper size is smaller than the minimum paper size for dual-color printing.
F81 [Dual-color printing: Ink-saving setting only for one print drum] F81-*** Either of Masters is Made in Ink Saving Process Operate Dual-Color Printing?
Press the Stop button or Continue button. Error detecting condition At the start of dual-color printing operation, the master was made with one print drum in ink-saving master-making mode and the other in normal master-making mode.
[16-47]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error reset method
F82-*** Printing is Not Available for This Paper Size with Print Cylinder 2 Set Print Cylinder to be Used in Cylinder Position 1 and Re-select Printing Mode
E
Panel display
F82 [Paper not compatible with printing by second print drum]
OP
Error type
Press the Reset key.
Error point
The paper size is smaller than the minimum paper size for printing with the second print drum.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method Error point 973
Error type
F83-*** Printing is Not Available for This Setting with Print Cylinder 2 Set Print Cylinder to be Used in Cylinder Position 1 and Re-select Printing Mode Press the Reset key.
Error detecting condition There is no confidential master on the first print drum at the start of printing/proof-printing operation with the second print drum.
F85 [Scanning not possible: External CI not connected] F85-*** ! Scanning is Not Possible ! External CI is not Connected or Processing Connection Check Cable Connection
OE
Panel display
F83 [Use of second print drum mode not possible]
UR
974
Error detecting condition
Error reset method
Press the Close button or Start key.
Error point 995
Error type
Error detecting condition
The PS7R is not connected.
F90 [Supply stock management (ink)]
Panel display
F90-*** Check Stock of Required Ink and Please Order If Needed
Error reset method
Press the Close button.
RIS
Error point 957
Error type
F91 [Supply stock management (master)]
Panel display
F91-*** Check Stock of Required Master and Please Order If Needed
Error reset method
Press the Close button.
Error point 958
Error detecting condition
Stock management counter for the relevant color ink ≥ Specified quantity (setting value).
Error detecting condition
Stock management counter for the master ≥ Specified quantity (setting value).
[16-48]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
Error type Panel display Error reset method
H01 [General supply parameter input (first print drum)] Ink (Cylinder 1) Cannot Get Consumables Info Input Values Required Enter the parameters and press the Start key.
Error point
Error detecting condition
Enter parameters, since first ink tag color information, steady-state viscosity information, and FP viscosity information are unreliable.
Error type Panel display Error reset method Error point 242
Error type Panel display Error reset method Error point
H04 [General supply parameter input (master)] Ink (Master) Cannot Get Consumables Info Input Values Required
Enter the parameters and press the Start key.
Error detecting condition Enter parameters, since master tag sensitivity information, steady-state viscosity information, and FP viscosity information are unreliable.
UR
566
H07 [General supply parameter input (second print drum)] Ink (Cylinder 2) Cannot Get Consumables Info Input Values Required
Enter parameters and press the Start key.
Error detecting condition Enter parameters, since second ink tag color information, steady-state viscosity information, and FP viscosity information are unreliable.
RIS
OE
571
E
Parameter Errors (H**)
OP
8.
[16-49]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
J-type Error Display
E
2.
Bit
Numeric value
A10
AF original feed error
OP
Paper jam (including AF original feed error) generates an internal [A**] error. However, since this type of error is combined with another error code, the panel displays a [J**] error code. in the [J**] error code is a value obtained by assigning a bit to each error (one of four types shown in the table below) subject to paper jam processing and adding the numeric values corresponding to the assigned bits. The detailed error code is displayed by pressing the < * > key.
Bit 0
1
A09
Paper ejection error
Bit 1
2
Paper jam on print drum
Bit 2
4
A07
Paper feed error
Bit 3
8
A25
Central transport error
Bit 4
16
Error type
Panel display
J** [Paper jam error] J** Paper Jam Remove Paper in Indicated Areas and Press [OK] Button
A08/A48
Error name
UR
Error type
Example) When and are generated, [J05] is displayed.
Errors Saved in Memory
OE
3.
The following errors are saved in memory and cannot be cleared simply by switching off the power. Description
Error type A04 A44 A08 A48 A25 C01 C41
Master removal error on second print drum side Paper jam on first print drum
Paper jam on second print drum Central transport error
First ink cartridge replacement
Second ink cartridge replacement Master roll replacement
RIS
C02
Master removal error on first print drum side
C03
First master disposal box full
C43
Second master disposal box full
C05
Both master disposal boxes full
[16-50]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
OP
E
Chapter 17: Other Precautions
Contents
1. Machine Setup During the Installation ................................................................................ 17-2 1) Set-up Wizard .............................................................................................................. 17-2 2. Sales Mode ....................................................................................................................... 17-3
UR
3. Firmware Downloading Procedure ...................................................................................... 17-4 4. Downloading the DSP Software ......................................................................................... 17-5 5. Replacing the Mechanical control PCB .............................................................................. 17-6 6. Replacement of the SH4F PCB .......................................................................................... 17-7 7. Battery Replacement ......................................................................................................... 17-7 8. Acquiring the Main Motor Parameters ................................................................................ 17-7 9. Acquiring the Second Paper Feed Motor Parameters ......................................................... 17-8
OE
10. Replacement of the Print drum PCB ................................................................................. 17-8 11. Adjusting the Print Position .............................................................................................. 17-9
RIS
12. Adjusting the Horizontal Print Position ............................................................................. 17-9
[ 17 - 1 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
E
rence. e f e r r o al f l manu 1. Machine Setup During the Installation a c i n h tec m RZ5 o r f n e tak 1) Set-up Wizard age is This p
OP
Set-up wizard is designed for enhancing customer satisfaction with his or her RZ5 unit, depending on the type of customer account. Until the Set-up wizard is completed at the time of the machine installation, the Set-up wizard display keeps popping up each time the machine power is turned ON. Typically used functions at commercial, educational and print shop accounts are pre-registered at [BASIC], [SCHOOL] and [PRINTING] respectively. Set-up wizard is deeply related in providing maximum functionality with the RISO i Quality System benefits.
In order to take the maximum advantage of the RISO i Quality System, the [setting of the machine clock] is essential.
OE
UR
[ Selections ]
1701
1703 [ Direct Access ]
Set-up wizard customer brackets
Master-Making Print Screen Link Screen Screen Dot Renew Dot DIRECT ACCESS Reserve Reserve 2 in 1 Interval Memory Memory Memory STANDARD Confidential Confidential nce. refere SELECTIONS r Idling Idling o f l a nu Book nical ma h c e t RZ5Program n from e k Dot Renew Dot a t age is p s Reserve Reserve i h T DIRECT ACCESS 2 in 1 Interval Book SCHOOL Memory Memory Memory Confidential Confidential SELECTIONS Idling Idling Program Dot Renew Dot DIRECT ACCESS Reserve Reserve 2 in 1 Interval Memory Memory Memory PRINTING Confidential Confidential SELECTIONS Idling Idling Book Program Area Name
RIS
User Category
[ 17 - 2 ]
1702
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
E
2. Sales Mode 1) Easy access to change the machine settings by the Salesman and Serviceman.
Turn the machine power ON, while pressing the + key and x key on the Operation Panel.
OP
The [Sales Mode] is essential in setting the machine to the best condition to suit each customer. The activation of the Sales mode helps troubleshooting the minor troubles on the machine.
There are total of 25 items under the Sales Mode. The first 2 items, starting with P are linked to the Admin. (user mode), and the remaining 23 items are linked to the serviceman test mode. The [Sales Mode] is for the use by the Salesman and the Serviceman's use only, and is not intended for the customer (operator) use.
UR
Item Displayed Language Beep Sound Test Print A System Configuration Data Output Clear Error Status Data Set-up Wizard Initialize Optional Configuration Check Print Quantity Repeat Setting Min. Print Quantity Control Warning Display Control Auto Multi-Up Recovery Program Print Repeat Setting Max. Print Quantity Control Paper ID Auto-Repeat Control
OE
Code No. P001 P004 0080 0095 0110 0116 0126 0150 0154 0159 0160 0161 0166 0167 0168 0169 0170 0199 0951 0956 0977 1229 3572 3573 3579
Fine Adjustment Button Display Control
RIS
Admin. Display Control Consumable Storage Indication Paper Size Detection Selection Ink Color Code
Automatic Print Position Reset Condition Setting Vertical and Horizontal Motion Distance Switching
RLP Mode Enable Control Zero Print Master Making Warning RLP Hold Output Enable Control Link Duplex Print Auto-Repeat 1704
[ 17 - 3 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
3. Firmware Downloading Procedure
E
(1) Switch OFF the machine power.
(2) Remove the download slot cover from the side of the rear cover, on the paper-feed side of the machine, by removing one screw (M3x6 : 1 pc).
OP
(3) Insert the downloading CF card in an card adopter, containing appropriate firmware for the Mechanical control PCB and SH4F PCB for the specific machine model. (4) Turn ON the machine power. The firmware for the Mechanical control PCB is automatically downloaded the first. The green LED 3 on the SH3M2 PCB, as well as the LED on the wake-up key on the operation panel starts to blink. The program is being downloaded.
UR
(5) When the green LED 3, green LED 2 and LED on the wake-up key changes from blinking to a solid light, the firmware downloading to the Mechanical control PCB is successfully finished. The firmware downloading to the SH4F PCB starts automatically. The green LED 3 lights solid, and both the green LED 2 and the wake-up key LED blinks to indicate that the downloading has started. The firmware downloading to the SH4F PCB is successfully finished when the green LED 3, green LED 2 and wake-up LED all lights solid. * If a red colored LED 1 aside the download slot blinks and the wake-up key LED changes to a solid light, the firmware downloading to the Mechanical control PCB went through an error and ended unsuccessfully. * If a red colored LED 1 aside the download slot lights up to a solid light and the wake-up key LED changes to a solid light, the firmware downloading to the SH4F PCB went through an error and ended unsuccessfully. The firmware downloading procedure must be repeated from the very start.
OE
(6) After the firmware downloading is successfully finished, switch OFF the machine power and remove the downloading CF card from the machine. (7) Mount the download slot cover back on the machine.
RIS
Note: The firmware downloading can be done with the 128CF card inserted.
[ 17 - 4 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
Downloading the DSP Software
E
4.
OP
(1) After downloading firmware for the mechanical control PCB and for the SH4F PCB, turn ON the machine in test mode to confirm that the machine is working properly. (2) Switch OFF the machine power and insert the download CF card, in an adopter, containing the DSP software. (3) Launch Test Mode and run Test Mode No. 102 (DSP Download (Main, Secondary). (4) Check the operation panel and make sure that the download is completed (The download should take around one minute). (5) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the CF card. (6) Launch Test Mode again and run Test Mode No. 126 (Optional Configuration Check). Check the software version. (7) If an error occurs during this process, repeat the procedure from the beginning.
RIS
OE
UR
Note: The DSP software downloading can be done with the 128CF card inserted.
[ 17 - 5 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
E
5. Replacing the Mechanical control PCB (1) Remove the first and second print drums.
(2) Switch off power, remove the EEPROM and battery, and dismount the mechanical control PCB.
OP
(3) Reinstall the EEPROM and battery removed in Step (2) to a new mechanical control PCB and mount the new mechanical control PCB in the machine. (4) Download the software for the mechanical control PCB (See the appropriate section of this Chapter). (5) Download the DSP software (See the appropriate section of this Chapter). (6) Switch off power and enter Test Mode.
(7) Run Test Mode No. 1198 (Initialize Memory), then switch off power.
UR
(8) Launch Test Mode again and run Test Mode No. 883 (Clamp home positioning action), Test Mode No. 893 (Print Drum Drive Lock Release Action), and Test Mode No. 900 (Vertical-centering action), for both the first and second print drums. (9) Install the print drums and run Test Mode No. 9874 to enter into the protected area test mode. (10)Without turning the power OFF, run test mode No. 1105 (Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode) and Test Mode No. 1106 (Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode) for both the first and second print drums. (11) Switch power OFF, then ON.
(12)The machine will start up normally if this procedure is performed correctly.
RIS
OE
(13)Set the machine calendar and time on the machine from the Adim. tab on the operation panel.
[ 17 - 6 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
E
6. Replacement of the SH4F PCB 1. Turn OFF the machine power. Then insert a clean CF (compact flash) card, in a card adopter with no data inside, into the card slot on the SH4F PCB.
OP
2. Turn ON the machine power in Test Mode and activate Test Mode No. 103 to upload the test mode settings from the existing SH4F PCB onto the CF card. 3. Turn OFF the machine power and remove the CF card from the slot. 4. Replace the existing SH4F PCB with a new one.
5. Download SH4F PCB firmware onto the new SH4F PCB, using another CF card in a card adopter. The firmware version to download must be the same version as the one which was in the removed SH4F PCB. 6. Turn OFF the machine power once the firmware is downloaded onto the new SH4F PCB, and remove the CF card from the slot.
UR
7. Turn the machine power back ON in Test Mode. Activate Test Mode No. 9874 to access into the protected area test mode. 8. Without turning the power OFF, activate test modes No. 1193 (REv data clear), No.110 (Jam status clear), No. 111 (user area memory clear), and No. 112 (test mode data clear). 9. Turn OFF the machine power and insert the CF card, with the uploaded test mode settings, removed from the machine in step No. 3 above. 10. Turn the machine power back ON in Test Mode and activate Test Mode No. 105 (downloading of the stored test mode settings back into new SH4F PCB).
OE
11. Turn OFF the machine power and remove the CF card from the card slot.
12. Turn ON the machine power, and if the machine starts up in normal condition, the PCB replacement job is completed.
7. Battery Replacement
Replace the battery on the mechanical control PCB with the machine power ON.
RIS
* If the battery is removed from the machine with the machine power OFF, in certain conditions the internal clock of the machine initializes to programmed default. In that case, the internal clock of the machine (the calender and the time) must be set from the Admin. tab of the operation panel.
8. Acquiring the Main Motor Parameters CAUTION: Always acquire the main motor parameters after replacing the mechanical control PCB or the main motor. (1) Set the first and second print drums in the machine. (2) Activate test mode No. 9874 to access into the protected area test mode. (3) Run Test Mode No. 1105 (Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode). (3) The print drums will begin rotating and obtain the parameters automatically. (4) Check the panel display to confirm that the process is complete.
[ 17 - 7 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
9. Acquiring the Second Paper Feed Motor Parameters
E
CAUTION: Always acquire the Second paper feed motor parameters each time the Mechanical control PCB or the Second paper feed motor is replaced.
OP
(1) Activate test mode No. 9874 to access into the protected area test mode.
(2) Run Test Mode No. 1106 (Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode).
(3) The guide roller moves to the nipping position, and the second paper feed motor begins to rotate and obtains the parameters automatically.
UR
(4) Check the panel display to confirm that the process is complete.
10. Replacement of the Print drum PCB
1. Turn OFF the machine power. Then insert a clean CF (compact flash) card, in a card adopter with no data inside, into the card slot on the SH4F PCB.
OE
2. Turn ON the machine power in Test Mode and activate Test Mode No. 104 to upload the test mode settings from the existing Print Drum PCB onto the CF card by selecting the correct print drum by the test mode. Keep the CFcard in the machine. 3. With the machine still powered ON and still in the Test Mode, open the front door of the machine and press the print drum release button (green button), and then pull out the Print Drum out of the machine. 4. Replace the Print drum PCB with a new one. Then insert the Print Drum back in the machine and close the front door. 5. With the machine still in the Test Mode, enter Test Mode 9874 to go into the protected area test mode.
RIS
6. Then activate Test Mode No.1211 and No.1212 to input the Serial Number of that Print Drum, by chosing the correct print drum by the test mode. 7. Activate Test Mode No. 106 to download the print drum test mode setting into the Print drum PCB, which was uploaded in the CF card by step No. 2 above. 8. Turn OFF the machine power, and remove the CF card from the machine. 9. Turn the machine power back ON and if the machine starts up in normal condition, the replacement procedure is completed. 10. If Error Message No. T97-990 [PC card access error: Specified file not found on the selected drive.] displays, it means that the Print Drum serial number input by Test Modes No. 1211 and No. 1212 are wrong. In this case, repeat the procedure from above step 5.
[ 17 - 8 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
Perform the procedure described below to adjust the print position:
E
11. Adjusting the Print Position
OP
(1) Adjust the master clamp range (See Chapter 14 ). (2) Adjust the Write start position (See Chapter 14 ).
(3) Adjust the Print start position (See Chapter 5 ).
(4) Adjust the Master-making elongation and shrinkage (See Chapter 14 ). (6) Adjust the FB scan start position (See Chapter 12 ).
Precaution in adjustment
UR
(7) Adjust the FB scanning image elongation and shrinkage adjustment (See Chapter 12 ).
Before making above test mode adjustments, it is important that all the mechanical components, such as the main drive area, paper feed area, print drum area, etc. are adjusted first.
OE
If the machine is equipped with the optional Auto Document Feeder (AF), the test mode adjustment on the AF unit should be made after the adjustments on the FB (flatbed) scanning is made.
12. Adjusting the Horizontal Print Position Perform the procedure described below to adjust the horizontal print position: (1) Adjust the horizontal write position (See Chapter 14 ).
RIS
(2) Adjust the horizontal print position (See Chapter 9 ).
[ 17 - 9 ]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
MEMO
[ 17 - 10 ]
Chapter 18 PCBs
RIS
OE
2.
Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 18-2 1) General wiring diagram .................................................................................................... 18-2 2) Power supply section wiring diagram ............................................................................... 18-3 3) Inter-PCB wiring diagram ................................................................................................. 18-4 4) Master-making section wiring diagram ............................................................................ 18-5 5) Paper feed section wiring diagram ................................................................................... 18-6 6) Imaging section wiring diagram ....................................................................................... 18-7 7) Paper ejection section/center transport section wiring diagram ....................................... 18-8 8) Main unit wiring diagram .................................................................................................. 18-9 9) Paper removal section wiring diagram ........................................................................... 18-10 10) Panel section wiring diagram ......................................................................................... 18-11 11) First print drum section wiring diagram .......................................................................... 18-12 12) Second print drum section wiring diagram ..................................................................... 18-13 13) Interlock section wiring diagram ..................................................................................... 18-14 14) Option section wiring diagram ........................................................................................ 18-15 Power Supply Unit Fuse List ................................................................................................. 18-16
UR
1.
OP
Contents
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
[18-1]
[18-2]
023-37138
024-37201
024-37137
MODE-KEY-PCB
LCD-CTL-PCB
MAIN-SW-PCB;SAN
Panel unit
102-00013
NET-D
112-00004
Card counter IV: N
024-50506
PRINTER-PCB
Scanner PCB
SW
section rear side
installed on paper feed
Actuators and sensors
113-00003
Job sorter IV: N
024-00302
AFVI;N
in paper ejection section
Actuators and sensors
center transport section
internal sensors
Paper feed tray
024-12602
PF-TRAY-PCB
024-12601
PFR-PCB sections, second clamp unit
first/second master removal
024-50503
MM-DRIVE-PCB
Actuators and sensors
first clamp unit
master making unit,
Actuators and sensors in
444-59003
RF PCB 3ch
Antenna
in horizontal sliding section
Actuators and sensors
Main motor, second paper feed motor & sensor
on main unit front side
444-59002
Antenna
in second print drum
Actuators and sensors
444-59002
Antenna
in first print drum
E
444-59006
OP Actuators and sensors
024-17178
DRUM-PCB
444-59003
RF PCB 3ch
024-17178
DRUM-PCB
removal section
in second master
Actuators and sensors
of paper feed section
installed between side plates
Actuators and sensors
024-28511
MAKE-MASTER-PCB
UR
Actuators and sensors in
DSP
024-50500
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
MMR-PCB 024-28501
General wiring diagram
024-50510
PS16-HWW
024-50502
SH4F-PCB
OE Actuators and sensors in
in scanning section
Actuators and sensors
main unit rear side
installed on
Actuators and sensors
TPH 444-80001 (A3) 444-80002 (B4)
1)
in scanner section
1.
Actuators and sensors
RIS
Chapter 18 PCBs
Wiring Diagrams
1801
TPH
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 XH14P
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
-S TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH +S
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
CN9 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 XH14P
CN12 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 FE20P
MAKE-MASTER-PCB 024-28511
[18-3] 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
CN6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 VH9P
CN4 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT15P
024-50500
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
N.C N.C 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
To scanner unit relay PCB (Imaging section wiring diagram)
DA-DAT DA-LAT DA-CLK SLEEP /24V-ON /TPH-ON /P.F GND(5.1V)
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
GND (5.1V) GND (5.1V) 5.1V 5.1V GND (24V) GND (24V) 24V-B 24V-A 24V-C
N.C
-S TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH +S
024-53002 Rear upper power supply unit wires
024-53007 Mechanical control PCB power supply wires
CN3 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DF1B20P
MMR-PCB 024-28501
CN2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 CT10P
CN1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 VH10P
CN5 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DF1B20P
PS16-HWW 024-50510 CN6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 VH7P 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 L-SWout
N-SWout
N-SWin
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
01 02 03 04
01 02 03 04 05 06 07
GND(24V) 24V-C GND(35V) GND(35V) GND(35V) 35V 35V 35V
GND(18V-1) 18V-1 GND(18V-2) 18V-2
01 02 03 04 05 06 07
N.C
N.C
L-SWin L-SWout N-SWin N-SWout RLY+ RLY-
CN9 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 VH7P
SH4F-PCB 024-50502
01 02 CT2P
01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 VL6P
01 02 CT2P
024-53008 Power switch assembly
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
01 02 03 04
CN14 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 VH8P
CN9 01 02 03 04 XH4P
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
OP 024-53006 Drive power supply wires
GND(5.1V) GND(5.1V) 5.1V 5.1V /P.F GND(24V) 24V-A
024-53002 Rear upper power supply unit wires
CN10 N.C (AC (N)-OP1) 01 N.C 02 N.C (AC (L)-OP1) 03
CN3 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 VH8P
CN12 01 02 03 04 XH4P
CN9 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 VH7P
N.C
N.C
To front lower motor wires (Main unit wiring diagram)
N.C
N.C
N.C
L-SWin
024-53005 Power switch wires
UR
OE
CN7 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 FE20P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
-S TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TGND TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH TPH +S
024-53001 Master-making mechanical unit wires
RIS
024-28503 TPH wires
E
01 5 4 2 02 03 04 05 06 6 3 1 Power switches (5V relays)
2)
444-80001 (A3) 444-80002 (B4)
Chapter 18 PCBs
Power supply section wiring diagram
1802
[18-4]
CN2 05 04 03 02 01 FE5P
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 FE30P
CN6 01 02 03 04 05 FE5P
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CN1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT17P 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
05 04 03 02 01
24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL
/MTR-ENB1 MTR-CLK1 MTR-LAT1 MTR-DAT1 /MTR-ENB2 MTR-CLK2 MTR-LAT2 MTR-DAT2 GND GND GND GND 24V-A 24V-A 24V-A GND GND GND WRITE-PH A WRITE-PH B /WRITE-EN A /WRITE-EN B WRITE-PD SNR-CLK /SNR-LAT SNR-DAT HEL TxD HEL RxD 5V 5V
01 02 03 04 05
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15
5V 5V Remaining paper volume sensor A Remaining paper volume sensor B Elevator lower-limit sensor Guide roller release motor home position sensor Paper size detection sensor Paper detection sensor Paper width potentiometer GND GND 24V-A Guide roller release motor Paper feed clutch Scraper clutch Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid 24V-A
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
CN2 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT5P
CN1 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 MINI-CT30P
MMR-PCB 024-28501
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19
CN28 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 MINI-CT38P
INK-MTR-FG-SNR1 DRUM-THRM1 GND DRUM-EEP-DI1 DRUM-EEP-DO1 DRUM-EEP-CLK1 DRUM-EEP-CS1 GND INK-MTR-FG-SNR2 DRUM-THRM2 GND DRUM-EEP-DI2 DRUM-EEP-DO2 DRUM-EEP-CLK2 DRUM-EEP-CS2 GND DRUM-HEL-TxD DRUM-HEL-RxD GND UPPER-LIMIT-SNR-A UPPER-LIMIT-SNR-B GND PILED-SNR-RAD PILED-SNR-RCV REGIST-SNR-RAD REGIST-SNR-RCV GND /DRUM-SET-SAFETY-SW1 /DRUM-SET-SAFETY-SW2 GND /MST-DSP-MTR-OC2 MST-DSP-MTR-BUF N.C CHAKUHAN-SNR2
024-53011 Rear lower assembly wires A
CN7 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MINI-CT17P
CN19 01 02 03 04 05 MINI-CT5P
A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01
CN5 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 MINI-CT38P
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
CN4 A17 A17 A16 A16 A15 A15 A14 A14 A13 A13 A12 A12 A11 A11 A10 A10 A09 A09 A08 A08 A07 A07 A06 A06 A05 A05 A04 A04 A03 A03 A02 A02 A01 A01 B17 B17 B16 B16 B15 B15 B14 B14 B13 B13 B12 B12 B11 B11 B10 B10 B09 B09 B08 B08 B07 B07 B06 B06 B05 B05 B04 B04 B03 B03 B02 B02 B01 B01 MINI-CT34P
OP
GND MAIN-THRM-VOLT GND SPF-THRM-VOLT GND 5V MAIN-FG-SNR-PHA MAIN-FG-SNR-PHB 5V 5V SPF-FG-SNR MAIN-MTR-PWM MAIN-MTR-BRK SPF-MTR-PWM SPF-MTR-BRK MAIN-RLY-CNTL1 MAIN-RLY-CNTL2 /FRONT-ACT-ENA1 FRONT-ACT-SCK1 FRONT-ACT-LAT1 FRONT-ACT-DAT1 5V /FRONT-ACT-ENA2 FRONT-ACT-SCK2 FRONT-ACT-LAT2 FRONT-ACT-DAT2 GND FRONT-SNR-CLK1 /FRONT-SNR-LAT1 FRONT-SNR-DAT1 GND FRONT-SNR-CLK2 /FRONT-SNR-LAT2 FRONT-SNR-DAT2 GND MST-DSP-FG-SMR2 COMPRESS-FG-SNR2 GND
024-53011 Rear lower assembly wires A
UR
CN1 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 MINI-CT30P
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17
CN27 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 MINI-CT34P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500
CN3 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MINI-CT16P
OE
CN5 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 FE30P
PFR-PCB 024-12601
024-53001 Master making mechanical unit wires
24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL
24V-A 24V-A 24V-A GND GND GND GND GND GND GND MTR-DAT2 MTR-LAT2 MTR-CLK2 /MTR-ENB2 MTR-DAT1 MTR-LAT1 MTR-CLK1 /MTR-ENB1 5V 5V HEL RxD HEL TxD SNR-DAT /SNR-LAT SNR-CLK WRITE-PD /WRITE-EN B /WRITE-EN A WRITE-PH B WRITE-PH A
024-53001 Master making mechanical unit wires
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
GND SH-TxD /SH-RTS GND SH-RxD /SH-CTS SCLK GND /VIPRQ /VISRQ GND WUP-SW N.C PSU-SLP GND /SH-SLP
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
E
3)
MAKE-MASTER-PCB 024-28511 CN1
RIS CN2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT16P
SH4F-PCB 024-50502
Chapter 18 PCBs Inter-PCB wiring diagram
1803
444-59006 Antenna
RIS
[18-5]
03 02 01 CT3P
03 02 01 TPH pressure sensor
HEL RF-SIG HEL GND
01 02 03
024-28508 Master making unit front wires
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
Thermal pressure motor
RED BLK
Depressurizing: CW Pressurizing: CCW
03 02 01 CT3P
03 02 01 Master end sensor light receiver (top)
01 01 02 02 03 03 TMP
01 02 Relay 02 01 CT2P
CN3 01 02 03 TMP
CN2 01 02 03 TMP
CN1 01 02 03 TMP
CN6 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT8P
RF PCB 3ch 444-59003
01 02 Relay 01 02 CT2P
Master making unit
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P First clamp sensor B
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P First clamp sensor A
First clamp motor
RED BLK
Second print drum master-making, 2nd step: CW Other than above: CCW
08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
CN3 A01 A01 A02 A02 A03 A03 A04 A04 A05 A05 A06 A06 A07 A07 A08 A08 A09 A09 A10 A10 A11 A11 B01 B01 B02 B02 B03 B03 B04 B04 B05 B05 B06 B06 B07 B07 B08 B08 B09 B09 B10 B10 B11 B11 CT22P
MAKE-MASTER-PCB 024-28511
Pressure plate unit
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
CN6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 MINI-CT9P
CN5 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 CT8P
488-90030 Ground wire (U3-80-R3)
5V GND HEL TxD HEL RxD /RESET /STOP RUN Connection signal N.C
024-28509 Master RF PCB I/F wires
024-28503 TPH wires
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V MTR1 (24V-A) MTR2 (24V-A)
Pressure plate unit
TPH
CN11 01 02 03 CT3P
GND Vout 5V VLED GND Vout 24V-A GND
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
06 05 04 03 02 01
06 05 04 03 02 01 CT6P
02 Relay 01 01 02 CT2P
04 01 03 02 Relay 02 03 01 04 CT4P
06 05 04 03 02 01
06 05 04 03 02 01
06 05 04 03 02 01 CT6P
06 05 04 03 02 01 CT6P
RED BLK
N.C N.C SW1 SW2
Cutter motor
Cutter HPSW
Rotary cutter unit
Write pulse motor
Master making unit transport pulse motor
Load pulse motor
01 02 Relay 02 01 CT2P
RED BLK
Master stocker fan
E
Prism 03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P Master-positioning sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P Master making unit sensor
OP 024-28506 Master making unit center wires
A (24V-A) B (24V-A) /A (24V-A) /B (24V-A) N.C (GND) N.C (GND) GND /SW MTR1 (24V-A) MTR2 (24V-A)
N.C N.C
N.C (Master-positioning sensor analog voltage) N.C (GND) N.C (GND)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10
024-28504 Master making unit front wires A (24V-A) B (24V-A) /A (24V-A) /B (24V-A) A (24V-B-IL) B (24V-B-IL) /A (24V-B-IL) /B (24V-B-IL)
UR
CN4 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 CT20P
CN7 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 MINI-CT8P
OE
N.C (GND) N.C (SC) N.C (SIO) N.C (/CS) N.C (5V) N.C N.C N.C MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V N.C (24V-A) N.C (GND) N.C
GND Vout 5V
024-28504 Master making unit rear wires
4)
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P
Master end light emitter, master detection sensor (bottom)
Chapter 18 PCBs
Master-making section wiring diagram
1804
[18-6]
021-51032
01 04 03 02 Relay 03 02 04 01 CT4P
03 02 01 CT3P
N.C
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
024-12608 Paper feed tray internal wires
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
CN2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 MINI-CT9P
024-12602
CN1 01 02 03 04 05 FE5P
PF-TRAY-PCB
03 02 01 CT3P
24V-A MTR24V-A CLT24V-A CLT24V-A SOL-
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
024-12607 Paper feed mechanical unit wires
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
GND Length Vout Presence/absence Vout Width Vout 5V
03 02 01 CT3P (blue)
03 02 01 Remaining paper volume sensor B
03 02 01 Guide roller release home position sensor
03 02 01 CT3P
04 01 02 03 03 Relay 02 04 01 CT4P (blue)
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
CN4 01 02 03 04 05 FE5P
CN3 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 MINI-CT12P
CN2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 CT8P
PFR-PCB 024-12601
MTR2 (24V-A)
MTR1 (24V-A)
N.C (GND)
024-12604 Elevator (top) sensor wires GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND /SW 5V LED-
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P
03 02 01 CT3P
03 02 01 CT3P (blue)
Registration sensor light receiver
Paper sensor light receiver
Registration sensor light emitter
Paper sensor light emitter
LED 5V LED 5V
03 03 N.C 02 02 01 01 ZHR3P
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P
GND Vout 5V Vout 5V
05 01 04 02 03 Relay 03 02 04 05 01 MINI-CT5P
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND /SW 5V LEDN.C (GND) N.C N.C (5V) GND Vout 5V GND /SW 5V LEDLED 5V LED 5V GND Vout 5V Vout 5V
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
CN3 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 CT32P
E
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
OP 04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P
021-51029 Pushbutton SW-ASSY1
SW1 SW2 LED+ LED-
024-53029 Second master loading sensor wires
GND 03 03 Vout 02 02 5V 01 01 CT3P
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 MINI-CT4P
03 03 N.C 02 02 01 01 ZHR3P 024-12606 Paper feed transport (top) sensor wires
02 02 01 01 CT3P
024-12613 Paper feed transport (bottom) sensor wires
Print drum removal button
Second master loading sensor
024-53035 Front upper assembly wires
03 01 02 Relay 02 03 01 CT3P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500
CN23 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 XA8P
01 13 02 12 11 03 04 10 09 05 06 08 07 Relay 07 06 08 05 09 10 04 11 03 12 02 13 01 MINI-CT13P
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
UR
03 02 01 CT3P
021-51029 Pushbutton SW-ASSY1
Feed tray button
SW1 SW2 LED+ LED-
03 02 01 Paper feed pressure sensor
03 02 01 Paper feed lower-limit sensor B
03 02 01 Paper feed upper-limit sensor A
SW 24V-A
24V-A
N.C (GND) SW MTR1 (24V-A) MTR2 (24V-A)
024-53028 Rear lower assembly wires A
OE N.C
Main unit sheet metal
01 03 02 Relay 02 03 01 CT3P
024-12605 Paper feed (bottom) sensor wires
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
04 N.C 03 N.C 02 01 CT4P (blue)
N.C N.C
24V-A N.C N.C N.C N.C SW
024-53035 024-12604 Front upper assembly wires Elevator upper-limit sensor wires 24V-A 24V-A 04 06 04 01 01 01 N.C N.C N.C N.C 05 02 02 02 03 03 N.C N.C Relay 02 N.C N.C Relay 02 04 03 03 03 SW SW 04 Relay 03 04 04 01 01 02 CT4P (blue) 05 CT4P (blue) 06 01 CT6P
04 01 02 03 03 Relay 02 04 01 CT4P (blue)
024-12609 Paper feed motor wires
03 02 01 Remaining paper volume sensor A
+ -
N.C (24V-A) N.C N.C N.C (CLT-)
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
03 02 01 CT3P
03 02 01 Paper detection sensor
Potentiometer assembly ASSY
Paper feed clutch
+ N.C N.C -
MTR1 (24V-A)
MTR2 (24V-A)
N.C
COM N.C N.C NO
023-12602 Elevator mechanical unit wires
N.C
03 02 01 Paper feed lower limit sensor
03 02 01 CT3P
N.C RED 01 YEL 02 BLK 03 Paper width potentiometer
RED BLK
Guide roller release motor
CW
Elevator unit
01 Relay 02 02 01 CT2P
01 02 03 Paper feed upper-limit safety SW
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid
03 02 01 Paper size detection sensor
Paper feed tray
Elevator motor
RED BLK
Descending: CW Ascending: CCW
RIS
COM N.C N.C N.C NO
024-53028 Paper feed lower-limit safety SW wires
5)
023-53023 Paper feed safety SW lead wire
01 02 03 Paper feed lower-limit safety SW
023-53023 Paper feed safety SW lead wire
Chapter 18 PCBs Paper feed section wiring diagram
1805
[18-7] 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT7P
Relay PCB
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
TPH CODE2 TPH CODE4 TPH CODE3 THERM TPH CODE0 TPH CODE1 /STB1 CLK1 /LAT1 DI1 GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V /STB2 CLK2 /LAT2 DI2 /STB3 CLK3 /LAT3 DI3 /STB4 CLK4 /LAT4 DI4
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
CN10 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 DF11-28P
024-28511 CN8 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 FE28P
MAKE-MASTER-PCB
GND /LAMP 24V-A GND Flatbed original detection sensor 5V Scanner home position sensor
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
To MECHA-CONTROL-PCB (Power supply section wiring diagram)
07 06 05 04 03 02 01
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17
CN8 01 02 03 04 05 06 CT6P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500 CN7 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 MINI-CT15P
CN8 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 FE28P
CN4 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 MINI-CT28P
MMR-PCB 024-28501 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01
01 02 03 04 05 06
N.C (24V-A) N.C (Original illuminating lamp) N.C (24V-A) N.C (Original illuminating lamp) N.C (24V-A) N.C (Original illuminating lamp)
5V SD0 SD1 SD2 SD3 SD4 SD5 SD6 SD7 DCLK /LST TRIG SDIN SDCLK /RESET 5V 24V-A GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND /AKEN SDOUT /GAEN GND GND GND
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14
CN10 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 HIF34P
CN8 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 MINI-CT28P
024-50502
SH4F-PCB
OP
TPH CODE2 TPH CODE3 TPH CODE0 STB1 LAT1 GND GND 5V STB2 LAT2 STB3 LAT3 STB4 LAT4 DI4 CLK4 DI3 CLK3 DI2 CLK2 5V 5V GND DI1 CLK1 TPH CODE1 THERM TPH CODE4
024-53051 TPH signal relay wires
UR
TPH CODE2 TPH CODE4 TPH CODE3 THERM TPH CODE0 TPH CODE1 /STB1 CLK1 /LAT1 DI1 GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V /STB2 CLK2 /LAT2 DI2 /STB3 CLK3 /LAT3 DI3 /STB4 CLK4 /LAT4 DI4
024-53001 Master-making mechanical unit wires
OE
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 HIF34P
CCD PCB
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 DF11-28P
024-28503 TPH wires
E
6)
Scanner unit
RIS
TPH
444-80001 (A3) 444-80002 (B4)
Chapter 18 PCBs
Imaging section wiring diagram
1806
RED BLK
RED BLU N.C WHT
[18-8]
01 03 02 Relay 02 03 01 CT3P
RED BLU N.C WHT
04 01 02 Relay 03 02 03 04 01 CT4P
N.C
09 01 08 02 03 07 04 06 05 Relay 05 06 04 07 03 08 02 01 09 MINI-CT9P GND
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V 24V-A GND
GND 24V-A MTRA (24V-A) B (24V-A) /A (24V-A) /B (24V-A)
N.C
GND 24V-A GND
24V-A GND
N.C
N.C N.C N.C
N.C
N.C
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15
CN30 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 CT30P
CN29 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 CT24P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500
A01 A12 A02 A11 A03 A10 A04 A09 A08 A05 A07 A06 A07 A06 A05 A08 A09 A04 A03 A10 A02 A11 A01 A12 Relay B12 B01 B11 B02 B03 B10 B04 B09 B08 B05 B06 B07 B07 B06 B08 B05 B09 B04 B10 B03 B11 B02 B12 B01 MINI-CT24P
24V-B GND N.C N.C GND 24V-A MTRGND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V N.C N.C N.C N.C 24V-B GND N.C GND 24V-B GND N.C GND
024-53027 Central transport wires H
N.C
RED BLU
N.C
024-55801 Central transport wires U 24V-B GND N.C GND 24V-A MTRGND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
RED BLK
RED BLU N.C WHT
N.C
N.C
04 01 03 Relay 02 02 03 04 01 CT4P
04 01 03 Relay 02 02 03 04 01 CT4P
N.C
WHT
RED BLU
WHT
GND Vout 5V
03 03 02 02 01 01 Central transport CT3P sensor
First separation fan B
First separation fan A
01 03 02 Relay 02 01 03 CT3P
E
Central flap home position sensor
Central flap motor CW
Central suction fan
Central suction unit
024-55802 Central transport sensor wires
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P
02 Relay 01 02 01 CT2P
04 01 02 03 02 Relay 03 04 01 CT4P
OP
12 01 02 11 03 10 04 09 05 08 06 07 Relay 06 07 08 05 09 04 03 10 02 11 01 12 CT12P
UR
24V-B GND N.C N.C GND 24V-A MTRGND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C 24V-B GND N.C N.C GND 24V-B GND N.C N.C GND
024-53012 Rear lower assembly wires B
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12
OE
024-53011 Rear lower assembly wires A
N.C
01 10 02 09 03 08 04 07 06 05 Relay 06 05 07 04 08 03 09 02 10 01 CT10P
024-21702 Paper ejection sensor wires
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
24V-A GND N.C GND 24V-A MTRA (24V-A) B (24V-A) /A (24V-A) /B (24V-A)
Second separation fan
024-21703 Paper ejection sensor relay wires
GND 03 Vout 02 5V 01 CT3P
03 02 01 CT3P
03 02 01 Paper ejection wing home position sensor
03 02 01 Paper ejection sensor
03 02 01 CT3P
06 05 N.C 04 N.C 03 02 01 CT6P
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
N.C
024-21701 Paper ejection motor wires
Second separation fan A
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P
03 02 01 Paper ejection motor FG sensor
06 05 04 03 02 Paper ejection wing pulse motor 01
Paper ejection motor
CCW
Suction fan
Suction unit
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P
7)
RED BLU N.C WHT
RIS
Chapter 18 PCBs Paper ejection section/center transport section wiring diagram
1807
+
[18-9]
+
Second separation pump solenoid
+
First separation pump solenoid
01 04 03 02 03 Relay 02 01 04 CT4P
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
04 01 03 02 03 Relay 02 01 04 CT4P
02 01 02 Relay 01 CT2P
CT2P
24V-B SOLA (24V-B) B (24V-B) /A (24V-B) /B (24V-B) 24V-B SOLA (24V-B) B (24V-B) /A (24V-B) /B (24V-B)
08 01 07 02 06 03 05 04 05 Relay 04 06 03 02 07 08 01 CT8P
A (24V-A) B (24V-A) /A (24V-A) /B (24V-A) 24V-B BRK A (24V-B) B (24V-B) /A (24V-B) /B (24V-B) 24V-B SOL24V-B SOL-
024-53021 Rear upper motor wires
024-53009 Rear upper motor relay wires
02 01 Relay 02 01
CT2P
02 01 Relay 02 01
A (24V-B) B (24V-B) /A (24V-B) /B (24V-B) 24V-B SOL24V-B SOL-
01 04 02 03 Relay 03 02 04 01 CT4P
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
06 05 N.C 04 N.C 03 02 01 CT6P
24V-B BRK
06 05 04 03 02 Print-positioning 01 pulse motor
Print drum brake
Read pulse motor
09 05 07 03
A (24V-A) B (24V-A) /A (24V-A) /B (24V-A)
023-53017 PM lead wire
Second pressure control pulse motor
A (24V-B) 09 B (24V-B) 05 /A (24V-B) 07 /B (24V-B) 03
Second pressure solenoid
First pressure control pulse motor
A (24V-B) 09 B (24V-B) 05 /A (24V-B) 07 /B (24V-B) 03
First pressure solenoid
+
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
CN9 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 CT14P
CN18 01 02 03 04 05 06 MINI-CT6P
CN2 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 MINI-CT24P
01 02 03 04 05 06
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V Main motor FG sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 Second position-B sensor CT3P
03 03 02 02 01 01
CT3P
35V MTR-
N.C N.C A (24V-B-IL) B (24V-B-IL) 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL /A (24V-B-IL) /B (24V-B-IL) AUTO-SHUT-OFF 5V N.C (24V-C) N.C
A (24V-B-IL) B (24V-B-IL) 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL /A (24V-B-IL) /B (24V-B-IL) 24V-C CNT24V-C CNT-
N.C N.C
024-53039 Main motor wires
024-53036 Front lower motor wires
01 02 02 01 DF1B2P
GND MMFG_A MMFG_B Vcc GND N.C PMFG_A Vcc
02 01 CT2P
06 05 04 03 02 01 CT6P
01 02 02 01 CT2P (blue)
01 02 02 01 CT2P
OP To second horizontal pulse motor (Second print drum section wiring diagram)
Master counter
Total counter
To power switch assembly (Power supply Second print pressure control sensor section wiring diagram)
03 03 02 02 01 01 First print pressure CT3P control sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 Master making unit pull-out CT3P (blue) position sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 Second master making unit CT3P position sensor
06 05 04 03 02 01 CT6P
Second paper feed motor CCW
To first horizontal pulse motor (First print drum section wiring diagram)
03 03 02 02 01 01 First master making unit position CT3P sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P Stage cover sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P (blue) Second print drum FG sensor
RED BLK
01 02 03
CN11 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 CT24P
CN1 01 02 DF1B2P
CN2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 MINI-CT8P
CN15 01 02 03 VL3P
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
E
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12
01 02
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
024-53038 Main/second FG wires
MTR1 (35V) N.C N.C MTR2 (35V)
04 01 03 02 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P
01 01 02 02 03 03 VL3P
01 04 03 02 03 Relay 02 04 01 CT4P
GND MMFG_A MMFG_B Vcc
GND N.C PMFG_A Vcc Second paper feed motor FG sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P (blue) First print drum FG sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 First position-B sensor CT3P
UR
12 01 11 02 10 03 09 04 08 05 06 07 06 Relay 07 05 08 04 09 03 10 02 11 01 12 MINI-CT12P
024-53020 Rear (top) sensor relay wires
024-53012 Rear lower assembly wires B
024-53019 Rear (top) sensor wires
OE
CN26 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 CT12P
RIS Main motor
RED N.C BLU
024-53039 Main motor wires
8)
024-53012 Rear lower assembly wires B
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500
Main motor assembly
Chapter 18 PCBs
Main unit wiring diagram
1808
CCW
RED BLK
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
GND Vout 5V
01 03 02 Relay 02 01 03 CT3P
[18-10]
03 02 01 CT3P
03 02 01 First master compression home position sensor
RED BLK
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
01 05 02 04 03 Relay 03 04 02 05 01 CT5P
01 02 Relay 03 04 CT4P (blue)
GND /SW 5V LEDMTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) GND Vout 5V MTR24V-B-IL GND Vout 5V
04 01 02 03 02 Relay 03 04 01 CT4P
01 05 02 04 03 Relay 03 04 02 05 01 CT5P
24V-B-IL MTRGND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) GND Vout 5V N.C (GND) N.C N.C (5V)
To rear safety SW wires (Interlock section wiring diagram)
MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) GND Vout 5V
024-53016 First master disposal relay wires
01 14 02 13 03 12 04 11 05 10 06 09 07 Relay 08 07 08 06 09 10 05 11 04 12 03 13 02 14 01 CT14P
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11
CN13 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 CT22P 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires 11 01 10 02 09 03 08 04 07 05 06 Relay 06 05 07 04 08 09 03 10 02 01 11 CT11P
To rear safety SW wires (Interlock section wiring diagram)
CT2P
02 01 Relay 02 01 Second master compression motor Compression: CW Decompression: CCW
RED BLK
03 01 02 Relay 02 01 03 CT3P
RED BLK
03 03 02 02 01 01 Second master disposal CT3P motor FG sensor
Second master disposal motor
CW
Second master removal unit
E
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P Second master compression home position sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P Second master disposal jam sensor
OP
GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
024-53040 Master-making/disposal safety SW lead wire COM 01 01 N.C N.C 02 02 Relay N.C 03 03 NO 04 Second master disposal safety SW CT4P (blue)
06 01 02 05 03 04 Relay 03 04 02 05 01 06 CT6P
024-25102 Second master disposal sensor wires
Second clamp motor HP return: CW & CCW Master-making action: CCW 03 03 02 02 01 01 Second clamp sensor CT3P
02 01 01 Relay 02 CT2P
GND Vout 5V
024-25104 Second master disposal transport FG wires
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
024-25100 Second clamp/master disposal sensor wires MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
RED BLK
03 03 02 02 01 01 Second master compression motor FG sensor CT3P
024-25101 Second master ejection unit wires MTR1 (24V-B-IL) 10 01 MTR2 (24V-B-IL) 09 02 GND 08 03 Vout 04 07 5V 05 06 MTRRelay 05 06 24V-B-IL 07 04 GND 03 08 Vout 02 09 5V 01 10 CT10P
UR
CN15 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 CT11P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500
Master making unit removal SW
SW1 SW2 LED+ LED-
021-51029 Pushbutton switch assembly 1
OE
24V-B-IL MTRGND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
024-53016 First master disposal relay wires
01 14 02 13 03 12 11 04 05 10 06 09 08 07 Relay 07 08 06 09 05 10 11 04 03 12 02 13 14 01 CT14P
024-53040 Master-making/disposal safety SW lead wire
MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) GND Vout 5V
024-24101 First master compression wires
24V-B-IL MTRGND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
024-24100 First master disposal transport wires
COM 01 N.C N.C 02 N.C 03 NO First master disposal safety SW
03 02 01 CT3P
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
03 01 02 Relay 02 03 01 CT3P
01 06 05 02 04 03 Relay 04 03 05 02 06 01 CT6P
03 02 01 First master compression motor FG sensor
First master compression motor Compression: CW Decompression: CCW
First master loading sensor
GND Vout 5V
03 02 01 CT3P
03 02 01 First master disposal jam sensor
024-24140 First master disposal sensor wires
03 03 02 02 01 01 First master disposal motor CT3P FG sensor
024-24102 First master disposal transport FG wires
First master disposal motor
First master ejection unit
RIS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
024-53037 Second master ejection relay wires
9)
CN10 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 CT14P
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
Chapter 18 PCBs Paper removal section wiring diagram
1809
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 MINI-CT20P
CN3
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20
N.C N.C N.C N.C
/WAIT GND GND D0 D1 GND D2 D3 GND D4 D5 GND D6 D7 GND /RESET /WAKEUP GND Vcc /INT
/WR Vcc /RD A5 Vcc A4 A3 Vcc A2 A1 Vcc A0 /CS Vcc /SLEEP P-DOWN
024-53050 Panel wires 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
CN1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
CN9 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT20P
MINI-CT16P
01 02
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
CN4 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 CT13P
[18-11] COM LED0 LED1 LED2 LED3
CN12 01 02 PH2P
CN3 01 02 03 04 FM4P
TY1 TX1 TY0 TX0
S CP1 CP2 N.C DISP CD0 CD1 CD2 CD3 VDD VSS VEE
N.C (VLCD_CHECK) N.C (GND_CHECK)
01 02 03 04 05
CN8 01 02 03 04 05 XH5P
CN2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 FE12P
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
CN5 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 CT15P
LCD
GND /KIN5 /KIN4 /KIN3 /KIN2 /KIN1 /KIN0 /KOUT6 /KOUT5 /KOUT4 /KOUT3 /KOUT2 /KOUT1 /KOUT0 GND
024-37139 Main SW lead wire
GND WUP LED /WAKEUP LATCH SCK SOUT GND VCC2 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 GND
024-37139 Main SW lead wire
/KIN6 /KOUT7
024-37140 Mode key lead wire
MODE-KEY-PCB
023-43775 LCD control unit
Touch panel
E
CN2 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 CT15P (Board IN)
CN1 13 MAIN-SW-PCB;SAN 12 024-37201 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 CT13P (Board IN)
024-37137 CN1 02 01 CT2P (Board IN)
OP
UR
OE
RIS
024-50502
SH4F-PCB
LCD-CTL-PCB 023-37138
CN6 01 02 CT2P
Panel unit
Chapter 18 PCBs
10) Panel section wiring diagram
1810
024-53026 Print drum drawer relay wires H
01 02 03 04 05 06 MINI-CT6P
N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C
05 01 02 04 03 Relay 03 04 02 01 05 MINI-CT5P
01 02 03
N.C N.C
First horizontal sliding unit
HEL RF-SIG HEL GND
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires H
14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
CN3 01 02 03 TMP
[18-12]
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
01 02 03
N.C (GND) N.C N.C (5V) GND OVER1 INK1 THRM1 5V GND /BOTTLE SW1 5V GND Vout 5V 24V-C MTR-
HEL RF-SIG HEL GND
01 02 03 04 05
First ink sensor
First ink cartridge set SW
N.C
1 3 2
023-17026 Ink cartridge set SW assembly
1 3 2
02 Relay 01 02 01 CT2P
RED BLK
First inking motor
CW
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P First inking motor FG sensor
03 01 02 Relay 02 01 03 CT3P (blue)
01 02 03 04 05 CT5P
01 01 02 02 03 03 TMP
024-53030 Antenna
First print drum unit
OP
024-17172 Print drum internal wires
024-17172 Print drum internal wires
CN4 01 02 CN1 03 04 14 05 13 06 12 11 07 10 08 09 09 10 08 11 07 06 12 05 13 14 04 15 03 16 02 01 MINI-CT16P MINI-CT14P
CN2 02 01 MINI-CT2P
DRUM-PCB 024-17178
UR
06 05 04 03 02 01
02 01 N.C N.C N.C MININ.C CT6P N.C N.C
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires U
HEL GND A10 A01 HEL RF-SIG A09 A02 Connection present/absent A08 A03 RUN A07 A04 RxD A06 A05 TxD A05 A06 GND A04 A07 Vcc A03 A08 INK MTR1 A02 A09 24V-C A01 A10 INK FG1 B12 B01 /BOTTLE SW1 B11 B02 THRM1 B10 B03 INK1 B09 B04 OVER1 B08 B05 GND B07 B06 GND B06 B07 EEP-DI1 B05 B08 EEP-DO1 B04 B09 EEP-CLK1 B03 B10 EEP-CS1 B02 B11 5V B01 B12 Mini-CT drawer 22P
First print drum locking solenoid
24V-C SOL-
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P First print drum lock position sensor
OE
CN3 01 02 03 TMP
CN1 01 02 03 TMP
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires H GND Vout 5V 24V-C SOL-
CN6 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 MINI-CT8P
Connection present/absent RUN RxD TxD GND Vcc
08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
RF PCB 3ch 444-59003
INK MTR1 INK MTR1 20 01 A01 24V-C 24V-C 19 02 A02 INK FG1 INK FG1 18 03 A03 /BOTTLE SW1 /BOTTLE SW1 17 04 A04 THRM1 THRM1 16 05 A05 INK1 INK1 06 A06 15 OVER1 OVER1 A07 14 07 GND GND 13 08 A08 GND GND 12 A09 09 EEP-DI1 EEP-DI1 10 11 A10 EEP-DO1 EEP-DO1 Relay 10 A11 11 EEP-CLK1 EEP-CLK1 09 12 A12 EEP-CS1 EEP-CS1 08 13 A13 5V 5V A14 14 07 GND GND 15 06 A15 Vout Vout 05 16 A16 5V 5V 03 03 A17 17 04 GND GND 02 02 03 18 A18 Vout Vout 01 01 A19 19 02 5V 5V First horizontal home 20 CT3P 01 A20 position sensor MINI-CT20P B01 B02 024-53030 03 03 B03 Print drum drawer wires H 02 02 B04 01 01 B05 First drive lock release CT3P B06 sensor B07 B08 To print drum drawer B09 wires H B10 B11 (Second print drum B12 section wiring diagram) B13 B14 B15 B16 024-53041 Print drum safety B17 024-53030 SW lead wire Print drum drawer B18 wires H B19 B20 24V-C COM 01 01 01 04 To front safety SW wires N.C N.C N.C N.C 02 02 03 Relay 02 (Interlock section N.C N.C N.C Relay 03 03 03 02 SW NO wiring diagram) 04 04 01 CT4P (blue) CT4P (blue) First print drum safety SW CN7 N.C (DRM-HEL-SEL) 01 N.C (/DRM-HEL-STP2) 02 N.C (/DRM-HEL-RST2) 03 A (24V-B-IL) N.C (/DRM-HEL-CON2) 01 04 B (24V-B-IL) 02 MINI-CT4P ACOM 03 To front bottom motor wires BCOM Relay 04 /A (24V-B-IL) (Main unit wiring diagram) 05 /B (24V-B-IL) 06 CT6P First horizontal pulse motor
CN8 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 MINI-CT40P
5V GND HEL TxD HEL RxD /RESET /STOP RUN Connection signal GND Vout 5V 24V-C SOL-
To print drum drawer wires H (Second print drum section wiring diagram)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
024-53026 Print drum drawer relay wires H
RIS
CN6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 MINI-CT18P
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
E
Chapter 18 PCBs 11) First print drum section wiring diagram
1811
[18-13]
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20
05 01 02 04 03 Relay 03 04 02 01 05 MINI-CT5P
024-53026 Print drum drawer relay wires H
INK MTR2 24V-C INK FG2 /BOTTLE SW2 THRM2 INK2 OVER2 GND GND EEP-DI2 EEP-DO2 EEP-CLK2 EEP-CS2 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V
To front bottom motor wires (Main unit wiring diagram)
01 02 03 04 05 06 CT6P
Relay
01 02 03
Second horizontal sliding unit
HEL RF-SIG HEL GND
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires H
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires H
A (24V-B-IL) B (24V-B-IL) ACOM BCOM /A (24V-B-IL) /B (24V-B-IL)
N.C N.C
01 02 03
Second print drum safety SW
NO
COM N.C
024-53030 Print drum safety SW lead wire
03 03 02 02 01 01 Second drive lock release CT3P sensor
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P Second horizontal home position sensor
Second horizontal pulse motor
01 04 02 03 Relay 03 02 04 01 CT4P (blue)
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires H
INK MTR2 24V-C INK FG2 /BOTTLE SW2 THRM2 INK2 OVER2 GND GND EEP-DI2 EEP-DO2 EEP-CLK2 EEP-CS2 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
CN3 01 02 03 TMP
CN4 01 02 03 CN1 04 14 05 13 06 12 11 07 10 08 09 09 10 08 11 07 06 12 05 13 14 04 15 03 16 02 MINI-CT16P 01 MINI-CT14P
CN2 02 01 MINI-CT2P
DRUM-PCB 024-17178
E
023-17026 Ink cartridge set SW assembly
1 3 2
02 01 Relay 02 01 CT2P
RED BLK
Second inking motor
CW
03 03 02 02 01 01 CT3P Second inking motor FG sensor
N.C
1 3 2
01 02 03 04 05 Second ink sensor Second ink cartridge set SW
03 01 02 Relay 02 01 03 CT3P (blue)
01 02 03 04 05 CT5P
01 01 02 02 03 03 TMP
444-59002 Antenna
Second print drum unit
OP
N.C (GND) N.C N.C (5V) GND OVER2 INK2 THRM2 5V GND /BOTTLE SW2 5V GND Vout 5V 24V-C MTR-
HEL RF-SIG HEL GND
024-17172 Print drum internal wires
024-17172 Print drum internal wires
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
01 02 03
UR 06 05 04 03 02 01
02 01
N.C N.C N.C MININ.C CT6P N.C N.C
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires U
HEL GND A10 A01 HEL RF-SIG A09 A02 Connection present/absent A08 A03 RUN A07 A04 RxD A06 A05 TxD A05 A06 GND A04 A07 Vcc A03 A08 INK MTR2 A02 A09 24V-C A01 A10 INK FG2 B12 B01 /BOTTLE SW2 B11 B02 THRM2 B10 B03 INK2 B09 B04 OVER2 B08 B05 GND B07 B06 GND B06 B07 EEP-DI2 B05 B08 EEP-DO2 B04 B09 EEP-CLK2 B03 B10 EEP-CS2 B02 B11 5V B01 B12 Mini-CT drawer 22P
Second print drum locking solenoid
24V-C SOL-
03 03 02 02 01 01 Second print drum lock position CT3P sensor
OE
CN2 01 02 03 TMP
02 Relay 01 02 01 CT2P
Connection present/absent RUN RxD TxD GND Vcc
GND Vout 5V 24V-C SOL-
024-53030 Print drum drawer wires H
24V-C 01 N.C N.C 02 N.C N.C Relay 03 SW 04 CT4P (blue)
20 01 19 02 18 03 04 17 05 16 15 06 14 07 08 13 12 09 10 11 Relay 10 11 09 12 08 13 14 07 15 06 16 05 04 17 03 18 19 02 01 20 MINI-CT20P
01 02 03 04 05 06 MINI-CT6P
N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C
To print drum drawer wires H (First print drum section wiring diagram)
GND Vout 5V 24V-C SOL-
024-53026 Print drum drawer relay wires H
To print drum drawer wires H (First print drum section wiring diagram)
To front safety SW wires (Interlock section wiring diagram)
CN8 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 MINI-CT40P
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
RF PCB 3ch 444-59003
RIS
CN6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 MINI-CT18P
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
Chapter 18 PCBs
12) Second print drum section wiring diagram
1812
Rear cover safety SW1
Rear cover safety SW2
Master making unit safety SW
RIS Rear cover safety SW1
01 02 03 Rear cover safety SW1
COM N.C N.C NO
COM N.C N.C NO
023-53026 Main unit safety SW lead wire
N.C
023-53026 Main unit safety SW lead wire
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P (blue)
04 01 02 03 03 Relay 02 04 01 CT4P (blue)
[18-14] First master disposal box safety SW
Second master disposal box safety SW
Main motor IL relay
Second print drum safety SW
Front cover safety SW
First print drum safety SW
04 N.C 03 N.C 02 01 CT4P (blue)
To print drum drawer wires H (Second print drum section wiring diagram)
Second print drum safety SW
Main motor IL relay
24V-B-IL
024-53034 Front safety SW wires
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P (blue)
24V-C N.C (GND) SW N.C (GND) 24V-C N.C (GND) SW N.C (GND) 24V-C N.C (GND) SW 24V-C N.C (GND) SW
24V-C N.C (GND) SW 24V-C N.C (GND) SW N.C (GND) 24V-C N.C (GND) SW 24V-C N.C (GND) SW
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
CN13 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 XA14P
CN12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 XA11P
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
N.C (GND)
N.C (GND)
N.C (GND)
N.C (GND)
24V-C N.C (GND) SW N.C (GND) 24V-C N.C (GND) SW N.C (GND) 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL
024-53011 Rear lower assembly wires
OP
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-50503
CN21 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 XA11P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500 CN25 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 XA13P
UR
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
04 N.C 03 N.C 02 01 CT4 (blue)
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4P (blue)
04 01 02 03 Relay 02 03 04 01 CT4 (blue)
To print drum drawer wires H (First print drum section wiring diagram)
COM 01 N.C N.C 02 N.C 03 NO Front cover safety SW
023-53026 Main unit safety SW lead wire
COM 01 N.C N.C 02 N.C 03 NO Master making unit safety SW
04 N.C 03 N.C 02 01 CT4P (blue)
24V-C 04 N.C N.C 03 N.C N.C 02 SW 01 CT4P (blue) N.C N.C
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
024-53016 First master disposal relay wires
N.C N.C
N.C N.C
First print drum safety SW
Front cover safety SW
Master making unit safety SW
024-53040 Master-making/disposal safety SW lead wire
To master-making/disposal safety SW lead wire (Master-making section wiring diagram)
Second master disposal box safety SW
N.C
To master-making/disposal safety SW lead wire (Master-making section wiring diagram)
01 02 03 Rear cover safety SW2
First master disposal box safety SW
Rear cover safety SW2
OE
24V
E
Chapter 18 PCBs 13) Interlock section wiring diagram
1813
[18-15]
MINI-CT38P
CN8 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01
024-50506
PRINTER-PCB
CN1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5077-50P (ELCO)
A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND /INT /FAULT 5V 5V 3.3V /SLCTIN 3.3V GND GND DIR /AUTOFD SELECT PERROR BUSY /ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 /STROBE N.C N.C
024-53054 Printer wires
D0 D2 D4 D6 GND D8 D10 D12 D14 3.3V 3.3V A0 A2 A4 GND A6 A8 A10 A12 GND /BUSY /OE /LB GND /INTRET D1 D3 D5 D7 GND D9 D11 D13 D15 3.3V 3.3V A1 A3 A5 GND A7 A9 A11 /RESET GND /CE R/W /UB /CONNECT /INT
Bord to Bord
A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19
CN13 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 B01 B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 MINI-CT38P
CN7 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5077-50P (ELCO)
CN9 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 FCN68P CN11 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5077-50P (ELCO)
GND D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 /CE1 A10 /OE A09 A08 A07 VCC A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 A00 /BUSY D01 D02 WP/IOSIS16 /CD2 /CD1 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 /CE2 /VS1 /IORD /IOWR /WE REDY/IREQ VCC /CSEL /VS2 RESET /WAIT /INP ACK /REG BVD2 BVD1 R/W D09 D10 GND
AFIV;N
MINI-CT17P
CN6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CN12 01 02 03 04 UBB4P
Shielded wire
Shielded wire
GND GND CC-CLK /CC-LST /CC-DATA /CARD-REQ RxD TxD /CUNT-OP /CUNT-SET /M count /P count /CARD-ACT 5V 5V /CARD EXIST /EXIST GND
112-51001 Key card counter wire III (CC standard accessory)
112-51006 CC relay wires 50 (CC standard accessory)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
VBUS USB D+ USB D 24VA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 S
A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 C04 C03 C02 C01
JAC15P
Card counter IV: N 112-00004 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 S
N.C
N.C
N.C N.C N.C N.C
N.C
Job separator IV: N 113-00003
Ground
24V-C
GND
GND GND 5V 5V TxD RxD /RTS /CTS /AF IRQ /ADF present
030-51056 ASM-ADF (AF standard accessory)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 S
N.C
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 DF11-14P
Coin Vender (Excel) New
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 S RP13P
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
GND N.C (GND) N.C (GND) 24V-C N.C (24V-C) N.C (24V-C)
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
GND GND 5V 5V TxD RxD /RTS /CTS /AF IRQ /ADF present N.C (5V)
024-53010 Rear upper assembly wires
N.C
GND N.C Signal A Signal B GND 5V PGND 24V-C BUSY Tape jam Tape present/absent /Sorter present
113-97000 Job separator IV I/F external wire assembly (Job separator standard accessory)
01 01 02 02 03 03 DF1B3P
01 10 02 09 03 08 04 07 06 05 06 Relay 05 07 04 08 03 09 02 10 01 MINI-CT10P
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
01 02 03 04 05 06
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
CN17 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 XH12P
CN10 01 02 03 04 05 06 DF1B6P
CN11 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 MINI-CT11P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-50500
Ground
5V 01 Paper feed signal Paper ejection signal 02 Copy-in-process signal 03 04 Copy permit signal 05 Size signal 06 Color signal Duplex print signal 07 08 EXIT1 09 GND N.C 10 N.C 11 N.C GND 12 /Connection signal GND 13 GND 14
N.C (5V)
Coin Vender I/F external wire assembly (CV standard accessory)
Shielded wire
CN22 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 DF1B14P
OP
UR
A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 C04 C03 C02 C01 54269 (MOLEX)
024-00302
OE
GND D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 /CE1 A10 /OE A11 A09 A08 A13 A14 /WE REDY/IREQ VCC VPP1 A16 A15 A12 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 A00 D00 D01 D02 WP/IOSIS16 GND GND D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 /CE2 /VS1 /IORD /IOWR A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 VCC VPP2 A22 A23 A24 A25 /VS2 RESET /WAIT /INP ACK /REG BVD2 BVD1 D08 D09 D10 /CD2 GND
SH4F-PCB 024-50502
RIS
NET-D
102-00013
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
14) Option section wiring diagram
1814
Chapter 18 PCBs
Power Supply Unit Fuse List Fuse no.
System
Status after power reset Does not turn on.
250V 10A 24V-OP (option)
F5 250V 6.3A
24V-B
T98-947 24V-A does not turn ON.
T98-948 24V-B does not turn ON.
RIS
OE
24V-A
Not used
Paper ejection wing pulse motor Guide roller release motor Central flap motor Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid Second separation fan A Second separation fan B Paper ejection motor Suction fan Elevator motor Paper feed clutch Scraper clutch Thermal pressure motor Scanner lamp Cutter motor Read pulse motor Load pulse motor Write pulse motor Master stocker fan
UR
F3 250V 3.15A F4 250V 6.3A
Connecting part
Main power supply
OP
Primary power system F1 100V 200V common
E
2.
[18-16]
Print-positioning pulse motor First pressure control pulse motor Second pressure control pulse motor First pressure solenoid Second pressure solenoid First separation fan A First separation fan B Central suction fan First separation pump solenoid Second separation pump solenoid Print drum brake First horizontal pulse motor Second horizontal pulse motor First master compression motor Second master compression motor First master disposal motor Second master disposal motor First clamp motor Second clamp motor Master making unit transport pulse motor
Chapter 18 PCBs
System
Status after power reset Error display not currently available Rear cover safety SW1 indicated to be OFF
Connecting part Job separator AF: N First print drum locking solenoid Second print drum locking solenoid Total counter Master counter First inking motor Second inking motor Rear cover safety SW1 Rear cover safety SW2 First master disposal box safety SW Second master disposal box safety SW Master making unit drawer cover safety SW
RIS
OE
UR
OP
24V-C
E
Fuse no. F6 250V 3.15A
[18-17]
Chapter 18 PCBs
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
MEMO
[18-18]
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
[ Blank Page ]
E OP UR OE RIS
MZ 770 / MZ790 / MV7690C Technical Manual (Rev. 0.3) Published April 2004 Reproduction and duplication prohibited Edited and published by: Technical Training Center, Riso Kagaku Corporation
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice to permit product improvements.